Page 1
Page 2
Page 3
The Project Gutenberg eBook of Practical Mechanics for Boys
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most other
parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may
copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License
included with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in
the United States, you will have to check the laws of the country where you are
located before using this eBook.
Title: Practical Mechanics for Boys
Author: James Slough Zerbe
Release date: August 11, 2007 [eBook #22298]
Most recently updated: January 2, 2021
Language: English
Other information and formats: www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/22298
Credits: Produced by Joe Longo and the Online Distributed
Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net
*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK PRACTICAL
MECHANICS FOR BOYS ***
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most other
parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may
copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License
included with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in
the United States, you will have to check the laws of the country where you are
located before using this eBook.
Title: Practical Mechanics for Boys
Author: James Slough Zerbe
Release date: August 11, 2007 [eBook #22298]
Most recently updated: January 2, 2021
Language: English
Other information and formats: www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/22298
Credits: Produced by Joe Longo and the Online Distributed
Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net
*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK PRACTICAL
MECHANICS FOR BOYS ***
Page 4
The "How-to-do-it" Books
Page 5
PRACTICAL MECHANICS FOR
BOYS
BOYS
Page 6
THE "HOW-TO-DO-IT" BOOKS
PRACTICAL
MECHANICS
FOR BOYS
In language which every boy can
understand and so arranged that he
may readily carry out any work from
the instructions given.
WITH MANY ORIGINAL ILLUSTRATIONS
By J. S. ZERBE, M.E.
Author of
CARPENTRY FOR BOYS ELECTRICITY FOR BOYS
M. A. DONOHUE & COMPANY
CHICAGO :: NEW YORK
Copyright, 1914, by
THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY
PRACTICAL
MECHANICS
FOR BOYS
In language which every boy can
understand and so arranged that he
may readily carry out any work from
the instructions given.
WITH MANY ORIGINAL ILLUSTRATIONS
By J. S. ZERBE, M.E.
Author of
CARPENTRY FOR BOYS ELECTRICITY FOR BOYS
M. A. DONOHUE & COMPANY
CHICAGO :: NEW YORK
Copyright, 1914, by
THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY
Page 7
Made in U. S. A.
Page 8
CONTENTS
Introductory Page 1
I. On Tools Generally Page 7
Varied Requirements. List of Tools. Swivel Vises.
Parts of Lathe. Chisels. Grinding Apparatus. Large
Machines. Chucks. Bench Tools. Selecting a Lathe.
Combination Square. Micrometers. Protractors.
Utilizing Bevel Protractors. Truing Grindstones. Sets
of Tools. The Work Bench. The Proper Dimensions.
How Arranged.
II. How to Grind and Sharpen Tools Page 26
Importance of the Cutting Tool. The Grinder.
Correct Use of Grinder. Lathe Bitts. Roughing
Tools. The Clearance. The Cutting Angle. Drills.
Wrong Grinding. Chisels. Cold Chisels. System in
Work. Wrong Use of Tools.
III. Setting and Holding Tools Page 34
Lathe Speed. The Hack-saw. Hack-saw Frame. The
Blade. Files. Grindstones. Emery and Grinding
Wheels. Carelessness in Holding Tools. Calipers.
Care in Use of Calipers. Machine Bitts. The Proper
Angle for Lathe Tools. Setting the Bitt. The Setting
Angle. Bad Practice. Proper Lathe Speeds. Boring
Tools on Lathe. The Rake of the Drill. Laps. Using
the Lap. Surface Gages. Uses of the Surface Gage.
Page 48 p. ii
IV. On the First Use of the File
The First Test. Filing an Irregular Block. Filing a
Bar Straight. Filing Bar with Parallel Sides.
Surfacing Off Disks. True Surfacing. Precision
Tools. Test of the Mechanic. Test Suggestions. Use
Introductory Page 1
I. On Tools Generally Page 7
Varied Requirements. List of Tools. Swivel Vises.
Parts of Lathe. Chisels. Grinding Apparatus. Large
Machines. Chucks. Bench Tools. Selecting a Lathe.
Combination Square. Micrometers. Protractors.
Utilizing Bevel Protractors. Truing Grindstones. Sets
of Tools. The Work Bench. The Proper Dimensions.
How Arranged.
II. How to Grind and Sharpen Tools Page 26
Importance of the Cutting Tool. The Grinder.
Correct Use of Grinder. Lathe Bitts. Roughing
Tools. The Clearance. The Cutting Angle. Drills.
Wrong Grinding. Chisels. Cold Chisels. System in
Work. Wrong Use of Tools.
III. Setting and Holding Tools Page 34
Lathe Speed. The Hack-saw. Hack-saw Frame. The
Blade. Files. Grindstones. Emery and Grinding
Wheels. Carelessness in Holding Tools. Calipers.
Care in Use of Calipers. Machine Bitts. The Proper
Angle for Lathe Tools. Setting the Bitt. The Setting
Angle. Bad Practice. Proper Lathe Speeds. Boring
Tools on Lathe. The Rake of the Drill. Laps. Using
the Lap. Surface Gages. Uses of the Surface Gage.
Page 48 p. ii
IV. On the First Use of the File
The First Test. Filing an Irregular Block. Filing a
Bar Straight. Filing Bar with Parallel Sides.
Surfacing Off Disks. True Surfacing. Precision
Tools. Test of the Mechanic. Test Suggestions. Use
Page 9
of the Dividers. Cutting a Key-way. Key-way
Difficulties. Filing Metal Round. Kinds of Files.
Cotter-file. Square. Pinion. Half-round. Round.
Triangular. Equalizing. Cross. Slitting. Character of
File Tooth. Double Cut. Float-cut. Rasp Cut.
Holding the File. Injuring Files. Drawing Back the
File.
V. How to Commence Work Page 61
Familiarity with Tools. File Practice. Using the
Dividers. Finding Centers. Hack-saw Practice.
Cutting Metal True. Lathe Work. First Steps. Setting
the Tool. Metals Used. The Four Important Things.
Turning Up a Cylinder. Turning Grooves. Disks.
Lathe Speeds.
VI. Illustrating Some of the Fundamental Page 68
Devices
Belt Lacing. Gears. Crown Wheel. Grooved Friction
Gearing. A Valve which Closes by the Water
Pressure. Cone Pulleys. Universal Joint. Trammel
for Making Ellipses. Escapements. Simple Device to
Prevent a Wheel or Shaft from Turning Back. Racks
and Pinions. Mutilated Gears. Simple Shaft
Coupling. Clutches. Ball and Socket Joints. Tripping
Devices. Anchor Bolt. Lazy Tongs. Disk Shears.
Wabble Saw. Crank Motion by a Slotted Yoke.
Continuous Feed by Motion of a Lever. Crank
Motion. Ratchet Head. Bench Clamp. Helico-volute p. iii
Spring. Double helico-volute. Helical Spring. Single
Volute Helix Spring. Flat Spiral, or Convolute.
Eccentric Rod and Strap. Anti-dead Center for
Lathe.
VII. Properties of Materials Page 79
Difficulties. Filing Metal Round. Kinds of Files.
Cotter-file. Square. Pinion. Half-round. Round.
Triangular. Equalizing. Cross. Slitting. Character of
File Tooth. Double Cut. Float-cut. Rasp Cut.
Holding the File. Injuring Files. Drawing Back the
File.
V. How to Commence Work Page 61
Familiarity with Tools. File Practice. Using the
Dividers. Finding Centers. Hack-saw Practice.
Cutting Metal True. Lathe Work. First Steps. Setting
the Tool. Metals Used. The Four Important Things.
Turning Up a Cylinder. Turning Grooves. Disks.
Lathe Speeds.
VI. Illustrating Some of the Fundamental Page 68
Devices
Belt Lacing. Gears. Crown Wheel. Grooved Friction
Gearing. A Valve which Closes by the Water
Pressure. Cone Pulleys. Universal Joint. Trammel
for Making Ellipses. Escapements. Simple Device to
Prevent a Wheel or Shaft from Turning Back. Racks
and Pinions. Mutilated Gears. Simple Shaft
Coupling. Clutches. Ball and Socket Joints. Tripping
Devices. Anchor Bolt. Lazy Tongs. Disk Shears.
Wabble Saw. Crank Motion by a Slotted Yoke.
Continuous Feed by Motion of a Lever. Crank
Motion. Ratchet Head. Bench Clamp. Helico-volute p. iii
Spring. Double helico-volute. Helical Spring. Single
Volute Helix Spring. Flat Spiral, or Convolute.
Eccentric Rod and Strap. Anti-dead Center for
Lathe.
VII. Properties of Materials Page 79
Page 10
Elasticity. Traction. Torsion. Flexure. Tenacity. The
Most Tenacious Metal. Ductility. Malleability.
Hardness. Alloys. Resistance. Persistence.
Conductivity. Equalization. Reciprocity. Molecular
Forces. Attraction. Cohesion. Adhesion. Affinity.
Porosity. Compressibility. Elasticity. Inertia.
Momentum. Weight. Centripetal Force. Centrifugal
Force. Capillary Attraction. The Sap of Trees.
Sound. Acoustics. Sound Mediums. Vibration.
Velocity of Sound. Sound Reflections. Resonance.
Echos. Speaking Trumpet. The Stethoscope. The
Vitascope. The Phonautograph. The Phonograph.
Light. The Corpuscular Theory. Undulatory Theory.
Luminous Bodies. Velocity of Light. Reflection.
Refraction. Colors. The Spectroscope. The Rainbow.
Heat. Expansion.
VIII. How Draughting Becomes a Valuable Aid Page 95
Lines in Drawing. Shading. Direction of Shade.
Perspectives. The Most Pronounced Lines. Direction
of Light. Scale Drawings. Degree, and What it
Means. Memorizing Angles. Section Lining. Making
Ellipses and Irregular Curves. Focal Points.
Isometric and Perspective. The Protractor.
Suggestions in Drawing. Holding the Pen. Inks.
Tracing Cloth. Detail Paper. How to Proceed.
Indicating Material by Section Lines. p. iv
IX. Treatment and Use of Metals Page 112
Most Tenacious Metal. Ductility. Malleability.
Hardness. Alloys. Resistance. Persistence.
Conductivity. Equalization. Reciprocity. Molecular
Forces. Attraction. Cohesion. Adhesion. Affinity.
Porosity. Compressibility. Elasticity. Inertia.
Momentum. Weight. Centripetal Force. Centrifugal
Force. Capillary Attraction. The Sap of Trees.
Sound. Acoustics. Sound Mediums. Vibration.
Velocity of Sound. Sound Reflections. Resonance.
Echos. Speaking Trumpet. The Stethoscope. The
Vitascope. The Phonautograph. The Phonograph.
Light. The Corpuscular Theory. Undulatory Theory.
Luminous Bodies. Velocity of Light. Reflection.
Refraction. Colors. The Spectroscope. The Rainbow.
Heat. Expansion.
VIII. How Draughting Becomes a Valuable Aid Page 95
Lines in Drawing. Shading. Direction of Shade.
Perspectives. The Most Pronounced Lines. Direction
of Light. Scale Drawings. Degree, and What it
Means. Memorizing Angles. Section Lining. Making
Ellipses and Irregular Curves. Focal Points.
Isometric and Perspective. The Protractor.
Suggestions in Drawing. Holding the Pen. Inks.
Tracing Cloth. Detail Paper. How to Proceed.
Indicating Material by Section Lines. p. iv
IX. Treatment and Use of Metals Page 112
Page 11
Annealing. Toughness and Elasticity. The Process.
Tempering. Tempering Contrasted with Annealing.
Materials Used. Gradual Tempering. Fluxing.
Uniting Metals. Alloying Method. Welding.
Sweating. Welding Compounds. Oxidation.
Soldering. Soft Solder. Hard Solder. Spelter.
Soldering Acid. The Soldering Iron.
X. On Gearing, and How Ordered Page 121
Spur and Pinion. Measuring a Gear. Pitch. Diametral
Pitch. Circular Pitch. How to Order a Gear. Bevel
and Miter Gears. Drawing Gears. Sprocket Wheels.
XI. Mechanical Power Page 128
The Lever. Wrong Inferences from Use of Lever.
The Lever Principle. Powers vs. Distance Traveled.
Power vs. Loss of Time. Wrongly-Directed Energy.
The Lever and the Pulley. Sources of Power. Water
Power. Calculating Fuel Energy. The Pressure or
Head. Fuels. Power from Winds. Speed of Wind and
Pressure. Varying Degrees of Pressure. Power from
Waves and Tides. A Profitable Field.
XII. On Measures Page 139
Horse Power. Foot Pounds. Energy. How to Find Out
the Power Developed. The Test. Calculations. The
Foot Measure. Weight. The Gallon. The Metric
System. Basis of Measurement. Metrical Table,
Showing Measurements in Feet and Inches. p. v
XIII. Useful Information for the Workshop Page 148
Finding the Circumference of a Circle. Diameter of
a Circle. Area of a Circle. Area of a Triangle.
Surface of a Ball. Solidity of a Sphere. Contents of a
Cone. Capacity of a Pipe. Capacity of Tanks. To
Toughen Aluminum. Amalgams. Prevent Boiler
Tempering. Tempering Contrasted with Annealing.
Materials Used. Gradual Tempering. Fluxing.
Uniting Metals. Alloying Method. Welding.
Sweating. Welding Compounds. Oxidation.
Soldering. Soft Solder. Hard Solder. Spelter.
Soldering Acid. The Soldering Iron.
X. On Gearing, and How Ordered Page 121
Spur and Pinion. Measuring a Gear. Pitch. Diametral
Pitch. Circular Pitch. How to Order a Gear. Bevel
and Miter Gears. Drawing Gears. Sprocket Wheels.
XI. Mechanical Power Page 128
The Lever. Wrong Inferences from Use of Lever.
The Lever Principle. Powers vs. Distance Traveled.
Power vs. Loss of Time. Wrongly-Directed Energy.
The Lever and the Pulley. Sources of Power. Water
Power. Calculating Fuel Energy. The Pressure or
Head. Fuels. Power from Winds. Speed of Wind and
Pressure. Varying Degrees of Pressure. Power from
Waves and Tides. A Profitable Field.
XII. On Measures Page 139
Horse Power. Foot Pounds. Energy. How to Find Out
the Power Developed. The Test. Calculations. The
Foot Measure. Weight. The Gallon. The Metric
System. Basis of Measurement. Metrical Table,
Showing Measurements in Feet and Inches. p. v
XIII. Useful Information for the Workshop Page 148
Finding the Circumference of a Circle. Diameter of
a Circle. Area of a Circle. Area of a Triangle.
Surface of a Ball. Solidity of a Sphere. Contents of a
Cone. Capacity of a Pipe. Capacity of Tanks. To
Toughen Aluminum. Amalgams. Prevent Boiler
Page 12
Scaling. Diamond Test. Making Glue Insoluble in
Water. Taking Glaze Out of Grindstone. To Find
Speeds of Pulleys. To Find the Diameters Required.
To Prevent Belts from Slipping. Removing Boiler
Scale. Gold Bronze. Cleaning Rusted Utensils. To
Prevent Plaster of Paris from Setting Quickly. The
Measurement of Liquids with Spoons.
XIV. Simplicity of Great Inventions and of Page 152
Nature's Manifestation
Invention Precedes Science. Simplicity in
Inventions. The Telegraph. Telephone. Transmitter.
Phonograph. Wireless Telegraphy. Printing
Telegraph. Electric Motor. Explosions. Vibrations in
Nature. Qualities of Sound. The Photographer's
Plate. Quadruplex Telegraphy. Electric Harmony.
Odors. Odophone. A Bouquet of Vibrations. Taste.
Color.
XV. Workshop Recipes and Formulas Page 160
Water. Taking Glaze Out of Grindstone. To Find
Speeds of Pulleys. To Find the Diameters Required.
To Prevent Belts from Slipping. Removing Boiler
Scale. Gold Bronze. Cleaning Rusted Utensils. To
Prevent Plaster of Paris from Setting Quickly. The
Measurement of Liquids with Spoons.
XIV. Simplicity of Great Inventions and of Page 152
Nature's Manifestation
Invention Precedes Science. Simplicity in
Inventions. The Telegraph. Telephone. Transmitter.
Phonograph. Wireless Telegraphy. Printing
Telegraph. Electric Motor. Explosions. Vibrations in
Nature. Qualities of Sound. The Photographer's
Plate. Quadruplex Telegraphy. Electric Harmony.
Odors. Odophone. A Bouquet of Vibrations. Taste.
Color.
XV. Workshop Recipes and Formulas Page 160
Page 13
Adhesives for Various Uses. Belt Glue. Cements.
Transparent Cement. U. S. Government Gum. To
Make Different Alloys. Bell-metal. Brass. Bronzes.
Boiler Compounds. Celluloid. Clay Mixture for
Forges. Modeling Clay. Fluids for Cleaning Clothes,
Furniture, etc. Disinfectants. Deodorants. Emery for
Lapping Purposes. Explosives. Fulminates. Files,
and How to Keep Clean. Renewing Files. Fire-proof p. vi
Materials or Substances. Floor Dressings. Stains.
Foot Powders. Frost Bites. Glass. To Frost. How to
Distinguish. Iron and Steel. To Soften Castings.
Lacquers. For Aluminum and Brass. Copper.
Lubricants. Paper. Photography. Plasters. Plating,
Coloring Metals. Polishes. Putty. Rust Preventives.
Solders. Soldering Fluxes. Steel Tempering.
Varnishes. Sealing Wax.
XVI. Handy Tables Page 178
Table of Weights for Round and Square Steel. Table
of Weight of Flat Steel Bars. Avoirdupois Weight.
Troy Weight. Apothecaries' Weight. Linear Measure.
Long Measure. Square Measure. Solid or Cubic
Measure. Dry Measure. Liquid Measure. Paper
Measure. Table of Temperatures. Strength of Various
Metals. Freezing Mixtures. Ignition Temperatures.
Power and Heat Equivalents.
XVII. Inventions and Patents, and Information Page 188
About the Rights and Duties of Inventors and
Workmen
The Machinist's Opportunities. What is an Inventor?
Idea Not Invention. What an Invention Must Have.
Obligation of the Model Builder. Paying for
Developing Devices. Time for Filing an Application.
Selling an Unpatented Invention. Joint Inventors.
Joint Owners Not Partners. Partnerships in Patents.
Transparent Cement. U. S. Government Gum. To
Make Different Alloys. Bell-metal. Brass. Bronzes.
Boiler Compounds. Celluloid. Clay Mixture for
Forges. Modeling Clay. Fluids for Cleaning Clothes,
Furniture, etc. Disinfectants. Deodorants. Emery for
Lapping Purposes. Explosives. Fulminates. Files,
and How to Keep Clean. Renewing Files. Fire-proof p. vi
Materials or Substances. Floor Dressings. Stains.
Foot Powders. Frost Bites. Glass. To Frost. How to
Distinguish. Iron and Steel. To Soften Castings.
Lacquers. For Aluminum and Brass. Copper.
Lubricants. Paper. Photography. Plasters. Plating,
Coloring Metals. Polishes. Putty. Rust Preventives.
Solders. Soldering Fluxes. Steel Tempering.
Varnishes. Sealing Wax.
XVI. Handy Tables Page 178
Table of Weights for Round and Square Steel. Table
of Weight of Flat Steel Bars. Avoirdupois Weight.
Troy Weight. Apothecaries' Weight. Linear Measure.
Long Measure. Square Measure. Solid or Cubic
Measure. Dry Measure. Liquid Measure. Paper
Measure. Table of Temperatures. Strength of Various
Metals. Freezing Mixtures. Ignition Temperatures.
Power and Heat Equivalents.
XVII. Inventions and Patents, and Information Page 188
About the Rights and Duties of Inventors and
Workmen
The Machinist's Opportunities. What is an Inventor?
Idea Not Invention. What an Invention Must Have.
Obligation of the Model Builder. Paying for
Developing Devices. Time for Filing an Application.
Selling an Unpatented Invention. Joint Inventors.
Joint Owners Not Partners. Partnerships in Patents.
Page 14
Form of Protection Issued by the Government. Life
of a Patent. Interference Proceedings. Concurrent
Applications. Granting Interference. Steps in
Interference. First Sketches. First Model. First
Operative Machine. Preliminary Statements. Proving p. vii
Invention. What Patents Are Issued For. Owner's
Rights. Divided and Undivided Patents.
Assignments. How Made. What an Invention Must
Have. Basis for Granting Patent in the United States.
Reasons for Granting Abroad. Original Grants of
Patents. International Agreement. Application for
Patents. Course of Procedure. Costs. Filing a Matter
of Secrecy.
Glossary of Words Page 195
Index Page 213
of a Patent. Interference Proceedings. Concurrent
Applications. Granting Interference. Steps in
Interference. First Sketches. First Model. First
Operative Machine. Preliminary Statements. Proving p. vii
Invention. What Patents Are Issued For. Owner's
Rights. Divided and Undivided Patents.
Assignments. How Made. What an Invention Must
Have. Basis for Granting Patent in the United States.
Reasons for Granting Abroad. Original Grants of
Patents. International Agreement. Application for
Patents. Course of Procedure. Costs. Filing a Matter
of Secrecy.
Glossary of Words Page 195
Index Page 213
Page 15
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Page 16
FIG. PAGE p. ix
1. Bench vise 8
2. Pipe grip for vise 9
3. Swivel vise 10
4. Speed lathe 11
5. Calipers 12
6. Engine lathe 13
7. Center gage 14
8. Pocket screw and wire gage 15
9. Handy bench vise 16
10. Combination square 17
11. Uses of the combination square 18
12. A quick adjusting micrometer 19
13. Universal bevel protractor 20
14. Uses of universal bevel protractor 21
15. Grindstone truing device 22
16. Set of tools and case 23
17. The work bench 24
18. Hook tool 28
19. Parting tool 28
20. Knife tool 28
21. Right-hand side tool 28
22. Internal tool 28
23. Left-hand side tool 28
24. Tool for wrought iron 29
25. Tool for cast iron 29
26. End view of drill 31
27. Side view of drill 31
28. Hack-saw frame 35
29. Hack-saw blade 35
30. Plain hook tool 38
31. Plain straight tool 38
32. Proper angles for tools 39
33. Angles for tools 39
1. Bench vise 8
2. Pipe grip for vise 9
3. Swivel vise 10
4. Speed lathe 11
5. Calipers 12
6. Engine lathe 13
7. Center gage 14
8. Pocket screw and wire gage 15
9. Handy bench vise 16
10. Combination square 17
11. Uses of the combination square 18
12. A quick adjusting micrometer 19
13. Universal bevel protractor 20
14. Uses of universal bevel protractor 21
15. Grindstone truing device 22
16. Set of tools and case 23
17. The work bench 24
18. Hook tool 28
19. Parting tool 28
20. Knife tool 28
21. Right-hand side tool 28
22. Internal tool 28
23. Left-hand side tool 28
24. Tool for wrought iron 29
25. Tool for cast iron 29
26. End view of drill 31
27. Side view of drill 31
28. Hack-saw frame 35
29. Hack-saw blade 35
30. Plain hook tool 38
31. Plain straight tool 38
32. Proper angles for tools 39
33. Angles for tools 39
Page 17
39 p. x
34. Angles for tools
35. Set of the bitt 40
36. Correct angle 41
37. Wrong angle 41
38. Too low 42
39. Improper set 42
40. Internal set 43
41. Set for brass 43
42. Surface gage 44
43. Uses of surface gage 46
44. Rounded surface 49
45. Winding surface 49
46. Hexagon nut 51
47. Laying off hexagon nut 51
48. Cutting key-way 52
49. Key-seat rule 54
50. Filing metal round 54
51. Filing metal round 54
52. Making a round bearing 55
53. Making a round bearing 55
54. Cross section of file 56
55. Files 58
56. Correct file movement 59
57. Incorrect file movement 60
58. Belt lacing 69
59. Belt lacing 69
60. Belt lacing 69
61. Belt lacing 69
62. Bevel gears 71
63. Miter gears 71
64. Crown wheel 71
65. Grooved friction gears 71
66. Valve 71
67. Cone pulleys 71
68. Universal joint 71
69. Trammel 73
70. Escapement 73
71. Device for holding wheel 73
34. Angles for tools
35. Set of the bitt 40
36. Correct angle 41
37. Wrong angle 41
38. Too low 42
39. Improper set 42
40. Internal set 43
41. Set for brass 43
42. Surface gage 44
43. Uses of surface gage 46
44. Rounded surface 49
45. Winding surface 49
46. Hexagon nut 51
47. Laying off hexagon nut 51
48. Cutting key-way 52
49. Key-seat rule 54
50. Filing metal round 54
51. Filing metal round 54
52. Making a round bearing 55
53. Making a round bearing 55
54. Cross section of file 56
55. Files 58
56. Correct file movement 59
57. Incorrect file movement 60
58. Belt lacing 69
59. Belt lacing 69
60. Belt lacing 69
61. Belt lacing 69
62. Bevel gears 71
63. Miter gears 71
64. Crown wheel 71
65. Grooved friction gears 71
66. Valve 71
67. Cone pulleys 71
68. Universal joint 71
69. Trammel 73
70. Escapement 73
71. Device for holding wheel 73
Page 18
73 p. xi
72. Rack and pinion
73. Mutilated gears 73
74. Shaft coupling 73
75. Clutches 75
76. Ball and socket joints 75
77. Fastening ball 75
78. Tripping devices 75
79. Anchor bolt 75
80. Lazy tongs 75
81. Disc shears 75
82. Wabble saw 76
83. Continuous crank motion 76
84. Continues feed 76
85. Crank motion 76
86. Ratchet head 76
87. Bench clamp 76
88. Helico-volute spring 77
89. Double helico-volute 77
90. Helical spring 77
91. Single volute-helix 77
92. Flat spiral or convolute 77
93. Eccentric rod or strap 77
94. Anti dead-centers for lathes 77
95. Plain circle 95
96. Ring 96
97. Raised surface 96
98. Sphere 96
99. Depressed surface 96
100. Concave 97
101. Forms of cubical outlines 98
102. Forms of cubical outlines 98
103. Forms of cubical outlines 98
104. Forms of cubical outlines 98
105. Shading edges 99
106. Shading edges 99
107. Illustrating heavy lines 100
108. Illustrating heavy lines 100
109. Lines on plain surfaces 101
72. Rack and pinion
73. Mutilated gears 73
74. Shaft coupling 73
75. Clutches 75
76. Ball and socket joints 75
77. Fastening ball 75
78. Tripping devices 75
79. Anchor bolt 75
80. Lazy tongs 75
81. Disc shears 75
82. Wabble saw 76
83. Continuous crank motion 76
84. Continues feed 76
85. Crank motion 76
86. Ratchet head 76
87. Bench clamp 76
88. Helico-volute spring 77
89. Double helico-volute 77
90. Helical spring 77
91. Single volute-helix 77
92. Flat spiral or convolute 77
93. Eccentric rod or strap 77
94. Anti dead-centers for lathes 77
95. Plain circle 95
96. Ring 96
97. Raised surface 96
98. Sphere 96
99. Depressed surface 96
100. Concave 97
101. Forms of cubical outlines 98
102. Forms of cubical outlines 98
103. Forms of cubical outlines 98
104. Forms of cubical outlines 98
105. Shading edges 99
106. Shading edges 99
107. Illustrating heavy lines 100
108. Illustrating heavy lines 100
109. Lines on plain surfaces 101
Page 19
101 p. xii
110. Lines on plain surfaces
111. Illustrating degrees 102
112. Section lining 103
113. Drawing an ellipse 104
114. Perspective at angles 106
115. Perspective of cube 107
116. Perspective of cube 107
117. Perspective of cube 107
118. Protractor 108
119. Using the protractor 109
120. Section-lining metals 110
121. Spur gears 122
122. Miter gear pitch 123
123. Bevel gears 124
124. Laying of miter gears 125
125. Sprocket wheel 128
126. Simple lever 129
127. Lever action 130
128. The pulley 132
129. Change of direction 133
130. Change of direction 133
131. Steam pressure 135
132. Water pressure 135
133. Prony brake 141
134. Speed indicator 142
p. 1
110. Lines on plain surfaces
111. Illustrating degrees 102
112. Section lining 103
113. Drawing an ellipse 104
114. Perspective at angles 106
115. Perspective of cube 107
116. Perspective of cube 107
117. Perspective of cube 107
118. Protractor 108
119. Using the protractor 109
120. Section-lining metals 110
121. Spur gears 122
122. Miter gear pitch 123
123. Bevel gears 124
124. Laying of miter gears 125
125. Sprocket wheel 128
126. Simple lever 129
127. Lever action 130
128. The pulley 132
129. Change of direction 133
130. Change of direction 133
131. Steam pressure 135
132. Water pressure 135
133. Prony brake 141
134. Speed indicator 142
p. 1
Page 20
Page 21
PRACTICAL MECHANICS FOR BOYS
Page 22
INTRODUCTORYToC
The American method of teaching the mechanical arts has some disadvantages, as
compared with the apprentice system followed in England, and very largely on the
continent.
It is too often the case that here a boy or a young man begins work in a machine
shop, not for the avowed purpose of learning the trade, but simply as a helper, with
no other object in view than to get his weekly wages.
Abroad, the plan is one which, for various reasons, could not be tolerated here. There
he is bound for a certain term of years, and with the prime object of teaching him to
become an artisan. More often than otherwise he pays for this privilege, and he
knows it is incumbent on him "to make good" right from the start.
He labors under the disadvantage, however, that he has a certain tenure, and in that
course he is not pushed forward from one step to the next on account of any merit of
his own. His advancement is fixed by the time he has put in at each part of the p.work,
2
and thus no note is taken of his individuality.
Here the boy rises step after step by virtue of his own qualifications, and we
recognize that one boy has the capacity to learn faster than another. If he can learn in
one year what it requires three in another to acquire, in order to do it as perfectly, it is
an injury to the apt workman to be held back and deterred from making his way
upwardly.
It may be urged that the apprentice system instills thoroughness. This may be true;
but it also does another thing: It makes the man a mere machine. The true workman is
a thinker. He is ever on the alert to find easier, quicker and more efficient means for
doing certain work.
What is called "Efficiency" in labor methods, can never obtain in an apprenticeship
system for this reason. In a certain operation, where twelve motions are required to
do a certain thing, and a minute to perform the twelve operations, a simplified way,
necessitating only eight motions, means a difference in saving one-third of the time.
The nineteen hundred fewer particular movements in a day's work, being a less strain
on the operator, both physically and mentally, to say nothing whatever of the
p. 3
advantages which the proprietor of the shop would gain.
I make this a leading text in the presentation of this book; namely, that individual
merit and stimulus is something of such extreme importance that it should be made
The American method of teaching the mechanical arts has some disadvantages, as
compared with the apprentice system followed in England, and very largely on the
continent.
It is too often the case that here a boy or a young man begins work in a machine
shop, not for the avowed purpose of learning the trade, but simply as a helper, with
no other object in view than to get his weekly wages.
Abroad, the plan is one which, for various reasons, could not be tolerated here. There
he is bound for a certain term of years, and with the prime object of teaching him to
become an artisan. More often than otherwise he pays for this privilege, and he
knows it is incumbent on him "to make good" right from the start.
He labors under the disadvantage, however, that he has a certain tenure, and in that
course he is not pushed forward from one step to the next on account of any merit of
his own. His advancement is fixed by the time he has put in at each part of the p.work,
2
and thus no note is taken of his individuality.
Here the boy rises step after step by virtue of his own qualifications, and we
recognize that one boy has the capacity to learn faster than another. If he can learn in
one year what it requires three in another to acquire, in order to do it as perfectly, it is
an injury to the apt workman to be held back and deterred from making his way
upwardly.
It may be urged that the apprentice system instills thoroughness. This may be true;
but it also does another thing: It makes the man a mere machine. The true workman is
a thinker. He is ever on the alert to find easier, quicker and more efficient means for
doing certain work.
What is called "Efficiency" in labor methods, can never obtain in an apprenticeship
system for this reason. In a certain operation, where twelve motions are required to
do a certain thing, and a minute to perform the twelve operations, a simplified way,
necessitating only eight motions, means a difference in saving one-third of the time.
The nineteen hundred fewer particular movements in a day's work, being a less strain
on the operator, both physically and mentally, to say nothing whatever of the
p. 3
advantages which the proprietor of the shop would gain.
I make this a leading text in the presentation of this book; namely, that individual
merit and stimulus is something of such extreme importance that it should be made
Page 23
the keynote for every boy who tries to become a mechanic.
The machinist easily occupies a leading place in the multitude of trades and
occupations. There is hardly an article of use but comes to the market through his
hands. His labor is most diverse, and in his employment doing machine work he is
called upon to do things which vary widely in their character.
These require special knowledge, particular tools, and more frequently than
otherwise, a high order of inventive ability to enable him to accomplish the task.
The boy should be taught, at the outset, that certain things must be learned
thoroughly, and that habits in a machine shop can be bad as well as good. When he
once becomes accustomed to putting a tool back in its rightful place the moment he is
through with it, he has taken a long step toward efficiency.
When he grasps a tool and presents it to the work without turning it over several
times, or has acquired the knack of picking up the right tool at the proper place, he is
p. 4
making strides in the direction of becoming a rapid and skilled workman.
These, and many other things of like import, will require our attention throughout the
various chapters.
It is not the intention of the book to make every boy who reads and studies it, a
machinist; nor have we any desire to present a lot of useful articles as samples of
what to make. The object is to show the boy what are the requirements necessary to
make him a machinist; how to hold, handle, sharpen and grind the various tools; the
proper ones to use for each particular character of work; how the various machines
are handled and cared for; the best materials to use; and suggest the numerous things
which can be done in a shop which will pave the way for making his work pleasant
as well as profitable.
It also analyzes the manner in which the job is laid out; how to set the tools to get the
most effective work; and explains what is meant by making a finished piece of
workmanship. These things, properly acquired, each must determine in his own mind
whether he is adapted to follow up the work.
Over and above all, we shall try to give the boy some stimulus for his work. Unless
p. 5
he takes an interest in what he is doing, he will never become an artisan in the true
sense of the word.
Go through the book, and see whether, here and there, you do not get some glimpses
of what it means to take a pleasure in doing each particular thing, and you will find in
every instance that it is a satisfaction because you have learned to perform it with
ease.
The machinist easily occupies a leading place in the multitude of trades and
occupations. There is hardly an article of use but comes to the market through his
hands. His labor is most diverse, and in his employment doing machine work he is
called upon to do things which vary widely in their character.
These require special knowledge, particular tools, and more frequently than
otherwise, a high order of inventive ability to enable him to accomplish the task.
The boy should be taught, at the outset, that certain things must be learned
thoroughly, and that habits in a machine shop can be bad as well as good. When he
once becomes accustomed to putting a tool back in its rightful place the moment he is
through with it, he has taken a long step toward efficiency.
When he grasps a tool and presents it to the work without turning it over several
times, or has acquired the knack of picking up the right tool at the proper place, he is
p. 4
making strides in the direction of becoming a rapid and skilled workman.
These, and many other things of like import, will require our attention throughout the
various chapters.
It is not the intention of the book to make every boy who reads and studies it, a
machinist; nor have we any desire to present a lot of useful articles as samples of
what to make. The object is to show the boy what are the requirements necessary to
make him a machinist; how to hold, handle, sharpen and grind the various tools; the
proper ones to use for each particular character of work; how the various machines
are handled and cared for; the best materials to use; and suggest the numerous things
which can be done in a shop which will pave the way for making his work pleasant
as well as profitable.
It also analyzes the manner in which the job is laid out; how to set the tools to get the
most effective work; and explains what is meant by making a finished piece of
workmanship. These things, properly acquired, each must determine in his own mind
whether he is adapted to follow up the work.
Over and above all, we shall try to give the boy some stimulus for his work. Unless
p. 5
he takes an interest in what he is doing, he will never become an artisan in the true
sense of the word.
Go through the book, and see whether, here and there, you do not get some glimpses
of what it means to take a pleasure in doing each particular thing, and you will find in
every instance that it is a satisfaction because you have learned to perform it with
ease.
Page 24
I do not know of anything which has done as much to advance the arts and
manufactures, during the last century, as the universal desire to improve the form,
shape and structure of tools; and the effort to invent new ones. This finds its
reflection everywhere in the production of new and improved products.
In this particular I have been led to formulate a homely sentence which expresses the
idea: Invention consists in doing an old thing a new way; or a new thing any way.
The Author.
p. 7
manufactures, during the last century, as the universal desire to improve the form,
shape and structure of tools; and the effort to invent new ones. This finds its
reflection everywhere in the production of new and improved products.
In this particular I have been led to formulate a homely sentence which expresses the
idea: Invention consists in doing an old thing a new way; or a new thing any way.
The Author.
p. 7
Page 25
Page 26
CHAPTER IToC
ON TOOLS GENERALLY
Judging from the favorable comments of educators, on the general arrangement of
the subject matter in the work on "Carpentry for Boys," I am disposed to follow that
plan in this book in so far as it pertains to tools.
In this field, as in "Carpentry," I do not find any guide which is adapted to teach the
boy the fundamentals of mechanics. Writers usually overlook the fact, that as the boy
knows nothing whatever about the subject, he could not be expected to know
anything about tools.
To describe them gives a start in the education, but it is far short of what is necessary
for one in his condition. If he is told that the chisel or bit for a lathe has a diamond
point, or is round-nosed, and must be ground at a certain angle, he naturally wants to
know, as all boys do, why it should be at that angle.
So in the setting of the tools with relation to the work, the holding and manipulation
of the file, of the drill for accurate boring, together with numerous little things, are all
taken for granted, and the boy blunders along with the ultimate object in p.sight, 8
without having the pathway cleared so he may readily reach the goal.
Varied Requirements.—The machinist's trade is one which requires the most varied
tools of all occupations, and they are by all odds the most expensive to be found in
the entire list of vocations.
ON TOOLS GENERALLY
Judging from the favorable comments of educators, on the general arrangement of
the subject matter in the work on "Carpentry for Boys," I am disposed to follow that
plan in this book in so far as it pertains to tools.
In this field, as in "Carpentry," I do not find any guide which is adapted to teach the
boy the fundamentals of mechanics. Writers usually overlook the fact, that as the boy
knows nothing whatever about the subject, he could not be expected to know
anything about tools.
To describe them gives a start in the education, but it is far short of what is necessary
for one in his condition. If he is told that the chisel or bit for a lathe has a diamond
point, or is round-nosed, and must be ground at a certain angle, he naturally wants to
know, as all boys do, why it should be at that angle.
So in the setting of the tools with relation to the work, the holding and manipulation
of the file, of the drill for accurate boring, together with numerous little things, are all
taken for granted, and the boy blunders along with the ultimate object in p.sight, 8
without having the pathway cleared so he may readily reach the goal.
Varied Requirements.—The machinist's trade is one which requires the most varied
tools of all occupations, and they are by all odds the most expensive to be found in
the entire list of vocations.
Page 27
Fig. 1. Bench Vise.ToList
This arises from the fact that he must work with the most stubborn of all materials.
He finds resistance at every step in bringing forth a product.
p. 9
List of Tools.—With a view of familiarizing the boy with this great variety the
following list is compiled, from which we shall select the ones essential in the initial
equipment of a small shop.
Vises.—One small, good vise is infinitely preferable to two bad ones. For ordinary
work a 3-inch jaw is preferable, and it should be firmly mounted on the bench. So
many kinds are now made that it would be a costly thing to purchase one for each
special use, therefore the boy will find it profitable to make some attachments for the
ordinary vise.
Fig. 2. Pipe Grip for Vise. ToList
Swivel Vises.—A swivel vise is always a good tool, the cost being not excessive over
the ordinary kind. Then a pair of grips for holding pipe, or round material which is to
be threaded, can readily be made.
This arises from the fact that he must work with the most stubborn of all materials.
He finds resistance at every step in bringing forth a product.
p. 9
List of Tools.—With a view of familiarizing the boy with this great variety the
following list is compiled, from which we shall select the ones essential in the initial
equipment of a small shop.
Vises.—One small, good vise is infinitely preferable to two bad ones. For ordinary
work a 3-inch jaw is preferable, and it should be firmly mounted on the bench. So
many kinds are now made that it would be a costly thing to purchase one for each
special use, therefore the boy will find it profitable to make some attachments for the
ordinary vise.
Fig. 2. Pipe Grip for Vise. ToList
Swivel Vises.—A swivel vise is always a good tool, the cost being not excessive over
the ordinary kind. Then a pair of grips for holding pipe, or round material which is to
be threaded, can readily be made.
Page 28
The drawing (Fig. 2) shows a serviceable pair of grips, made to fit the jaws of a vise,
and will be acceptable in much of the work. Then, the vise should be providedp. 10with
copper caps for the jaws to be used when making up articles which would otherwise
be injured by the jaws.
Fig. 3. Swivel Vise.ToList
Let us get a comprehensive view of the different kinds of tools necessary in a fully
equipped shop.
Parts of Lathe.—The first thing of importance is the lathe, and of these there is quite
a variety, and among the accompaniments are the slide rest, mandrel, back gear,
division plate, angle plate, cone plate and various chucks
p. 11
There must also be change wheels, studs and quadrant plates, self-acting feed for
surfacing and cross slide, and clamping nuts.
Drilling machines, both hand and power, hand and ratchet braces and breast-drill
stocks.
and will be acceptable in much of the work. Then, the vise should be providedp. 10with
copper caps for the jaws to be used when making up articles which would otherwise
be injured by the jaws.
Fig. 3. Swivel Vise.ToList
Let us get a comprehensive view of the different kinds of tools necessary in a fully
equipped shop.
Parts of Lathe.—The first thing of importance is the lathe, and of these there is quite
a variety, and among the accompaniments are the slide rest, mandrel, back gear,
division plate, angle plate, cone plate and various chucks
p. 11
There must also be change wheels, studs and quadrant plates, self-acting feed for
surfacing and cross slide, and clamping nuts.
Drilling machines, both hand and power, hand and ratchet braces and breast-drill
stocks.
Page 29
Fig. 4.—Speed Lathe.ToList
Chisels.—Chisels of various kinds, for chipping and cross-cutting; round-nosed,
centering, set punches, tommies and drifts.
Back, tee and centering square; bevels, spirit level, inside and outside calipers,
straight edges, rules and surface plates
p. 12
Gages for boring, scribing blocks, steel and brass scribes, stocks and dies, screw-
plates, taps for bolts, reamers.
Fig. 5. CalipersToList
Files for various descriptions, countersinks, frame and hack saws.
Chisels.—Chisels of various kinds, for chipping and cross-cutting; round-nosed,
centering, set punches, tommies and drifts.
Back, tee and centering square; bevels, spirit level, inside and outside calipers,
straight edges, rules and surface plates
p. 12
Gages for boring, scribing blocks, steel and brass scribes, stocks and dies, screw-
plates, taps for bolts, reamers.
Fig. 5. CalipersToList
Files for various descriptions, countersinks, frame and hack saws.
Page 30
Grinding Apparatus.—Emery wheel, cloth and paper, paper, flour emery, polishing
powders, laps and buffs, and polishing sticks
p. 13
Fig. 6. Engine Lathe.ToList
p. 14
Forge, anvils, tongs, swages, punches, bolt tools, hot and cold chisels, blow-pipe,
soldering iron, hard and soft solders, borax, spirits of salts, oil, resin and spelter.
To this may be added an endless variety of small bench tools, micrometers,
protractors, arbors, collets, box tools and scrapers.
Fig. 7. Center Gage.ToList
Large Machines.—The list would not be complete without the planer, shaper and
milling machine, with their variety of chucks, clamps and other attachments, too
numerous to mention.
The foregoing show what a wonderful variety of articles are found in a well-equipped
shop, all of which can be conveniently used; but to the boy who has only a small
amount of money, a workable set is indicated as follows:
powders, laps and buffs, and polishing sticks
p. 13
Fig. 6. Engine Lathe.ToList
p. 14
Forge, anvils, tongs, swages, punches, bolt tools, hot and cold chisels, blow-pipe,
soldering iron, hard and soft solders, borax, spirits of salts, oil, resin and spelter.
To this may be added an endless variety of small bench tools, micrometers,
protractors, arbors, collets, box tools and scrapers.
Fig. 7. Center Gage.ToList
Large Machines.—The list would not be complete without the planer, shaper and
milling machine, with their variety of chucks, clamps and other attachments, too
numerous to mention.
The foregoing show what a wonderful variety of articles are found in a well-equipped
shop, all of which can be conveniently used; but to the boy who has only a small
amount of money, a workable set is indicated as follows:
Page 31
A small lathe, with an 8-inch swing, can be obtained at a low cost, provided with a
countershaft complete.
p. 15
Chucks.—With this should go a small chuck, and a face-plate for large work, unless a
large chuck can also be acquired. This, with a dozen tools of various sizes, and also
small bits for drilling purposes.
The lathe will answer all purposes for drilling, but small drilling machines are now
furnished at very low figures, and such a machine will take off a great deal of duty
from the lathe.
Fig. 8. Pocket Screw and Wire Gage.ToList
As the lathe is of prime importance, never use it for drilling, if you have a driller, as it
always has enough work to do for tuning up work.
Bench Tools.—Of bench tools, a 3-inch vise, various files, center punch, two
hammers, round and A-shaped peons, hack saw, compasses, inside and outside
calipers, screw driver, cold chisels, metal square, level, straight edge, bevel square,
reamers, small emery wheel and an oil stone, make a fairly good outfit to start with,
and these can be added to from time to time.
p. 16
Everything in the machine shop centers about the lathe. It is the king of all tools. The
shaper and planer may be most efficient for surfacing, and the milling machine for
making grooves and gears, or for general cutting purposes, but the lathe possesses a
range of work not possible with either of the other tools, and for that reason should
be selected with great care.
countershaft complete.
p. 15
Chucks.—With this should go a small chuck, and a face-plate for large work, unless a
large chuck can also be acquired. This, with a dozen tools of various sizes, and also
small bits for drilling purposes.
The lathe will answer all purposes for drilling, but small drilling machines are now
furnished at very low figures, and such a machine will take off a great deal of duty
from the lathe.
Fig. 8. Pocket Screw and Wire Gage.ToList
As the lathe is of prime importance, never use it for drilling, if you have a driller, as it
always has enough work to do for tuning up work.
Bench Tools.—Of bench tools, a 3-inch vise, various files, center punch, two
hammers, round and A-shaped peons, hack saw, compasses, inside and outside
calipers, screw driver, cold chisels, metal square, level, straight edge, bevel square,
reamers, small emery wheel and an oil stone, make a fairly good outfit to start with,
and these can be added to from time to time.
p. 16
Everything in the machine shop centers about the lathe. It is the king of all tools. The
shaper and planer may be most efficient for surfacing, and the milling machine for
making grooves and gears, or for general cutting purposes, but the lathe possesses a
range of work not possible with either of the other tools, and for that reason should
be selected with great care.
Page 32
Fig. 9. Handy Bench Vise.ToList
Selecting a Lathe.—The important things about a lathe are the spindle bearings and
the ways for the tool-holder. The least play in either will ruin any work. Every other
part may be defective, but with solidly built bearing-posts and bearings, yourp. lathe
17
will be effective.
For this reason it will not pay to get a cheap tool. Better get a small, 6-inch approved
tool of this kind, than a larger cheap article. It may pay with other tools, but with a
lathe never.
Never do grinding on a lathe. The fine emery, or grinding material, is sure to reach
the bearings; it matters not what care is exercised. There is only one remedy for this
—overhauling.
Fig. 10.—Combination Square.ToList
Combination Square.—A tool of this kind is most essential, however small. It can be
used as a try-square, and has this advantage, that the head can be made to slide along
the rule and be clamped at any point. It has a beveling and a leveling device, as well.
Selecting a Lathe.—The important things about a lathe are the spindle bearings and
the ways for the tool-holder. The least play in either will ruin any work. Every other
part may be defective, but with solidly built bearing-posts and bearings, yourp. lathe
17
will be effective.
For this reason it will not pay to get a cheap tool. Better get a small, 6-inch approved
tool of this kind, than a larger cheap article. It may pay with other tools, but with a
lathe never.
Never do grinding on a lathe. The fine emery, or grinding material, is sure to reach
the bearings; it matters not what care is exercised. There is only one remedy for this
—overhauling.
Fig. 10.—Combination Square.ToList
Combination Square.—A tool of this kind is most essential, however small. It can be
used as a try-square, and has this advantage, that the head can be made to slide along
the rule and be clamped at any point. It has a beveling and a leveling device, as well.
Page 33
p. 18
Fig. 11.—Uses of the Combination Square.
ToList
The combination square provides a means for doing a great variety of work,p. 19as it
combines the qualities of a rule, square, miter, depth gage, height gage, level and
center head.
Fig. 11.—Uses of the Combination Square.
ToList
The combination square provides a means for doing a great variety of work,p. 19as it
combines the qualities of a rule, square, miter, depth gage, height gage, level and
center head.
Page 34
Fig. 12.—A Quick Adjusting
Micrometer.ToList
The full page illustration (Fig. 11) shows some of the uses and the particular manner
of holding the tool.
Micrometers.—Tools of this description are made which will accurately measure
p. 20
work in dimensions of ten-thousandths of an inch up to an inch.
The illustration (Fig. 12) shows an approved tool, and this is so constructed that it
can instantly be changed and set by merely pressing the end of the plunger as shown.
Fig. 13.—A Universal Bevel
Protractor.ToList
Protractors.—As all angles are not obtainable by the square or bevel, a protractor is
a most desirable addition to the stock of tools. As one side of the tool is flat it is
Micrometer.ToList
The full page illustration (Fig. 11) shows some of the uses and the particular manner
of holding the tool.
Micrometers.—Tools of this description are made which will accurately measure
p. 20
work in dimensions of ten-thousandths of an inch up to an inch.
The illustration (Fig. 12) shows an approved tool, and this is so constructed that it
can instantly be changed and set by merely pressing the end of the plunger as shown.
Fig. 13.—A Universal Bevel
Protractor.ToList
Protractors.—As all angles are not obtainable by the square or bevel, a protractor is
a most desirable addition to the stock of tools. As one side of the tool is flat it is
Page 35
convenient for laying on the paper when drafting, as well as for use on the work.
The protractor has a graduated disk, and is adjustable so it can be disposed at any
angle.
p. 21
Fig. 14.—Universal Bevel Protractor,
showing its uses.ToList
p. 22
All special tools of this kind are serviceable, and the boy should understand their
uses, even though he is not able for the time being to acquire them. To learn how they
are applied in daily use is an education in itself.
Utilizing Bevel Protractor.—Examine the full-page illustration (Fig. 14), and see
how the bevel protractor is utilized to measure the angles of work, whether it is
tapering heads or different kinds of nuts, or end and side surfacing, and it will teach
an important lesson.
The protractor has a graduated disk, and is adjustable so it can be disposed at any
angle.
p. 21
Fig. 14.—Universal Bevel Protractor,
showing its uses.ToList
p. 22
All special tools of this kind are serviceable, and the boy should understand their
uses, even though he is not able for the time being to acquire them. To learn how they
are applied in daily use is an education in itself.
Utilizing Bevel Protractor.—Examine the full-page illustration (Fig. 14), and see
how the bevel protractor is utilized to measure the angles of work, whether it is
tapering heads or different kinds of nuts, or end and side surfacing, and it will teach
an important lesson.
Page 36
Fig. 15.—Grindstone Truing Device.ToList
Truing Grindstones.—Devices for truing up grindstones are now made, and the
illustration (Fig. 15) shows a very efficient machine for this purpose. It can be
p. 23
applied instantly to the face of the stone, and it works automatically, without
interfering with the use of the stone.
It is frequently the case that an emery wheel will become glazed, due to its extreme
hardness. This is also caused, sometimes, by running it at too high a speed. If the
glazing continues after the speed is reduced, it should be ground down an eighth of
an inch or so. This will, usually, remedy the defect.
Fig. 16.—Set of Tools and Case.ToList
p. 24
Sets of Tools.—A cheap and convenient set of precision tools is shown in Fig. 16,
which is kept in a neat folding leather case. The set consists of a 6-inch combination
square, complete center punch, 6-inch flexible steel rule center gage, 4-inch calipers,
4-inch outside caliper with solid nut, 4-inch inside caliper with solid nut, and a 4-inch
divider with a solid nut.
Truing Grindstones.—Devices for truing up grindstones are now made, and the
illustration (Fig. 15) shows a very efficient machine for this purpose. It can be
p. 23
applied instantly to the face of the stone, and it works automatically, without
interfering with the use of the stone.
It is frequently the case that an emery wheel will become glazed, due to its extreme
hardness. This is also caused, sometimes, by running it at too high a speed. If the
glazing continues after the speed is reduced, it should be ground down an eighth of
an inch or so. This will, usually, remedy the defect.
Fig. 16.—Set of Tools and Case.ToList
p. 24
Sets of Tools.—A cheap and convenient set of precision tools is shown in Fig. 16,
which is kept in a neat folding leather case. The set consists of a 6-inch combination
square, complete center punch, 6-inch flexible steel rule center gage, 4-inch calipers,
4-inch outside caliper with solid nut, 4-inch inside caliper with solid nut, and a 4-inch
divider with a solid nut.
Page 37
Fig. 17. The Work Bench.ToList
The Work Bench.—This is the mechanic's fort. His capacity for work will depend on
its arrangement. To the boy this is particularly interesting, and for his uses it should
be made full three inches lower than the standard height.
A good plan to judge of the proper height is to measure from the jaws of the vise. The
top of the jaw should be on a level with the elbows. Grasp a file with both hands, and
hold it as though in the act of filing across the work; then measure up from thep. floor
25
to the elbows, when they are held in that position.
The Proper Dimensions.—This plan will give you a sure means of selecting a height
that is best adapted for your work. The regulation bench is about 38 inches high, and
assuming that the vise projects up about 4 inches more, would bring the top of the
jaws about 42 to 44 inches from the floor. It is safe to fix the height of the bench at
not less than 34 inches.
This should have a drawer, preferably near the right-hand end of the bench. The vise
should be at the left side, and the bench in your front should be free of any fixed
tools.
How Arranged.—Have a rack above the bench at the rear, for the various tools when
not in use, and the rear board of the bench should be elevated above the front planks
several inches, on which the various tools can be put, other than those which are
suspended on the rack above.
The advantage of this is, that a bench will accumulate a quantity of material that the
tools can hide in, and there is nothing more annoying than to hunt over a lot of trash
to get what is needed. It is necessary to emphasize the necessity of always putting a
tool back in its proper place, immediately after using
The Work Bench.—This is the mechanic's fort. His capacity for work will depend on
its arrangement. To the boy this is particularly interesting, and for his uses it should
be made full three inches lower than the standard height.
A good plan to judge of the proper height is to measure from the jaws of the vise. The
top of the jaw should be on a level with the elbows. Grasp a file with both hands, and
hold it as though in the act of filing across the work; then measure up from thep. floor
25
to the elbows, when they are held in that position.
The Proper Dimensions.—This plan will give you a sure means of selecting a height
that is best adapted for your work. The regulation bench is about 38 inches high, and
assuming that the vise projects up about 4 inches more, would bring the top of the
jaws about 42 to 44 inches from the floor. It is safe to fix the height of the bench at
not less than 34 inches.
This should have a drawer, preferably near the right-hand end of the bench. The vise
should be at the left side, and the bench in your front should be free of any fixed
tools.
How Arranged.—Have a rack above the bench at the rear, for the various tools when
not in use, and the rear board of the bench should be elevated above the front planks
several inches, on which the various tools can be put, other than those which are
suspended on the rack above.
The advantage of this is, that a bench will accumulate a quantity of material that the
tools can hide in, and there is nothing more annoying than to hunt over a lot of trash
to get what is needed. It is necessary to emphasize the necessity of always putting a
tool back in its proper place, immediately after using
Page 38
Page 39
p. 26
Page 40
CHAPTER IIToC
HOW TO GRIND AND SHARPEN TOOLS
It is singular, that with the immense variety of tools set forth in the preceding chapter,
how few, really, require the art of the workman to grind and sharpen. If we take the
lathe, the drilling machine, as well as the shaper, planer, milling machine, and all
power-driven tools, they are merely mechanism contrived to handle some small, and,
apparently, inconsequential tool, which does the work on the material.
Importance of the Cutting Tool.—But it is this very fact that makes the preparation
of that part of the mechanism so important. Here we have a lathe, weighing a
thousand pounds, worth hundreds of dollars, concentrating its entire energies on a
little bit, weighing eight ounces, and worth less than a dollar. It may thus readily be
seen that it is the little bar of metal from which the small tool is made that needs our
care and attention.
This is particularly true of the expensive milling machines, where the little saw, if not
in perfect order, and not properly set, will not only do improper work, but injure the
p. 27
machine itself. More lathes are ruined from using badly ground tools than from any
other cause.
In the whole line of tools which the machinist must take care of daily, there is
nothing as important as the lathe cutting-tool, and the knowledge which goes with it
to use the proper one.
Let us simplify the inquiry by considering them under the following headings:
1. The grinder.
2. The grinding angle.
The Grinder.—The first mistake the novice will make, is to use the tool on the
grinder as though it were necessary to grind it down with a few turns of the wheel.
Haste is not conducive to proper sharpening. As the wheel is of emery, corundum or
other quickly cutting material, and is always run at a high rate of speed, a great heat
is evolved, which is materially increased by pressure.
Pressure is injurious not so much to the wheel as to the tool itself. The moment a tool
becomes heated there is danger of destroying the temper, and the edge, being the
thinnest, is the most violently affected. Hence it is desirable always to have a
HOW TO GRIND AND SHARPEN TOOLS
It is singular, that with the immense variety of tools set forth in the preceding chapter,
how few, really, require the art of the workman to grind and sharpen. If we take the
lathe, the drilling machine, as well as the shaper, planer, milling machine, and all
power-driven tools, they are merely mechanism contrived to handle some small, and,
apparently, inconsequential tool, which does the work on the material.
Importance of the Cutting Tool.—But it is this very fact that makes the preparation
of that part of the mechanism so important. Here we have a lathe, weighing a
thousand pounds, worth hundreds of dollars, concentrating its entire energies on a
little bit, weighing eight ounces, and worth less than a dollar. It may thus readily be
seen that it is the little bar of metal from which the small tool is made that needs our
care and attention.
This is particularly true of the expensive milling machines, where the little saw, if not
in perfect order, and not properly set, will not only do improper work, but injure the
p. 27
machine itself. More lathes are ruined from using badly ground tools than from any
other cause.
In the whole line of tools which the machinist must take care of daily, there is
nothing as important as the lathe cutting-tool, and the knowledge which goes with it
to use the proper one.
Let us simplify the inquiry by considering them under the following headings:
1. The grinder.
2. The grinding angle.
The Grinder.—The first mistake the novice will make, is to use the tool on the
grinder as though it were necessary to grind it down with a few turns of the wheel.
Haste is not conducive to proper sharpening. As the wheel is of emery, corundum or
other quickly cutting material, and is always run at a high rate of speed, a great heat
is evolved, which is materially increased by pressure.
Pressure is injurious not so much to the wheel as to the tool itself. The moment a tool
becomes heated there is danger of destroying the temper, and the edge, being the
thinnest, is the most violently affected. Hence it is desirable always to have a
Page 41
receptacle with water handy, into which the tool can be plunged, during the process
of grinding down.
p. 28
Correct Use of Grinder.—Treat the wheel as though it is a friend, and not an enemy.
Take advantage of its entire surface. Whenever you go into a machine shop, look at
the emery wheel. If you find it worn in creases, and distorted in its circular outline,
you can make up your mind that there is some one there who has poor tools, because
it is simply out of the question to grind a tool correctly with such a wheel.
Fig. 18-23. Tools.ToList
Coarse wheels are an abomination for tool work. Use the finest kinds devised for the
purpose. They will keep in condition longer, are not so liable to wear unevenly, and
will always finish off the edge better than the coarse variety.
Lathe Bits.—All bits made for lathes are modifications of the foregoing types (Figs.
18-23, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23).
As this chapter deals with the sharpening methods only, the reader is referred to the
next chapter, which deals with the manner of setting and holding them to do thep. most
29
effective work.
When it is understood that a cutting tool in a lathe is simply a form of wedge which
peels off a definite thickness of metal, the importance of proper grinding and correct
position in the lathe can be appreciated.
Roughing Tools.—The most useful is the roughing tool to take off the first cut. As
this type of tool is also important, with some modifications, in finishing work, it is
given the place of first consideration here.
of grinding down.
p. 28
Correct Use of Grinder.—Treat the wheel as though it is a friend, and not an enemy.
Take advantage of its entire surface. Whenever you go into a machine shop, look at
the emery wheel. If you find it worn in creases, and distorted in its circular outline,
you can make up your mind that there is some one there who has poor tools, because
it is simply out of the question to grind a tool correctly with such a wheel.
Fig. 18-23. Tools.ToList
Coarse wheels are an abomination for tool work. Use the finest kinds devised for the
purpose. They will keep in condition longer, are not so liable to wear unevenly, and
will always finish off the edge better than the coarse variety.
Lathe Bits.—All bits made for lathes are modifications of the foregoing types (Figs.
18-23, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23).
As this chapter deals with the sharpening methods only, the reader is referred to the
next chapter, which deals with the manner of setting and holding them to do thep. most
29
effective work.
When it is understood that a cutting tool in a lathe is simply a form of wedge which
peels off a definite thickness of metal, the importance of proper grinding and correct
position in the lathe can be appreciated.
Roughing Tools.—The most useful is the roughing tool to take off the first cut. As
this type of tool is also important, with some modifications, in finishing work, it is
given the place of first consideration here.
Page 42
Fig. 24. Tool for Wrought Iron.Fig. 25. Tool for Cast Iron.ToList
Fig. 24 shows side and top views of a tool designed to rough off wrought iron, or a
tough quality of steel. You will notice, that what is called the top rake (A) is very
pronounced, and, as the point projects considerably above the body of the tool itself,
it should, in practice, be set with its cutting point above the center.
p. 30
The Clearance.—Now, in grinding, the important point is the clearance line (B). As
shown in this figure, it has an angle of 10 degrees, so that in placing the tool in the
holder it is obvious it cannot be placed very high above the center, particularly when
used on small work. The top rake is ground at an angle of 60 degrees from the
vertical. The arc of the curved end depends on the kind of lathe and the size of the
work.
The tool (Fig. 25), with a straight cutting edge, is the proper one to rough off cast
iron. Note that the top rake (C) is 70 degrees, and the clearance 15 degrees.
The Cutting Angle.—Wrought iron, or mild steel, will form a ribbon when the tool
wedges its way into the material. Cast iron, on the other hand, owing to its
brittleness, will break off into small particles, hence the wedge surface can be put at a
more obtuse angle to the work.
In grinding side-cutters the clearance should be at a less angle than 10 degrees, rather
than more, and the top rake should also be less; otherwise the tendency will be to
draw the tool into the work and swing the tool post around.
Drills.—Holders for grinding twist drills are now furnished at very low prices, and
instructions are usually sent with the machines, but a few words may not be amiss for
p. 31
the benefit of those who have not the means to purchase such a machine.
Hand grinding is a difficult thing, for the reason that through carelessness, or
inability, both sides of the drill are not ground at the same angle and pitch. As a result
the cutting edge of one side will do more work than the other. If the heel angles
differ, one side will draw into the work, and the other resist.
Fig. 24 shows side and top views of a tool designed to rough off wrought iron, or a
tough quality of steel. You will notice, that what is called the top rake (A) is very
pronounced, and, as the point projects considerably above the body of the tool itself,
it should, in practice, be set with its cutting point above the center.
p. 30
The Clearance.—Now, in grinding, the important point is the clearance line (B). As
shown in this figure, it has an angle of 10 degrees, so that in placing the tool in the
holder it is obvious it cannot be placed very high above the center, particularly when
used on small work. The top rake is ground at an angle of 60 degrees from the
vertical. The arc of the curved end depends on the kind of lathe and the size of the
work.
The tool (Fig. 25), with a straight cutting edge, is the proper one to rough off cast
iron. Note that the top rake (C) is 70 degrees, and the clearance 15 degrees.
The Cutting Angle.—Wrought iron, or mild steel, will form a ribbon when the tool
wedges its way into the material. Cast iron, on the other hand, owing to its
brittleness, will break off into small particles, hence the wedge surface can be put at a
more obtuse angle to the work.
In grinding side-cutters the clearance should be at a less angle than 10 degrees, rather
than more, and the top rake should also be less; otherwise the tendency will be to
draw the tool into the work and swing the tool post around.
Drills.—Holders for grinding twist drills are now furnished at very low prices, and
instructions are usually sent with the machines, but a few words may not be amiss for
p. 31
the benefit of those who have not the means to purchase such a machine.
Hand grinding is a difficult thing, for the reason that through carelessness, or
inability, both sides of the drill are not ground at the same angle and pitch. As a result
the cutting edge of one side will do more work than the other. If the heel angles
differ, one side will draw into the work, and the other resist.
Page 43
Fig. 26. End view. Fig. 27. Side view.ToList
Wrong Grinding.—When such is the case the hole becomes untrue. The sides of the
bit will grind into the walls, or the bit will have a tendency to run to one side, and
particularly if boring through metal which is uneven in its texture or grain.
Figs. 26 and 27 show end and side views of a bit properly ground. If a bit has been
broken off, first grind it off square at the end, and then grind down the angles, so that
p. 32
A is about 15 degrees, and be sure that the heel has sufficient clearance—that is,
ground down deeper than the cutting point.
Chisels.—A machine shop should always have a plentiful supply of cold chisels, and
a particular kind for each work, to be used for that purpose only. This may seem
trivial to the boy, but it is really a most important matter.
Notice the careless and incompetent workman. If chipping or cutting is required, he
will grasp the first chisel at hand. It may have a curved end, or be a key-way chisel,
or entirely unsuited as to size for the cutting required.
The result is an injured tool, and unsatisfactory results. The rule holds good in this
respect as with every other tool in the kit. Use a tool for the purpose it was made for,
and for no other. Acquire that habit.
Cold Chisels.—A cold chisel should never be ground to a long, tapering point, like a
wood chisel. The proper taper for a wood chisel is 15 degrees, whereas a cold chisel
should be 45 degrees. A drifting chisel may have a longer taper than one used for
chipping.
It is a good habit, particularly as there are so few tools which require grinding, to
commence the day's work by grinding the chisels, and arranging them for business.
p. 33
System in Work.—Then see to it that the drills are in good shape; and while you are
about it, look over the lathe tools. You will find that it is better to do this work at one
time, than to go to the emery wheel a dozen times a day while you are engaged on the
job.
Adopt a system in your work. Don't take things just as they come along, but form
your plans in an orderly way, and you will always know how to take up and finish the
work in the most profitable and satisfactory way.
Wrong Grinding.—When such is the case the hole becomes untrue. The sides of the
bit will grind into the walls, or the bit will have a tendency to run to one side, and
particularly if boring through metal which is uneven in its texture or grain.
Figs. 26 and 27 show end and side views of a bit properly ground. If a bit has been
broken off, first grind it off square at the end, and then grind down the angles, so that
p. 32
A is about 15 degrees, and be sure that the heel has sufficient clearance—that is,
ground down deeper than the cutting point.
Chisels.—A machine shop should always have a plentiful supply of cold chisels, and
a particular kind for each work, to be used for that purpose only. This may seem
trivial to the boy, but it is really a most important matter.
Notice the careless and incompetent workman. If chipping or cutting is required, he
will grasp the first chisel at hand. It may have a curved end, or be a key-way chisel,
or entirely unsuited as to size for the cutting required.
The result is an injured tool, and unsatisfactory results. The rule holds good in this
respect as with every other tool in the kit. Use a tool for the purpose it was made for,
and for no other. Acquire that habit.
Cold Chisels.—A cold chisel should never be ground to a long, tapering point, like a
wood chisel. The proper taper for a wood chisel is 15 degrees, whereas a cold chisel
should be 45 degrees. A drifting chisel may have a longer taper than one used for
chipping.
It is a good habit, particularly as there are so few tools which require grinding, to
commence the day's work by grinding the chisels, and arranging them for business.
p. 33
System in Work.—Then see to it that the drills are in good shape; and while you are
about it, look over the lathe tools. You will find that it is better to do this work at one
time, than to go to the emery wheel a dozen times a day while you are engaged on the
job.
Adopt a system in your work. Don't take things just as they come along, but form
your plans in an orderly way, and you will always know how to take up and finish the
work in the most profitable and satisfactory way.
Page 44
Wrong Use of Tools.—Never use the vise as an anvil. Ordinary and proper use of
this tool will insure it for a lifetime, aside from its natural wear. It may be said with
safety that a vise will never break if used for the purpose for which it was intended.
One blow of a hammer may ruin it.
Furthermore, never use an auxiliary lever to screw up the jaws. If the lever which
comes with it is not large enough to set the jaws, you may be sure that the vise is not
large enough for your work
this tool will insure it for a lifetime, aside from its natural wear. It may be said with
safety that a vise will never break if used for the purpose for which it was intended.
One blow of a hammer may ruin it.
Furthermore, never use an auxiliary lever to screw up the jaws. If the lever which
comes with it is not large enough to set the jaws, you may be sure that the vise is not
large enough for your work
Page 45
Page 46
p. 34
Page 47
CHAPTER IIIToC
SETTING AND HOLDING TOOLS
Some simple directions in the holding and setting of tools may be of service to the
novice. Practice has shown the most effective way of treating different materials, so
that the tools will do the most efficient work.
A tool ground in a certain way and set at a particular angle might do the work
admirably on a piece of steel, but would not possibly work on aluminum or brass.
Lathe Speed.—If the lathe should run at the same speed on a piece of cast iron as
with a brass casting, the result would not be very satisfactory, either with the tool or
on the work itself.
Some compositions of metal require a high speed, and some a hooked tool. These are
things which each must determine as the articles come to the shop; but there are
certain well-defined rules with respect to the ordinary metals that should be observed.
The Hack Saw.—Our first observation should be directed to the hand tools. The hack
saw is one of the most difficult tools for the machinist to handle, for the following
p. 35
reasons:
First, of the desire to force the blade through the work. The blade is a frail
instrument, and when too great a pressure is exerted it bends, and as a result a
breakage follows. To enable it to do the work properly, it must be made of the hardest
steel. It is, in consequence, easily fractured.
Fig. 28.—Hack Saw Frame.
Fig. 29.—Hack Saw Blade.ToList
SETTING AND HOLDING TOOLS
Some simple directions in the holding and setting of tools may be of service to the
novice. Practice has shown the most effective way of treating different materials, so
that the tools will do the most efficient work.
A tool ground in a certain way and set at a particular angle might do the work
admirably on a piece of steel, but would not possibly work on aluminum or brass.
Lathe Speed.—If the lathe should run at the same speed on a piece of cast iron as
with a brass casting, the result would not be very satisfactory, either with the tool or
on the work itself.
Some compositions of metal require a high speed, and some a hooked tool. These are
things which each must determine as the articles come to the shop; but there are
certain well-defined rules with respect to the ordinary metals that should be observed.
The Hack Saw.—Our first observation should be directed to the hand tools. The hack
saw is one of the most difficult tools for the machinist to handle, for the following
p. 35
reasons:
First, of the desire to force the blade through the work. The blade is a frail
instrument, and when too great a pressure is exerted it bends, and as a result a
breakage follows. To enable it to do the work properly, it must be made of the hardest
steel. It is, in consequence, easily fractured.
Fig. 28.—Hack Saw Frame.
Fig. 29.—Hack Saw Blade.ToList
Page 48
Second. The novice will make short hacking cuts. This causes the teeth to stick, the
saw bends, and a new blade is required. Take a long sweeping cut, using the entire
length of the blade. Do not oscillate the blade as you push it through the work, but
keep the tooth line horizontal from one end of the stroke to the other. The moment it
begins to waver, the teeth will catch on the metal on the side nearest to you, and it
will snap
Third. The handle is held too loosely. The handle must be firmly held with thep. 36
right
hand, and the other held by the fingers lightly, but in such a position that a steady
downward pressure can be maintained. If loosely held, the saw is bound to sag from
side to side during the stroke, and a short stroke accentuates the lateral movement. A
long stroke avoids this.
The hack saw is one of the tools which should be used with the utmost deliberation,
combined with a rigid grasp of the handle.
Files.—For remarks on this tool see Chapter IV, which treats of the subject specially.
Grindstones, Emery and Grinding Wheels.—A good workman is always reflected
by his grinding apparatus. This is true whether it has reference to a grindstone, emery,
corundum wheel, or a plain oil stone. Nothing is more destructive of good tools than
a grooved, uneven, or wabbly stone. It is only little less than a crime for a workman
to hold a tool on a revolving stone at one spot.
Carelessness in Holding Tools.—The boy must learn that such a habit actually
prevents the proper grinding, not only of the tool he has on the stone, but also of the
one which follows. While it is true that all artificially made grinders will wear
unevenly, even when used with the utmost care, due to uneven texture of the
p. 37
materials in the stone, still, the careless use of the tool, while in the act of grinding,
only aggravates the trouble.
Another fault of the careless workman is, to press the bit against the stone too hard.
This cuts the stone more than it wears off the tool, and it is entirely unnecessary.
Furthermore, it heats up the tool, which should be avoided.
Calipers.—A true workman, who endeavors to turn out accurate work, and preserve
his tools, will never test the work with his calipers while the piece is turning in the
lathe. A revolving cast iron disk will cut ruby, the hardest substance next to the
diamond, so it is not the hardness of the material which resists wear, but the
conditions under which it is used.
Care in Use of Calipers.—The calipers may be of the most hardened steel, and the
work turned up of the softest brass, the latter, when revolving, will grind off the point
of the tool, for the reason that the revolving piece constantly presents a new surface
saw bends, and a new blade is required. Take a long sweeping cut, using the entire
length of the blade. Do not oscillate the blade as you push it through the work, but
keep the tooth line horizontal from one end of the stroke to the other. The moment it
begins to waver, the teeth will catch on the metal on the side nearest to you, and it
will snap
Third. The handle is held too loosely. The handle must be firmly held with thep. 36
right
hand, and the other held by the fingers lightly, but in such a position that a steady
downward pressure can be maintained. If loosely held, the saw is bound to sag from
side to side during the stroke, and a short stroke accentuates the lateral movement. A
long stroke avoids this.
The hack saw is one of the tools which should be used with the utmost deliberation,
combined with a rigid grasp of the handle.
Files.—For remarks on this tool see Chapter IV, which treats of the subject specially.
Grindstones, Emery and Grinding Wheels.—A good workman is always reflected
by his grinding apparatus. This is true whether it has reference to a grindstone, emery,
corundum wheel, or a plain oil stone. Nothing is more destructive of good tools than
a grooved, uneven, or wabbly stone. It is only little less than a crime for a workman
to hold a tool on a revolving stone at one spot.
Carelessness in Holding Tools.—The boy must learn that such a habit actually
prevents the proper grinding, not only of the tool he has on the stone, but also of the
one which follows. While it is true that all artificially made grinders will wear
unevenly, even when used with the utmost care, due to uneven texture of the
p. 37
materials in the stone, still, the careless use of the tool, while in the act of grinding,
only aggravates the trouble.
Another fault of the careless workman is, to press the bit against the stone too hard.
This cuts the stone more than it wears off the tool, and it is entirely unnecessary.
Furthermore, it heats up the tool, which should be avoided.
Calipers.—A true workman, who endeavors to turn out accurate work, and preserve
his tools, will never test the work with his calipers while the piece is turning in the
lathe. A revolving cast iron disk will cut ruby, the hardest substance next to the
diamond, so it is not the hardness of the material which resists wear, but the
conditions under which it is used.
Care in Use of Calipers.—The calipers may be of the most hardened steel, and the
work turned up of the softest brass, the latter, when revolving, will grind off the point
of the tool, for the reason that the revolving piece constantly presents a new surface
Page 49
to the point of the calipers, and when tests are frequently made, it does not take long
to change the caliper span so that it must be reset.
As stated elsewhere, the whole energy of the lathe is concentrated on the bit or
cutting tool, hence, in order to get the most effective work out of it requires care;
first, in grinding; and, second, in setting
p. 38
Machine Bits.—It does not always matter so much whether you use a square,
pointed, or a round-nosed bit, provided it is properly ground and set in the tool
holder. As a rule, the more brittle the metal the less the top rake or angle should be.
In the chapter relating to the grinding of tools, references were made as to the most
serviceable bits for the various metals. We are concerned here with the setting or
holding of these articles.
Fig. 30. Plain Hook ToolFig. 31. Plain Straight Tool ToList
The two illustrations here given show a pair of plain bits, in which Fig. 30 represents
a hook-shaped formation, and Fig. 31 a straight grind, without any top rake. The
hooked bit would do for aluminum, or steel, but for cast iron the form shown in Fig.
31 would be most serviceable.
Then the side bits, such as the round-nosed, Fig. 32 and the square end, Fig. 33, may
be ground hooked, or with a top rake, or left flat.
The too common mistake is to grind the lower or clearance side at too great an angle.
p. 39
Fig. 34 shows the correct angle, and the dotted line A illustrates the common
tendency to grind the clearance.
The Proper Angle for Lathe Tools.—Now there is a reason why the angle of from
10 to 15 should be maintained in the clearance. The point of the tool must have
suitable support for the work it is required to do, so it will not chatter or yield in the
slightest degree. A bit ground along the dotted line has a cutting edge which will
spring down, and consequently break or produce a rough surface.
to change the caliper span so that it must be reset.
As stated elsewhere, the whole energy of the lathe is concentrated on the bit or
cutting tool, hence, in order to get the most effective work out of it requires care;
first, in grinding; and, second, in setting
p. 38
Machine Bits.—It does not always matter so much whether you use a square,
pointed, or a round-nosed bit, provided it is properly ground and set in the tool
holder. As a rule, the more brittle the metal the less the top rake or angle should be.
In the chapter relating to the grinding of tools, references were made as to the most
serviceable bits for the various metals. We are concerned here with the setting or
holding of these articles.
Fig. 30. Plain Hook ToolFig. 31. Plain Straight Tool ToList
The two illustrations here given show a pair of plain bits, in which Fig. 30 represents
a hook-shaped formation, and Fig. 31 a straight grind, without any top rake. The
hooked bit would do for aluminum, or steel, but for cast iron the form shown in Fig.
31 would be most serviceable.
Then the side bits, such as the round-nosed, Fig. 32 and the square end, Fig. 33, may
be ground hooked, or with a top rake, or left flat.
The too common mistake is to grind the lower or clearance side at too great an angle.
p. 39
Fig. 34 shows the correct angle, and the dotted line A illustrates the common
tendency to grind the clearance.
The Proper Angle for Lathe Tools.—Now there is a reason why the angle of from
10 to 15 should be maintained in the clearance. The point of the tool must have
suitable support for the work it is required to do, so it will not chatter or yield in the
slightest degree. A bit ground along the dotted line has a cutting edge which will
spring down, and consequently break or produce a rough surface.
Page 50
Figs. 32, 33, 34.
Proper Angles for ToolsToList
Then, again, the angle of the clearance acts as a guide, or rather, a guard, to prevent
the tool from going in too far, as will now be explained.
Setting the Bit.—In order to understand the correct setting, examine the work A, in
Fig. 35.
A is a cylinder being turned up in the lathe, and B the cutting tool, which approaches
p. 40
it on a horizontal line, C, extending out from the center of the cylinder A. This setting
is theoretically correct, and in practice has been found most advantageous.
In this case let us assume that the clearance angle D is 15 degrees, as well as in the
following figures.
Fig. 35. Set of the BitToList
Suppose we have a piece of tough steel, and the tool holder is raised so that the point
of the tool is at the 15 degree line E, as shown in Fig. 36, in which case the clearance
line D is at right angles to the line E. The line E is 15 degrees above the center line C.
The Setting Angle.—Now, it is obvious that if the tool should be raised higher than
the line E it would run out of work, because the clearance surface of the tool would
ride up over the surface cut by the edge of the tool.
If, on the other hand, the tool should be placed lower, toward the line C, the tendency
would be to draw in the tool toward the center of the work A
In Fig. 37 the tool has its point elevated, in which case it must be lowered p.so41 the
point will touch the work nearer the center line C.
Proper Angles for ToolsToList
Then, again, the angle of the clearance acts as a guide, or rather, a guard, to prevent
the tool from going in too far, as will now be explained.
Setting the Bit.—In order to understand the correct setting, examine the work A, in
Fig. 35.
A is a cylinder being turned up in the lathe, and B the cutting tool, which approaches
p. 40
it on a horizontal line, C, extending out from the center of the cylinder A. This setting
is theoretically correct, and in practice has been found most advantageous.
In this case let us assume that the clearance angle D is 15 degrees, as well as in the
following figures.
Fig. 35. Set of the BitToList
Suppose we have a piece of tough steel, and the tool holder is raised so that the point
of the tool is at the 15 degree line E, as shown in Fig. 36, in which case the clearance
line D is at right angles to the line E. The line E is 15 degrees above the center line C.
The Setting Angle.—Now, it is obvious that if the tool should be raised higher than
the line E it would run out of work, because the clearance surface of the tool would
ride up over the surface cut by the edge of the tool.
If, on the other hand, the tool should be placed lower, toward the line C, the tendency
would be to draw in the tool toward the center of the work A
In Fig. 37 the tool has its point elevated, in which case it must be lowered p.so41 the
point will touch the work nearer the center line C.
Page 51
The foregoing arrangement of the tools will be found to be effective where the
material is soft and not too tough as with aluminum.
Bad Practice.—Figs. 38 and 39 show illustrations of bad practice which should
never be resorted to. Fig. 38 shows the tool, held in a horizontal position, but with its
point below the center line C. With any rough metal the tool could not possibly work,
except to act as a scraper, and if it should be used in that position on cast iron, the
tool itself would soon be useless.
Fig. 36. Correct Angle Fig. 37. Wrong Angle ToList
Fig. 39 is still worse, and is of no value for any purpose except in polishing brass,
where it would be serviceable. It would make a sorry looking job with aluminum.
p. 42
Brass requires a tool with very little top rake, and the point should be set near the
center line C.
Lathe Speed.—It is often a question at what speeds to run the lathe for different
work. If you know the speeds of your lathe at low and high gear, you must also
consider the diameter of the work at the cutting point.
The rule is to have the bit cut from 15 to 20 feet per minute for wrought iron; from 11
to 18 feet for steel; from 25 to 50 for brass; and from 40 to 50 for aluminum.
Fig. 38. Too Low Fig. 39. Improper Set ToList
As a result, therefore, if, at low speed, a piece 10 inches in diameter, runs at the
proper speed to cut at that distance from the center, it is obvious that a piece 5 inches
in diameter should ran twice as fast. This is a matter which time and practice will
enable you to judge with a fair degree of accuracy
p. 43
Observe this as a maxim: "Slow speed, and quick feed."
material is soft and not too tough as with aluminum.
Bad Practice.—Figs. 38 and 39 show illustrations of bad practice which should
never be resorted to. Fig. 38 shows the tool, held in a horizontal position, but with its
point below the center line C. With any rough metal the tool could not possibly work,
except to act as a scraper, and if it should be used in that position on cast iron, the
tool itself would soon be useless.
Fig. 36. Correct Angle Fig. 37. Wrong Angle ToList
Fig. 39 is still worse, and is of no value for any purpose except in polishing brass,
where it would be serviceable. It would make a sorry looking job with aluminum.
p. 42
Brass requires a tool with very little top rake, and the point should be set near the
center line C.
Lathe Speed.—It is often a question at what speeds to run the lathe for different
work. If you know the speeds of your lathe at low and high gear, you must also
consider the diameter of the work at the cutting point.
The rule is to have the bit cut from 15 to 20 feet per minute for wrought iron; from 11
to 18 feet for steel; from 25 to 50 for brass; and from 40 to 50 for aluminum.
Fig. 38. Too Low Fig. 39. Improper Set ToList
As a result, therefore, if, at low speed, a piece 10 inches in diameter, runs at the
proper speed to cut at that distance from the center, it is obvious that a piece 5 inches
in diameter should ran twice as fast. This is a matter which time and practice will
enable you to judge with a fair degree of accuracy
p. 43
Observe this as a maxim: "Slow speed, and quick feed."
Page 52
Boring Tools on Lathe.—The lathe is a most useful tool for boring purposes, better
for some work than the drilling machine itself. The work which can be done better on
a lathe than on a drilling machine, may be classified as follows:
1. When straight and true holes are required.
2. In long work, where the lathe is used to turn up the article, and where the drilling
can be done at the same time.
3. Anything that can be chucked in a lathe.
4. Where the work is long and cannot be fixed in a drilling machine. The long bed of
the lathe gives room for holding such work.
Fig. 40. Internal Set Fig. 41. Set for Brass ToList
The Rake of the Drill.—A boring tool requires some knowledge in setting. It should
have a greater top rake than for the outside work, and the cutting edge should also be
keener, as a rule
p. 44
for some work than the drilling machine itself. The work which can be done better on
a lathe than on a drilling machine, may be classified as follows:
1. When straight and true holes are required.
2. In long work, where the lathe is used to turn up the article, and where the drilling
can be done at the same time.
3. Anything that can be chucked in a lathe.
4. Where the work is long and cannot be fixed in a drilling machine. The long bed of
the lathe gives room for holding such work.
Fig. 40. Internal Set Fig. 41. Set for Brass ToList
The Rake of the Drill.—A boring tool requires some knowledge in setting. It should
have a greater top rake than for the outside work, and the cutting edge should also be
keener, as a rule
p. 44
Page 53
Fig. 42.—Surface Gage.ToList
In this class of work the material bored must be understood, as well as in doing
outside work.
The hooked tool, Fig. 40, is shown to be considerably above the center line, and at
that point it will do the most effective cutting on steel. If, on the other hand, brass is
p. 45
operated on there should be no top rake, as illustrated in Fig. 41, thus assuring a
smooth job.
Laps.—This is a tool which is very useful, particularly for grinding and truing up the
cylinders of internal combustion engines, as well as for all kinds of bores of
refractory material which cannot be handled with the cutting tool of the lathe.
It is made up of a mandrel or rod of copper, with lead cast about it, and then turned
up true, so that it is but the merest trifle larger than the hole it is to true up.
Using the Lap.—The roller thus made is turned rapidly in a lathe, and the cylinder to
be trued is brought up to it and the roller supplied freely with emery powder and oil.
As rapidly as possible the cylinder is worked over on the roller, without forcing it,
and also turned, so as to prevent even the weight from grinding it unduly on one side.
More or less of the emery will embed itself in the lead, and thus act as an abrasive.
The process is called "lapping."
In this class of work the material bored must be understood, as well as in doing
outside work.
The hooked tool, Fig. 40, is shown to be considerably above the center line, and at
that point it will do the most effective cutting on steel. If, on the other hand, brass is
p. 45
operated on there should be no top rake, as illustrated in Fig. 41, thus assuring a
smooth job.
Laps.—This is a tool which is very useful, particularly for grinding and truing up the
cylinders of internal combustion engines, as well as for all kinds of bores of
refractory material which cannot be handled with the cutting tool of the lathe.
It is made up of a mandrel or rod of copper, with lead cast about it, and then turned
up true, so that it is but the merest trifle larger than the hole it is to true up.
Using the Lap.—The roller thus made is turned rapidly in a lathe, and the cylinder to
be trued is brought up to it and the roller supplied freely with emery powder and oil.
As rapidly as possible the cylinder is worked over on the roller, without forcing it,
and also turned, so as to prevent even the weight from grinding it unduly on one side.
More or less of the emery will embed itself in the lead, and thus act as an abrasive.
The process is called "lapping."
Page 54
Surface Gages.—Frequently, in laying out, it is necessary to scribe lines at a given
distance from some part of the work; or, the conditions are such that a rule, a caliper,
or dividers will not permit accurate measurement to be made.
For such purposes, what is called a surface gage was devised. This is merely a heavy
base, provided with a pivoted upright on which is mounted a scribe that is heldp. 46by a
clamp so it may be turned to any angle.
p. 47
Fig. 43.—Showing uses of the Surface Gage.
ToList
Surface Gage.—The clamp holding the scriber is vertically movable on the pivoted
upright. By resting the base of the surface gage on the line to be measured from, and
swinging one point of the scriber to the place where the work is to be done, accuracy
is assured. One end of the scriber is bent, so it can be adapted to enter recesses, or
such places as could not be reached by the straight end
distance from some part of the work; or, the conditions are such that a rule, a caliper,
or dividers will not permit accurate measurement to be made.
For such purposes, what is called a surface gage was devised. This is merely a heavy
base, provided with a pivoted upright on which is mounted a scribe that is heldp. 46by a
clamp so it may be turned to any angle.
p. 47
Fig. 43.—Showing uses of the Surface Gage.
ToList
Surface Gage.—The clamp holding the scriber is vertically movable on the pivoted
upright. By resting the base of the surface gage on the line to be measured from, and
swinging one point of the scriber to the place where the work is to be done, accuracy
is assured. One end of the scriber is bent, so it can be adapted to enter recesses, or
such places as could not be reached by the straight end
Page 55
Page 56
p. 48
Page 57
CHAPTER IVToC
ON THE USE OF THE FILE
The most necessary tool in a machine shop is a file. It is one of the neglected tools,
because the ordinary boy, or workman, sees nothing in it but a strip or a bar with a lot
of cross grooves and edges, and he concludes that the only thing necessary is to rub it
across a piece of metal until he has worn it down sufficiently for the purpose.
The First Test.—The fact is, the file is so familiar a tool, that it breeds contempt,
like many other things closely associated in life.
Give the boy an irregular block of metal, and tell him to file it up square, and he will
begin to realize that there is something in the handling of a file that never before
occurred to him.
He will find three things to astonish him:
First: That of dimensions.
Second: The difficulty of getting it square.
Third: The character of the surface when he has finished it.
Filing an Irregular Block.—To file a block of an irregular character so that the
dimensions are accurate, is a good test for an accomplished workman. The job is
p. 49
made doubly difficult if he is required to file it square at the same time. It will be
found, invariably, that the sides will not be parallel, and by the time it is fully trued
up the piece will be too small. See Figs. 44 and 45.
Then, unless the utmost care is taken, the flat sides will not be flat, but rounded.
Filing a Bar Straight.—The next test is to get the boy to file a bar straight. He has
no shaper or planer for the purpose, so that it must be done by hand. He will find
himself lacking in two things: The edge of the bar will not be straight; nor will it be
square with the side of the bar.
Fig. 44. Rounded Surface Fig. 45. A Winding Face ToList
ON THE USE OF THE FILE
The most necessary tool in a machine shop is a file. It is one of the neglected tools,
because the ordinary boy, or workman, sees nothing in it but a strip or a bar with a lot
of cross grooves and edges, and he concludes that the only thing necessary is to rub it
across a piece of metal until he has worn it down sufficiently for the purpose.
The First Test.—The fact is, the file is so familiar a tool, that it breeds contempt,
like many other things closely associated in life.
Give the boy an irregular block of metal, and tell him to file it up square, and he will
begin to realize that there is something in the handling of a file that never before
occurred to him.
He will find three things to astonish him:
First: That of dimensions.
Second: The difficulty of getting it square.
Third: The character of the surface when he has finished it.
Filing an Irregular Block.—To file a block of an irregular character so that the
dimensions are accurate, is a good test for an accomplished workman. The job is
p. 49
made doubly difficult if he is required to file it square at the same time. It will be
found, invariably, that the sides will not be parallel, and by the time it is fully trued
up the piece will be too small. See Figs. 44 and 45.
Then, unless the utmost care is taken, the flat sides will not be flat, but rounded.
Filing a Bar Straight.—The next test is to get the boy to file a bar straight. He has
no shaper or planer for the purpose, so that it must be done by hand. He will find
himself lacking in two things: The edge of the bar will not be straight; nor will it be
square with the side of the bar.
Fig. 44. Rounded Surface Fig. 45. A Winding Face ToList
Page 58
Filing Bar with Parallel Sides.—Follow up this test by requiring him to file up a
bar, first, with two exactly parallel sides, and absolutely straight, so it will pass
smoothly between the legs of a pair of calipers, and then file the two other sides in
like manner.
Surfacing off Disks.—When the foregoing are completed there is still another
requirement which, though it appears simple, is the supreme test. Set him to work at
p. 50
surfacing off a pair of disks or plates, say one and a half inches in diameter, so that
when they are finished they will fit against each other perfectly flat.
A pair of such disks, if absolutely true, will hold together by the force of cohesion,
even in a dry state, or they will, as it were, float against each other.
True Surfacing.—Prior to about 1850 the necessity of true surfacing was not so
important or as well known as at the present time. About that period Sir J. Whitworth,
an eminent English engineer and mechanic, called the attention of machinists to the
great advantage arising from true surfaces and edges for all types of machinery, and
he laid the foundation of the knowledge in accurating surfacing.
Precision Tools.—Due to his energy many precision tools were made, all tending to
this end, and as a result machines became better and more efficient in every way.
It had this great advantage: It taught the workman of his day how to use the file and
scraper, because both must be used conjunctively to make an absolutely flat plate.
Contrary to general beliefs, shapers and planers do not make absolutely accurate
surfaces. The test of this is to put together two plates so planed off. There is just
p. 51
enough unevenness to permit air to get between the plates. If they were perfectly true
they would exclude all air, and it would be a difficult matter to draw them apart.
Test of the Mechanic.—To make them perfectly flat, one plate has chalk rubbed
over it, and the two plates are then rubbed together. This will quickly show where the
high spots are, and the file and scraper are then used to cut away the metal.
Fig. 46. Hexagon Nut Fig. 47. Hexagon Nut ToList
bar, first, with two exactly parallel sides, and absolutely straight, so it will pass
smoothly between the legs of a pair of calipers, and then file the two other sides in
like manner.
Surfacing off Disks.—When the foregoing are completed there is still another
requirement which, though it appears simple, is the supreme test. Set him to work at
p. 50
surfacing off a pair of disks or plates, say one and a half inches in diameter, so that
when they are finished they will fit against each other perfectly flat.
A pair of such disks, if absolutely true, will hold together by the force of cohesion,
even in a dry state, or they will, as it were, float against each other.
True Surfacing.—Prior to about 1850 the necessity of true surfacing was not so
important or as well known as at the present time. About that period Sir J. Whitworth,
an eminent English engineer and mechanic, called the attention of machinists to the
great advantage arising from true surfaces and edges for all types of machinery, and
he laid the foundation of the knowledge in accurating surfacing.
Precision Tools.—Due to his energy many precision tools were made, all tending to
this end, and as a result machines became better and more efficient in every way.
It had this great advantage: It taught the workman of his day how to use the file and
scraper, because both must be used conjunctively to make an absolutely flat plate.
Contrary to general beliefs, shapers and planers do not make absolutely accurate
surfaces. The test of this is to put together two plates so planed off. There is just
p. 51
enough unevenness to permit air to get between the plates. If they were perfectly true
they would exclude all air, and it would be a difficult matter to draw them apart.
Test of the Mechanic.—To make them perfectly flat, one plate has chalk rubbed
over it, and the two plates are then rubbed together. This will quickly show where the
high spots are, and the file and scraper are then used to cut away the metal.
Fig. 46. Hexagon Nut Fig. 47. Hexagon Nut ToList
Page 59
In England the test of the mechanic used to be determined by his ability to file a
piece of metal flat. It was regarded as the highest art. This is not the most desirable
test at the present time, and it is recognized that a much severer test is to file a narrow
piece exactly flat, and so that it will not have a trace of roundness, and be square
from end to end.
Test Suggestions.—In a shop which does not have the advantage of a planer or
p. 52
shaper, there are so many articles which must be filed up, that it is interesting to
know something of how the various articles are made with a file.
To file a hexagon, or six-sided nut will be a good test with a file. To do this a little
study in geometrical lines will save a vast amount of time. In beginning the work,
measure the radius with a divider, and then step off and make six marks equidistant
from each other on the round surface.
Fig. 48. Cutting Key-wayToList
Use of the Dividers.—The distance between each of these points is equal to the
radius, or half the diameter, of the round bar. See Fig. 46, which shows this. The
marks should be scribed across the surface, as shown in Fig. 47, where the lines show
the ends of the facets of the outside of the nut.
p. 53
Do not let the file obliterate the lines at the rough cutting, but leave enough material
so you can make a good finish at the line.
Cutting a Key-way.—Another job you may have frequent occasion to perform, is to
cut a way for a key in a shaft and in a wheel hub. Naturally, this will be first roughed
out with a cold chisel narrower than the key is to be, and also slightly shallower than
the dimensions of the key.
A flat file should be used for the purpose, first a heavy rough one, for the first cutting.
The better way is to have the key so it can be frequently tried while the filing process
is going on, so that to fit the key in this way is a comparatively easy task.
Key-way Difficulties.—But the trouble commences when the groove is filed for the
depth. Invariably, the mistake will be made of filing the width first, so the key will fit
piece of metal flat. It was regarded as the highest art. This is not the most desirable
test at the present time, and it is recognized that a much severer test is to file a narrow
piece exactly flat, and so that it will not have a trace of roundness, and be square
from end to end.
Test Suggestions.—In a shop which does not have the advantage of a planer or
p. 52
shaper, there are so many articles which must be filed up, that it is interesting to
know something of how the various articles are made with a file.
To file a hexagon, or six-sided nut will be a good test with a file. To do this a little
study in geometrical lines will save a vast amount of time. In beginning the work,
measure the radius with a divider, and then step off and make six marks equidistant
from each other on the round surface.
Fig. 48. Cutting Key-wayToList
Use of the Dividers.—The distance between each of these points is equal to the
radius, or half the diameter, of the round bar. See Fig. 46, which shows this. The
marks should be scribed across the surface, as shown in Fig. 47, where the lines show
the ends of the facets of the outside of the nut.
p. 53
Do not let the file obliterate the lines at the rough cutting, but leave enough material
so you can make a good finish at the line.
Cutting a Key-way.—Another job you may have frequent occasion to perform, is to
cut a way for a key in a shaft and in a wheel hub. Naturally, this will be first roughed
out with a cold chisel narrower than the key is to be, and also slightly shallower than
the dimensions of the key.
A flat file should be used for the purpose, first a heavy rough one, for the first cutting.
The better way is to have the key so it can be frequently tried while the filing process
is going on, so that to fit the key in this way is a comparatively easy task.
Key-way Difficulties.—But the trouble commences when the groove is filed for the
depth. Invariably, the mistake will be made of filing the width first, so the key will fit
Page 60
in. As a result, in deepening the groove the file will contact with the walls, and you
have a key-way too wide for the key.
To avoid this, file the depth, or nearly so, and then with a fine file cut in the corners
in the direction indicated by the dart, Fig. 48.
A proper key is square in cross section. In such a case the depth of the key-way, at
each side wall, is just half the width of the key-way.
p. 54
An excellent key-seat rule can be made by filing out two right-angled pieces, as
shown in Fig. 49, which can be attached to the ordinary six-inch metal rule, and this
will enable you to scribe the line accurately for the key-way on the shaft.
Fig. 49. Key-seat
Fig. 50. Fig. 51. ToList
Filing Metal Round
Filing Metal Round.—It is sometimes necessary to file a piece of metal round. This
is a hard job, particularly where it is impossible to scribe the end of the piece.
Suppose it is necessary to file up a bearing surface, or surfaces, intermediate the ends
of a square bar.
You have in that case four sides to start from, the opposite sides being parallelp. 55with
each other, so that you will have two dimensions, and four equal sides, as shown in
Fig. 50.
The first step will be to file off accurately the four corners 1, 2, 3, 4, so as to form
eight equal sides or faces, as shown in Fig. 51. If you will now proceed to file down
carefully the eight corners, so as to make sixteen sides, as in Fig. 52, the fourth set of
corners filed down will make the filed part look like the illustration Fig. 53 with
thirty-two faces.
have a key-way too wide for the key.
To avoid this, file the depth, or nearly so, and then with a fine file cut in the corners
in the direction indicated by the dart, Fig. 48.
A proper key is square in cross section. In such a case the depth of the key-way, at
each side wall, is just half the width of the key-way.
p. 54
An excellent key-seat rule can be made by filing out two right-angled pieces, as
shown in Fig. 49, which can be attached to the ordinary six-inch metal rule, and this
will enable you to scribe the line accurately for the key-way on the shaft.
Fig. 49. Key-seat
Fig. 50. Fig. 51. ToList
Filing Metal Round
Filing Metal Round.—It is sometimes necessary to file a piece of metal round. This
is a hard job, particularly where it is impossible to scribe the end of the piece.
Suppose it is necessary to file up a bearing surface, or surfaces, intermediate the ends
of a square bar.
You have in that case four sides to start from, the opposite sides being parallelp. 55with
each other, so that you will have two dimensions, and four equal sides, as shown in
Fig. 50.
The first step will be to file off accurately the four corners 1, 2, 3, 4, so as to form
eight equal sides or faces, as shown in Fig. 51. If you will now proceed to file down
carefully the eight corners, so as to make sixteen sides, as in Fig. 52, the fourth set of
corners filed down will make the filed part look like the illustration Fig. 53 with
thirty-two faces.
Page 61
Fig. 52. Fig. 53.
Making a Bar Round ToList
This may be further filed down into sixty-four faces, and a few cuts of the finishing
file will take off the little ridges which still remain. By using emery cloth, and
p. 56
wrapping it around the bearing portion, and changing it continually, while drawing it
back and forth, will enable you to make a bearing which, by care, will caliper up in
good shape.
Kinds of Files.—Each file has five distinct properties; namely: the length, the
contour, the form in cross section, the kind of teeth, and the fineness of the teeth.
There are nine well-defined shapes for files. These may be enumerated as follows:
Fig. 54. Cross Sections of Files.ToList
No. 1. The cotter file. The small kind is called a verge or pivot file.
No. 2. Square file, which may be tapering from end to end, or have parallel sides
throughout.
No. 3. Watch pinion file. This may have its sides parallel or tapering, to make a knife-
shaped file.
No. 4. Clock-pinion; which may be used for either nicking, piecing, or squaring-off
purposes.
No. 5. Round, with parallel sides for gulleting purposes, or rat-tail when it tapers.
p. 57
No. 6. Triangular, or three equally-sided body for saw filing.
Making a Bar Round ToList
This may be further filed down into sixty-four faces, and a few cuts of the finishing
file will take off the little ridges which still remain. By using emery cloth, and
p. 56
wrapping it around the bearing portion, and changing it continually, while drawing it
back and forth, will enable you to make a bearing which, by care, will caliper up in
good shape.
Kinds of Files.—Each file has five distinct properties; namely: the length, the
contour, the form in cross section, the kind of teeth, and the fineness of the teeth.
There are nine well-defined shapes for files. These may be enumerated as follows:
Fig. 54. Cross Sections of Files.ToList
No. 1. The cotter file. The small kind is called a verge or pivot file.
No. 2. Square file, which may be tapering from end to end, or have parallel sides
throughout.
No. 3. Watch pinion file. This may have its sides parallel or tapering, to make a knife-
shaped file.
No. 4. Clock-pinion; which may be used for either nicking, piecing, or squaring-off
purposes.
No. 5. Round, with parallel sides for gulleting purposes, or rat-tail when it tapers.
p. 57
No. 6. Triangular, or three equally-sided body for saw filing.
Page 62
No. 7. Equalizing file. This is parallel when used for making clock-pinions or endless
screws; or for slitting, entering, warding, or making barrel holes, when the body of
the file tapers.
No. 8. Cross, or double-round, half-file.
No. 9. Slitting file; which has parallel sides only. A cant file.
Character of the File Tooth.—Files are distinguished principally by the character
of the oblique, or cross grooves and ridges which do the cutting and abrading when
the file is drawn across the surface.
This is really more important than the shape, because the files, by their cuttings, are
adapted for the various materials which they are to be used upon.
The files are classified as Double Cut, of which there are the rough, middle, bastard,
second cut, smooth, and dead smooth.
The Float Cut, which is either rough, bastard or smooth; and
The Rasp Cut, either rough, bastard or smooth.
Several types are illustrated in Fig. 55, which show the characteristics of the various
cuts.
The rasps are used principally for soft material, such as wood or for hoofs, in horse
shoeing, hence they need not be considered in connection with machine-shop work
p. 58
screws; or for slitting, entering, warding, or making barrel holes, when the body of
the file tapers.
No. 8. Cross, or double-round, half-file.
No. 9. Slitting file; which has parallel sides only. A cant file.
Character of the File Tooth.—Files are distinguished principally by the character
of the oblique, or cross grooves and ridges which do the cutting and abrading when
the file is drawn across the surface.
This is really more important than the shape, because the files, by their cuttings, are
adapted for the various materials which they are to be used upon.
The files are classified as Double Cut, of which there are the rough, middle, bastard,
second cut, smooth, and dead smooth.
The Float Cut, which is either rough, bastard or smooth; and
The Rasp Cut, either rough, bastard or smooth.
Several types are illustrated in Fig. 55, which show the characteristics of the various
cuts.
The rasps are used principally for soft material, such as wood or for hoofs, in horse
shoeing, hence they need not be considered in connection with machine-shop work
p. 58
Page 63
Fig. 55. Files.ToList ToList
p. 59
Holding the File.—The common mistake on the part of the beginner is to drag the
file across the work at an angle. The body of the file should move across straight and
not obliquely.
Note this movement in Fig. 56 where the dash shows the correct movement of the file
with relation to the work. Also observe that the file cutting ridges are not straight
across the file, but at an angle to the direction of the dart.
p. 59
Holding the File.—The common mistake on the part of the beginner is to drag the
file across the work at an angle. The body of the file should move across straight and
not obliquely.
Note this movement in Fig. 56 where the dash shows the correct movement of the file
with relation to the work. Also observe that the file cutting ridges are not straight
across the file, but at an angle to the direction of the dart.
Page 64
Fig. 56. Correct File MovementToList
Injuring Files.—Now the frequent practice is to use the file as shown in Fig. 57, in
which case it is moved across obliquely. The result is that the angle of the file cut is
so disposed that the teeth of the file do not properly aid in the cutting, but in a
measure retard the operation.
p. 60
File teeth are disposed at an angle for the purpose of giving them a shearing cut,
which is the case when the file moves across the work on a line with its body.
To use a file as shown in Fig. 57 injures the file without giving it an opportunity to
cut as fast as it would when properly used.
Fig. 57. Incorrect File Movement ToList
Drawing Back the File.—In drawing back a file it is always better to allow it to drag
over the work than to raise it up. It is frequently the case that some of the material
will lodge in the teeth, and the back lash will serve to clear out the grooves.
This is particularly true in filing copper, aluminum, lead, and like metals, but it is
well to observe this in all cases
Injuring Files.—Now the frequent practice is to use the file as shown in Fig. 57, in
which case it is moved across obliquely. The result is that the angle of the file cut is
so disposed that the teeth of the file do not properly aid in the cutting, but in a
measure retard the operation.
p. 60
File teeth are disposed at an angle for the purpose of giving them a shearing cut,
which is the case when the file moves across the work on a line with its body.
To use a file as shown in Fig. 57 injures the file without giving it an opportunity to
cut as fast as it would when properly used.
Fig. 57. Incorrect File Movement ToList
Drawing Back the File.—In drawing back a file it is always better to allow it to drag
over the work than to raise it up. It is frequently the case that some of the material
will lodge in the teeth, and the back lash will serve to clear out the grooves.
This is particularly true in filing copper, aluminum, lead, and like metals, but it is
well to observe this in all cases
Page 65
Page 66
p. 61
Page 67
CHAPTER VToC
HOW TO COMMENCE WORK
The question is often asked: Where and how shall the novice commence work?
When the shop is equipped, or partially so, sufficient, at least, to turn out simple jobs,
the boy will find certain tools which are strangers to him. He must become
acquainted with them and not only learn their uses, but how to use them to the best
advantage.
Familiarity with Tools.—Familiarity with the appearance of tools, and seeing them
in the hands of others will not be of any value. Nothing but the immediate contact
with the tool will teach how to use it.
File Practice.—The file is a good tool to pick up first. Select a piece of metal, six or
eight inches long, and follow the instructions laid down in the chapter relating to the
use of the file.
Practice with several kinds and with different varieties of material will soon give an
inkling of the best kind to use with the metal you have. Use the straight edge and the
p. 62
square while the filing process is going on, and apply them frequently, to show you
what speed you are making and how nearly true you are surfacing up the piece.
Using the Dividers.—Then try your hand using the dividers, in connection with a
centering punch. As an example, take two pieces of metal, each about a foot long,
and set the dividers to make a short span, say an inch or so, and step off the length of
one piece of metal, and punch the last mark. Then do likewise with the other piece of
metal, and see how nearly alike the two measurements are by comparing them.
You will find a variation in the lengths of the two measurements at the first trials, and
very likely will not be able to make the two pieces register accurately after many
trials, even when using the utmost care.
Sooner or later you will learn that you have not stepped paths along the two bars
which were exactly straight, and this will account for the variations. In order to be
accurate a line should be drawn along each piece of metal, and the dividers should
step off the marks on that line.
Finding Centers.—By way of further experiment, it might be well to find the exact
center of the ends of a square bar, putting in the punch marks and then mounting it in
the lathe centers to see how accurately this has been done.
HOW TO COMMENCE WORK
The question is often asked: Where and how shall the novice commence work?
When the shop is equipped, or partially so, sufficient, at least, to turn out simple jobs,
the boy will find certain tools which are strangers to him. He must become
acquainted with them and not only learn their uses, but how to use them to the best
advantage.
Familiarity with Tools.—Familiarity with the appearance of tools, and seeing them
in the hands of others will not be of any value. Nothing but the immediate contact
with the tool will teach how to use it.
File Practice.—The file is a good tool to pick up first. Select a piece of metal, six or
eight inches long, and follow the instructions laid down in the chapter relating to the
use of the file.
Practice with several kinds and with different varieties of material will soon give an
inkling of the best kind to use with the metal you have. Use the straight edge and the
p. 62
square while the filing process is going on, and apply them frequently, to show you
what speed you are making and how nearly true you are surfacing up the piece.
Using the Dividers.—Then try your hand using the dividers, in connection with a
centering punch. As an example, take two pieces of metal, each about a foot long,
and set the dividers to make a short span, say an inch or so, and step off the length of
one piece of metal, and punch the last mark. Then do likewise with the other piece of
metal, and see how nearly alike the two measurements are by comparing them.
You will find a variation in the lengths of the two measurements at the first trials, and
very likely will not be able to make the two pieces register accurately after many
trials, even when using the utmost care.
Sooner or later you will learn that you have not stepped paths along the two bars
which were exactly straight, and this will account for the variations. In order to be
accurate a line should be drawn along each piece of metal, and the dividers should
step off the marks on that line.
Finding Centers.—By way of further experiment, it might be well to find the exact
center of the ends of a square bar, putting in the punch marks and then mounting it in
the lathe centers to see how accurately this has been done.
Page 68
p. 63
If either end is out of true the punch marks can be corrected by inclining the punch,
so that when it is struck it will move over the point in the direction of its true center.
This may be followed up by centering the end of a round bar so as to make it true.
This will be found to be a more difficult job, unless you have a center head, a tool
made for that purpose.
It is good practice, however, to make trials of all this work, as it will enable you to
judge of measurements. It can be done with the dividers by using care in scribing the
centers.
Hack-Saw Practice.—Practice with the hack-saw should be indulged in frequently.
Learn to make a straight cut through a bar. Try to do this without using a square to
guide you. One of the tests of a good mechanic is ability to judge a straight cut.
The following plan is suggested as a test for the eye. Use a bar of iron or steel one
inch square, and make a cut an eighth of an inch deep across it; then turn it around a
quarter, so as to expose the nest face, and continue the cut along the side, the same
depth, and follow this up with the remaining two sides, and see how near the end of
the first cut and the finish cut come together. The test will surprise you.
Cutting Metals True.—When you saw off the end of such a bar for trial purposes,
use a square, after the cut is made, and note how much it is out of true inp. 64both
directions. It is a curious fact that most mechanics are disposed to saw or cut crooked
in one direction, either to the right or to the left. In tests made it is found that this
defect is persisted in.
It is practice only which will remedy this, and it would be well for the boy to learn
this for himself as early in his career as possible, and correct the tendency to veer in
either direction.
The test of sawing around a round bar is also commended. After a few trials you will
be surprised to see how your judgment will improve in practice.
Lathe Work.—Learn the uses of the chuck. As you have, probably, economized as
much as possible, a universal chuck is not available, hence the first experience will
be with an independent chuck, where the three dogs move independently of each
other. This will give you some work to learn how you can get the job true.
Now, before attempting to cut the material, thoroughly learn all the parts of the feed
mechanism, and how to reverse, as well as to cross feed. Learn the operation of the
operative parts so that your hand will instinctively find them, while the eye is on the
work.
First Steps.—See to it that your tools are sharp, and at the first trials make lightp. 65
cuts.
Practice the feeds by manually moving the tool holder, for surface cutting as well as
If either end is out of true the punch marks can be corrected by inclining the punch,
so that when it is struck it will move over the point in the direction of its true center.
This may be followed up by centering the end of a round bar so as to make it true.
This will be found to be a more difficult job, unless you have a center head, a tool
made for that purpose.
It is good practice, however, to make trials of all this work, as it will enable you to
judge of measurements. It can be done with the dividers by using care in scribing the
centers.
Hack-Saw Practice.—Practice with the hack-saw should be indulged in frequently.
Learn to make a straight cut through a bar. Try to do this without using a square to
guide you. One of the tests of a good mechanic is ability to judge a straight cut.
The following plan is suggested as a test for the eye. Use a bar of iron or steel one
inch square, and make a cut an eighth of an inch deep across it; then turn it around a
quarter, so as to expose the nest face, and continue the cut along the side, the same
depth, and follow this up with the remaining two sides, and see how near the end of
the first cut and the finish cut come together. The test will surprise you.
Cutting Metals True.—When you saw off the end of such a bar for trial purposes,
use a square, after the cut is made, and note how much it is out of true inp. 64both
directions. It is a curious fact that most mechanics are disposed to saw or cut crooked
in one direction, either to the right or to the left. In tests made it is found that this
defect is persisted in.
It is practice only which will remedy this, and it would be well for the boy to learn
this for himself as early in his career as possible, and correct the tendency to veer in
either direction.
The test of sawing around a round bar is also commended. After a few trials you will
be surprised to see how your judgment will improve in practice.
Lathe Work.—Learn the uses of the chuck. As you have, probably, economized as
much as possible, a universal chuck is not available, hence the first experience will
be with an independent chuck, where the three dogs move independently of each
other. This will give you some work to learn how you can get the job true.
Now, before attempting to cut the material, thoroughly learn all the parts of the feed
mechanism, and how to reverse, as well as to cross feed. Learn the operation of the
operative parts so that your hand will instinctively find them, while the eye is on the
work.
First Steps.—See to it that your tools are sharp, and at the first trials make lightp. 65
cuts.
Practice the feeds by manually moving the tool holder, for surface cutting as well as
Page 69
for cross cutting.
Setting the Tool.—Set the cutting tool at various angles, and try the different tools,
noting the peculiarities of each, at the different speeds. Do not, by any means, use
refractory metals for your first attempt. Mild steel is a good test, and a light gray iron
is admirable for practice lessons.
Metals Used.—Brass is good for testing purposes, but the difficulty is that the
tendency of the boy, at first, is to try to do the work too rapidly, and brass encourages
this tendency. Feed slowly and regularly until you can make an even finish.
Then chuck and re-chuck to familiarize yourself with every operative part of the
lathe, and never try to force the cutting tool. If it has a tendency to run into the work,
set it higher. If, on the other hand, you find, in feeding, that it is hard to move the tool
post along, the tool is too high, and should be lowered.
The Four Important Things.—Constant practice of this kind will soon enable you to
feel instinctively when the tool is doing good work. While you are thus
experimenting do not forget the speed. This will need your attention.
Remember, you have several things to think about in commencing to run the lathe, all
p. 66
of which will take care of themselves when it becomes familiar to you. These may be
enumerated as follows:
First: The kind of tool best to use.
Second: Its proper set, to do the best work.
Third: The speed of the work in the lathe.
Fourth: The feed, or the thickness of the cut into the material.
Turning up a Cylinder.—The first and most important work is to turn up a small
cylinder to a calipered dimension. When it is roughed down ready for the finish cut,
set the tool so it will take off a sufficient amount to prevent the caliper from spanning
it, and this will enable you to finish it off with emery paper, or allow another small
cut to be taken.
Turning Grooves.—Then follow this up by turning in a variety of annular grooves of
different depths and widths; and also V-shaped grooves, the latter to be performed by
using both the longitudinal and transverse feeds. This will give you excellent practice
in using both hands simultaneously.
The next step would be to turn out a bore and fit a mandrel into it. This will give you
the opportunity to use the caliper to good advantage, and will test your capacity to
use them for inside as well as for outside work
Setting the Tool.—Set the cutting tool at various angles, and try the different tools,
noting the peculiarities of each, at the different speeds. Do not, by any means, use
refractory metals for your first attempt. Mild steel is a good test, and a light gray iron
is admirable for practice lessons.
Metals Used.—Brass is good for testing purposes, but the difficulty is that the
tendency of the boy, at first, is to try to do the work too rapidly, and brass encourages
this tendency. Feed slowly and regularly until you can make an even finish.
Then chuck and re-chuck to familiarize yourself with every operative part of the
lathe, and never try to force the cutting tool. If it has a tendency to run into the work,
set it higher. If, on the other hand, you find, in feeding, that it is hard to move the tool
post along, the tool is too high, and should be lowered.
The Four Important Things.—Constant practice of this kind will soon enable you to
feel instinctively when the tool is doing good work. While you are thus
experimenting do not forget the speed. This will need your attention.
Remember, you have several things to think about in commencing to run the lathe, all
p. 66
of which will take care of themselves when it becomes familiar to you. These may be
enumerated as follows:
First: The kind of tool best to use.
Second: Its proper set, to do the best work.
Third: The speed of the work in the lathe.
Fourth: The feed, or the thickness of the cut into the material.
Turning up a Cylinder.—The first and most important work is to turn up a small
cylinder to a calipered dimension. When it is roughed down ready for the finish cut,
set the tool so it will take off a sufficient amount to prevent the caliper from spanning
it, and this will enable you to finish it off with emery paper, or allow another small
cut to be taken.
Turning Grooves.—Then follow this up by turning in a variety of annular grooves of
different depths and widths; and also V-shaped grooves, the latter to be performed by
using both the longitudinal and transverse feeds. This will give you excellent practice
in using both hands simultaneously.
The next step would be to turn out a bore and fit a mandrel into it. This will give you
the opportunity to use the caliper to good advantage, and will test your capacity to
use them for inside as well as for outside work
Page 70
Discs.—A job that will also afford good exercise is to turn up a disc with a groovep. 67
in its
face, and then chuck and turn another disk with an annular rib on its face to fit into the
groove. This requires delicacy of measurement with the inside as well as the outside
calipers.
The groove should be cut first, and the measurement taken from that, as it is less difficult
to handle and set the tool for the rib than for the groove.
Lathe Speeds.—Do not make the too common mistake of running the mandrel at high
speeds in your initial tests. It is far better to use a slow speed, and take a heavy cut. This
is good advice at all times, but it is particularly important with beginners
in its
face, and then chuck and turn another disk with an annular rib on its face to fit into the
groove. This requires delicacy of measurement with the inside as well as the outside
calipers.
The groove should be cut first, and the measurement taken from that, as it is less difficult
to handle and set the tool for the rib than for the groove.
Lathe Speeds.—Do not make the too common mistake of running the mandrel at high
speeds in your initial tests. It is far better to use a slow speed, and take a heavy cut. This
is good advice at all times, but it is particularly important with beginners
Page 71
Page 72
p. 68
Page 73
CHAPTER VIToC
ILLUSTRATING SOME OF THE FUNDAMENTAL DEVICES
There are numerous little devices and shop expedients which are desirable, and for which
the boy will find uses as he progresses.
We devote this chapter to hints of this kind, all of which are capable of being turned out
or utilized at various stages.
Lacing Belts.—To properly lace a belt is quite an art, as many who
have tried it know. If a belt runs off the pulley it is attributable to one
of three causes: either the pulleys are out of line or the shafts are not
parallel or the belt is laced so it makes the belt longer at one margin
than the other.
In Fig. 58 the lacing should commence at the center hole (A) of one
belt end and lace outwardly, terminating at the hole (B) in the center
of the other belt end, as shown in Fig. 58.
In Fig. 59 the lacing commences at A, and terminates at the hole (B)
at the edge. This will be ample for all but the widest belts.
Fig. 60 is adapted for a narrow belt. The lacing commences at one
margin hole (A), and terminates at the other margin hole (Z)
p. 69
Fig. 61 shows the outside of the belt.
Fig. 62. Gears.—This is something every boy ought to know about.
Fig. 62 shows a pair of intermeshing bevel gears. This is the correct
term for a pair when both are of the same diameter. ToList
Miter Gears.—In Fig. 63 we have a pair of miter gears, one being larger than the other.
Remember this distinction.
Fig. 64. Crown Wheel.—This is a simple manner of transmitting motion from one shaft
to another, when the shafts are at right angles, or nearly so, without using bevel or miter
gears.
Fig. 65. Grooved Friction Gearing.—Two grooved pulleys, which fit each other
accurately, will transmit power without losing too much by friction. The deeper the
grooves the greater is the loss by friction.
Fig. 66. A Valve Which Closes by the Water Pressure.—The bibb has therein a
p. 70
movable valve on a horizontal stem, the valve being on the inside of the seat. The stem of
ILLUSTRATING SOME OF THE FUNDAMENTAL DEVICES
There are numerous little devices and shop expedients which are desirable, and for which
the boy will find uses as he progresses.
We devote this chapter to hints of this kind, all of which are capable of being turned out
or utilized at various stages.
Lacing Belts.—To properly lace a belt is quite an art, as many who
have tried it know. If a belt runs off the pulley it is attributable to one
of three causes: either the pulleys are out of line or the shafts are not
parallel or the belt is laced so it makes the belt longer at one margin
than the other.
In Fig. 58 the lacing should commence at the center hole (A) of one
belt end and lace outwardly, terminating at the hole (B) in the center
of the other belt end, as shown in Fig. 58.
In Fig. 59 the lacing commences at A, and terminates at the hole (B)
at the edge. This will be ample for all but the widest belts.
Fig. 60 is adapted for a narrow belt. The lacing commences at one
margin hole (A), and terminates at the other margin hole (Z)
p. 69
Fig. 61 shows the outside of the belt.
Fig. 62. Gears.—This is something every boy ought to know about.
Fig. 62 shows a pair of intermeshing bevel gears. This is the correct
term for a pair when both are of the same diameter. ToList
Miter Gears.—In Fig. 63 we have a pair of miter gears, one being larger than the other.
Remember this distinction.
Fig. 64. Crown Wheel.—This is a simple manner of transmitting motion from one shaft
to another, when the shafts are at right angles, or nearly so, without using bevel or miter
gears.
Fig. 65. Grooved Friction Gearing.—Two grooved pulleys, which fit each other
accurately, will transmit power without losing too much by friction. The deeper the
grooves the greater is the loss by friction.
Fig. 66. A Valve Which Closes by the Water Pressure.—The bibb has therein a
p. 70
movable valve on a horizontal stem, the valve being on the inside of the seat. The stem of
Page 74
the handle has at its lower end a crank bend, which engages with the
outer end of the valve stem. When the handle is turned in either
direction the valve is unseated. On releasing the handle the pressure
of the water against the valve seats it.
Fig. 67. Cone Pulleys.—Two cone pulleys of equal size and taper
provide a means whereby a change in speed can be transmitted from
one shaft to another by merely moving the belt to and fro. The
slightest change is available by this means.
Fig. 68. Universal Joint.—A wheel, with four projecting pins, is
placed between the U-shaped yokes on the ends of the approaching
shafts. The pins serve as the pivots for the angles formed by the two
shafts.
Fig. 69. Trammel for Making an Ellipse.—This
is a tool easily made, which will be of great
service in the shop. In a disc (A), preferably
made of brass, are two channels (B) at right
angles to each other. The grooves are undercut,
so that the blocks (C) will fit and slide in the
grooves and be held therein by the dove-tailed
formation. Each block is longer than the width of
the groove, and has an outwardly projecting pin
which passes through a bar (D). One pin (E) is
ToList movable along in a slot, but is adjustable at any
p. 71
point so that the shape of the ellipse may be
varied. The end of the bar has a series of holes (G) for a pencil, so
that the size of the ellipse may also be changed.
Fig. 70. Escapements.—Various forms of escapements may be made,
but the object of all is the same. The device is designed to permit a
wheel to move intermittingly or in a step by step movement, by the
swinging motion of a pendulum. Another thing is accomplished by it.
The teeth of the escapement are cut at such an angle that, as one of
the teeth of the escapement is released from one tooth of the
escapement wheel, the spring, or the weight of the clock, will cause
one of the teeth of the escapement wheel to engage the other tooth of
the escapement, and give the pendulum an impulse in the other
direction. In the figure, A is the escapement, B the escapement
ToList p. 72
wheels and a, b, the pallets, which are cut at suitable angles to
actuate the pendulum.
Fig. 71. Simple Device to Prevent a Wheel or Shaft prom Turning Back.—This is a
substitute for a pawl and ratchet wheel. A is a drum or a hollow wheel and B a pulley on
outer end of the valve stem. When the handle is turned in either
direction the valve is unseated. On releasing the handle the pressure
of the water against the valve seats it.
Fig. 67. Cone Pulleys.—Two cone pulleys of equal size and taper
provide a means whereby a change in speed can be transmitted from
one shaft to another by merely moving the belt to and fro. The
slightest change is available by this means.
Fig. 68. Universal Joint.—A wheel, with four projecting pins, is
placed between the U-shaped yokes on the ends of the approaching
shafts. The pins serve as the pivots for the angles formed by the two
shafts.
Fig. 69. Trammel for Making an Ellipse.—This
is a tool easily made, which will be of great
service in the shop. In a disc (A), preferably
made of brass, are two channels (B) at right
angles to each other. The grooves are undercut,
so that the blocks (C) will fit and slide in the
grooves and be held therein by the dove-tailed
formation. Each block is longer than the width of
the groove, and has an outwardly projecting pin
which passes through a bar (D). One pin (E) is
ToList movable along in a slot, but is adjustable at any
p. 71
point so that the shape of the ellipse may be
varied. The end of the bar has a series of holes (G) for a pencil, so
that the size of the ellipse may also be changed.
Fig. 70. Escapements.—Various forms of escapements may be made,
but the object of all is the same. The device is designed to permit a
wheel to move intermittingly or in a step by step movement, by the
swinging motion of a pendulum. Another thing is accomplished by it.
The teeth of the escapement are cut at such an angle that, as one of
the teeth of the escapement is released from one tooth of the
escapement wheel, the spring, or the weight of the clock, will cause
one of the teeth of the escapement wheel to engage the other tooth of
the escapement, and give the pendulum an impulse in the other
direction. In the figure, A is the escapement, B the escapement
ToList p. 72
wheels and a, b, the pallets, which are cut at suitable angles to
actuate the pendulum.
Fig. 71. Simple Device to Prevent a Wheel or Shaft prom Turning Back.—This is a
substitute for a pawl and ratchet wheel. A is a drum or a hollow wheel and B a pulley on
Page 75
a shaft, and this pulley turns loosely with the drum (A). Four tangential slots (C) are cut
into the perimeter of the pulley (B), and in each is a hardened steel roller (D). It matters
not in what position the wheel (B) may be, at least two of the rollers will always be in
contact with the inside of the drum (A), and thus cause the pulley and drum to turn
together. On reversing the direction of the pulley the rollers are immediately freed from
binding contact.
Fig. 72. Racks and Pinions.—The object of this form of mechanism is to provide a
reciprocating, or back-and-forth motion, from a shaft which turns continually in one
direction. A is the rack and B a mutilated gear. When the gear turns it moves the rack in
one direction, because the teeth of the gear engage the lower rack teeth, and when the
rack has moved to the end its teeth engage the teeth of the upper rack, thus reversing the
movement of the rack.
Fig. 73. Mutilated Gears.—These are made in so many forms, and adapted for p.such
73
a
variety of purposes, that we merely give a few samples to show what is meant by the
term.
Fig. 74. Simple Shaft Coupling.—Prepare two similarly formed discs (A, B), which are
provided with hubs so they may be keyed to the ends of the respective shafts. One disc
has four or more projecting pins (C), and the other disc suitable holes (D) to receive the
pins.
Fig. 75. Clutches.—This is a piece of mechanism which is required in so many kinds of
machinery, that we show several of the most approved types.
Fig. 76. Ball and Socket Joints.—The most practical form of ball and socket joints is
simply a head in which is a bowl-shaped cavity the depth of one-half of the ball. A plate
with a central opening small enough to hold in the ball, and still large enough at thep. 74neck
to permit the arm carrying the ball to swing a limited distance, is secured by threads, or
by bolts, to the head. The first figure shows this.
Fig. 77 illustrates a simple manner of tightening the ball so as to hold the standard in any
desired position.
Fig. 78. Tripping Devices.—These are usually in the form of hooks, so arranged that a
slight pull on the tripping lever will cause the suspended articles to drop.
Fig. 79. Anchor Bolt.—These are used in brick or cement walls. The bolt itself screws
into a sleeve which is split, and draws a wedge nut up to the split end of the sleeve. As a
result the split sleeve opens or spreads out and binds against the wall sufficiently to
prevent the bolt from being withdrawn.
Fig. 80. Lazy Tongs.—One of the simplest and most effective instruments for carrying
ice, boxes or heavy objects, which are bulky or inconvenient to carry. It grasps the article
firmly, and the heavier the weight the tighter is its grasp.
into the perimeter of the pulley (B), and in each is a hardened steel roller (D). It matters
not in what position the wheel (B) may be, at least two of the rollers will always be in
contact with the inside of the drum (A), and thus cause the pulley and drum to turn
together. On reversing the direction of the pulley the rollers are immediately freed from
binding contact.
Fig. 72. Racks and Pinions.—The object of this form of mechanism is to provide a
reciprocating, or back-and-forth motion, from a shaft which turns continually in one
direction. A is the rack and B a mutilated gear. When the gear turns it moves the rack in
one direction, because the teeth of the gear engage the lower rack teeth, and when the
rack has moved to the end its teeth engage the teeth of the upper rack, thus reversing the
movement of the rack.
Fig. 73. Mutilated Gears.—These are made in so many forms, and adapted for p.such
73
a
variety of purposes, that we merely give a few samples to show what is meant by the
term.
Fig. 74. Simple Shaft Coupling.—Prepare two similarly formed discs (A, B), which are
provided with hubs so they may be keyed to the ends of the respective shafts. One disc
has four or more projecting pins (C), and the other disc suitable holes (D) to receive the
pins.
Fig. 75. Clutches.—This is a piece of mechanism which is required in so many kinds of
machinery, that we show several of the most approved types.
Fig. 76. Ball and Socket Joints.—The most practical form of ball and socket joints is
simply a head in which is a bowl-shaped cavity the depth of one-half of the ball. A plate
with a central opening small enough to hold in the ball, and still large enough at thep. 74neck
to permit the arm carrying the ball to swing a limited distance, is secured by threads, or
by bolts, to the head. The first figure shows this.
Fig. 77 illustrates a simple manner of tightening the ball so as to hold the standard in any
desired position.
Fig. 78. Tripping Devices.—These are usually in the form of hooks, so arranged that a
slight pull on the tripping lever will cause the suspended articles to drop.
Fig. 79. Anchor Bolt.—These are used in brick or cement walls. The bolt itself screws
into a sleeve which is split, and draws a wedge nut up to the split end of the sleeve. As a
result the split sleeve opens or spreads out and binds against the wall sufficiently to
prevent the bolt from being withdrawn.
Fig. 80. Lazy Tongs.—One of the simplest and most effective instruments for carrying
ice, boxes or heavy objects, which are bulky or inconvenient to carry. It grasps the article
firmly, and the heavier the weight the tighter is its grasp.
Page 76
Fig. 81. Disc Shears.—This is a useful tool either for cutting tin or
paper, pasteboard and the like. It will cut by the act of drawing the
material through it, but if power is applied to one or to both of the
shafts the work is much facilitated, particularly in thick orp. 75hard
material.
Fig. 82. Wabble Saw.—This is a most simple and
useful tool, as it will readily and quickly saw out a
groove so that it is undercut. The saw is put on the
mandrel at an angle, as will be seen, and should be
run at a high rate of speed.
Fig. 83. Crank Motion by a Slotted Yoke.—This
produces a straight back-and-forth movement
from the circular motion of a wheel or crank. It
entirely dispenses with a pitman rod, and it
enables the machine, or the part of the machine
operated, to be placed close to the crank.
Fig. 84. Continuous Feed by the Motion of a
Lever.—The simple lever with a pawl on each
side of the fulcrum is the most effective means to
make a continuous feed by the simple movement
p. 76
of a lever. The form shown is capable of many
modifications, and it can be easily adapted for any
ToList
particular work desired.
Fig. 85. Crank Motion.—By the structure shown,
namely, a slotted lever (A), a quick return can be made with the lever.
B indicates the fulcrum.
Fig. 86. Ratchet Head.—This shows a well-known form for common
ratchet. It has the advantage that the radially movable plugs (A) are ToList
tangentially disposed, and rest against walls (B) eccentrically
disposed, and are, therefore, in such a position that they easily slide over the inclines.
Fig. 87. Bench Clamp.—A pair of dogs (A, B), with the ends bent toward each other, and
pivoted midway between the ends to the bench in such a position that the board (C), to be
held between them, on striking the rear ends of the dogs, will force the forward ends
p. 77
together, and thus clamp it firmly for planing or other purposes.
Fig. 88. Helico-Volute Spring.—This is a form of spring for tension purposes. The
enlarged cross-section of the coil in its middle portion, with the ends tapering down to the
eyes, provides a means whereby the pull is transferred from the smaller to the larger
portions, without producing a great breaking strain near the ends.
paper, pasteboard and the like. It will cut by the act of drawing the
material through it, but if power is applied to one or to both of the
shafts the work is much facilitated, particularly in thick orp. 75hard
material.
Fig. 82. Wabble Saw.—This is a most simple and
useful tool, as it will readily and quickly saw out a
groove so that it is undercut. The saw is put on the
mandrel at an angle, as will be seen, and should be
run at a high rate of speed.
Fig. 83. Crank Motion by a Slotted Yoke.—This
produces a straight back-and-forth movement
from the circular motion of a wheel or crank. It
entirely dispenses with a pitman rod, and it
enables the machine, or the part of the machine
operated, to be placed close to the crank.
Fig. 84. Continuous Feed by the Motion of a
Lever.—The simple lever with a pawl on each
side of the fulcrum is the most effective means to
make a continuous feed by the simple movement
p. 76
of a lever. The form shown is capable of many
modifications, and it can be easily adapted for any
ToList
particular work desired.
Fig. 85. Crank Motion.—By the structure shown,
namely, a slotted lever (A), a quick return can be made with the lever.
B indicates the fulcrum.
Fig. 86. Ratchet Head.—This shows a well-known form for common
ratchet. It has the advantage that the radially movable plugs (A) are ToList
tangentially disposed, and rest against walls (B) eccentrically
disposed, and are, therefore, in such a position that they easily slide over the inclines.
Fig. 87. Bench Clamp.—A pair of dogs (A, B), with the ends bent toward each other, and
pivoted midway between the ends to the bench in such a position that the board (C), to be
held between them, on striking the rear ends of the dogs, will force the forward ends
p. 77
together, and thus clamp it firmly for planing or other purposes.
Fig. 88. Helico-Volute Spring.—This is a form of spring for tension purposes. The
enlarged cross-section of the coil in its middle portion, with the ends tapering down to the
eyes, provides a means whereby the pull is transferred from the smaller to the larger
portions, without producing a great breaking strain near the ends.
Page 77
Fig. 89. Double Helico-Volute.—This form, so far as the outlines are
considered, is the opposite of Fig. 88. A compression spring of this
kind has a very wide range of movement.
Fig. 90. Helical Spring.—This form of coil, uniform from end to end,
is usually made of metal which is square in cross-section, and used
where it is required for heavy purposes
p. 78
Fig. 91. Single Volute Helix-Spring.—This is also used for
compression, intended where tremendous weights or resistances are to
be overcome, and when the range of movement is small.
Fig. 92. Flat Spiral, or Convolute.—This is for small machines. It is
the familiar form used in watches owing to its delicate structure, and it
is admirably adapted to yield to the rocking motion of an arbor.
Fig. 93. Eccentric Rod and Strap.—A simple and convenient form of
structure, intended to furnish a reciprocating motion where a crank is
not available. An illustration of its use is shown on certain types of
steam engine to operate the valves.
Fig. 94. Anti-Dead Center for Foot-Lathes.—A flat, spiral spring
(A), with its coiled end attached to firm support (B), has its other end
pivotally attached to the crank-pin (C), the tension of the spring being
such that when the lathe stops the crack-pin will always be at one side
of the dead-center, thus enabling the operator to start the machine by
ToList merely pressing the foot downwardly on the treadle (D)
considered, is the opposite of Fig. 88. A compression spring of this
kind has a very wide range of movement.
Fig. 90. Helical Spring.—This form of coil, uniform from end to end,
is usually made of metal which is square in cross-section, and used
where it is required for heavy purposes
p. 78
Fig. 91. Single Volute Helix-Spring.—This is also used for
compression, intended where tremendous weights or resistances are to
be overcome, and when the range of movement is small.
Fig. 92. Flat Spiral, or Convolute.—This is for small machines. It is
the familiar form used in watches owing to its delicate structure, and it
is admirably adapted to yield to the rocking motion of an arbor.
Fig. 93. Eccentric Rod and Strap.—A simple and convenient form of
structure, intended to furnish a reciprocating motion where a crank is
not available. An illustration of its use is shown on certain types of
steam engine to operate the valves.
Fig. 94. Anti-Dead Center for Foot-Lathes.—A flat, spiral spring
(A), with its coiled end attached to firm support (B), has its other end
pivotally attached to the crank-pin (C), the tension of the spring being
such that when the lathe stops the crack-pin will always be at one side
of the dead-center, thus enabling the operator to start the machine by
ToList merely pressing the foot downwardly on the treadle (D)
Page 78
Page 79
p. 79
Page 80
CHAPTER VIIToC
PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS
A workman is able to select the right metals because he knows that each has some
peculiar property which is best adapted for his particular use. These with their meaning
will now be explained.
Elasticity.—This exists in metals in three distinct ways: First, in the form of traction.
Hang a weight on a wire and it will stretch a certain amount. When the weight is removed
the wire shrinks back to its original length.
Second: If the weight on the wire is rotated, so as to twist it, and the hand is taken from
the weight, it will untwist itself, and go back to its original position. This is called
torsion.
Third: A piece of metal may be coiled up like a watch spring, or bent like a carriage
spring, and it will yield when pressure is applied. This is called flexure.
Certain kinds of steel have these qualities in a high degree.
Tenacity.—This is a term used to express the resistance which the body opposes to the
p. 80
separation of its parts. It is determined by forming the metal into a wire, and hanging on
weights, to find how much will be required to break it. If we have two wires, the first
with a transverse area only one-quarter that of the second, and the first breaks at 25
pounds, while the second breaks at 50 pounds, the tenacity of the first is twice as great as
that of the second.
To the boy who understands simple ratio in mathematics, the problem would be like this:
25 × 4 : 50 × 1, or as 2 : 1.
The Most Tenacious Metal.—Steel has the greatest tenacity of all metals, and lead the
least. In proportion to weight, however, there are many substances which have this
property in a higher degree. Cotton fibers will support millions of times their own
weight.
There is one peculiar thing, that tenacity varies with the form of the body. A solid
cylindrical body has a greater strength than a square one of the same size; and a hollow
cylinder more tenacity than a solid one. This principle is well known in the bones of
animals, in the feathers of birds, and in the stems of many plants.
In almost every metal tenacity diminishes as the temperature increases.
PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS
A workman is able to select the right metals because he knows that each has some
peculiar property which is best adapted for his particular use. These with their meaning
will now be explained.
Elasticity.—This exists in metals in three distinct ways: First, in the form of traction.
Hang a weight on a wire and it will stretch a certain amount. When the weight is removed
the wire shrinks back to its original length.
Second: If the weight on the wire is rotated, so as to twist it, and the hand is taken from
the weight, it will untwist itself, and go back to its original position. This is called
torsion.
Third: A piece of metal may be coiled up like a watch spring, or bent like a carriage
spring, and it will yield when pressure is applied. This is called flexure.
Certain kinds of steel have these qualities in a high degree.
Tenacity.—This is a term used to express the resistance which the body opposes to the
p. 80
separation of its parts. It is determined by forming the metal into a wire, and hanging on
weights, to find how much will be required to break it. If we have two wires, the first
with a transverse area only one-quarter that of the second, and the first breaks at 25
pounds, while the second breaks at 50 pounds, the tenacity of the first is twice as great as
that of the second.
To the boy who understands simple ratio in mathematics, the problem would be like this:
25 × 4 : 50 × 1, or as 2 : 1.
The Most Tenacious Metal.—Steel has the greatest tenacity of all metals, and lead the
least. In proportion to weight, however, there are many substances which have this
property in a higher degree. Cotton fibers will support millions of times their own
weight.
There is one peculiar thing, that tenacity varies with the form of the body. A solid
cylindrical body has a greater strength than a square one of the same size; and a hollow
cylinder more tenacity than a solid one. This principle is well known in the bones of
animals, in the feathers of birds, and in the stems of many plants.
In almost every metal tenacity diminishes as the temperature increases.
Page 81
Ductility.—This is a property whereby a metal may be drawn out to form a wire. Some
p. 81
metals, like cast iron, have absolutely no ductility. The metal which possesses this
property to the highest degree, is platinum. Wires of this metal have been drawn out so
fine that over 30,000 of them laid side by side would measure only one inch across, and a
mile of such wire would weigh only a grain, or one seven-thousandth of a pound.
Malleability.—This is considered a modification of ductility. Any metal which can be
beaten out, as with a hammer, or flattened into sheets with rollers, is considered
malleable. Gold possesses this property to the highest degree. It has been beaten into
leaves one three-hundred-thousandth of an inch thick.
Hardness.—This is the resistance which bodies offer to being scratched by others. As an
example, the diamond has the capacity to scratch all, but cannot be scratched by any
other.
Alloys.—Alloys, that is a combination of two or more metals, are harder than the pure
metals, and for this reason jewelry, and coins, are usually alloyed.
The resistance of a body to compression does not depend upon its hardness. Strike a
diamond with a hammer and it flies to pieces, but wood does not. One is brittle and the
other is tough.
The machinist can utilize this property by understanding that velocity enables a soft
p. 82
material to cut a harder one. Thus, a wrought iron disc rotating rapidly, will cut such hard
substances as agate or quartz.
Resistance.—All metals offer more or less resistance to the flow of an electric current.
Silver offers the least resistance, and German silver the greatest. Temperature also affects
the flow. It passes more easily over a cold than a warm conductor.
Persistence.—All metals on receiving heat, will retain it for a certain length of time, and
will finally cool down to the temperature of the surrounding atmosphere. Some, like
aluminum, retain it for a long time; others, as iron, will give it off quickly.
Conductivity.—All metals will conduct heat and cold, as well as electricity. If one end of
a metal bar is heated, the heat creeps along to the other end until it has the same
temperature throughout. This is called equalization.
If a heated bar is placed in contact with another, the effect is to increase the temperature
of the cold bar and lower that of the warm bar. This is called reciprocity.
Molecular Forces.—Molecular attraction is a force which acts in such a way as to bring
p. 83
all the particles of a body together. It acts in three ways, dependent on the particular
conditions which exist.
First: Cohesion. This exists between molecules which are of the same kind, as for
instance, iron. Cohesion of the particles is very strong in solids, much weaker in liquids,
p. 81
metals, like cast iron, have absolutely no ductility. The metal which possesses this
property to the highest degree, is platinum. Wires of this metal have been drawn out so
fine that over 30,000 of them laid side by side would measure only one inch across, and a
mile of such wire would weigh only a grain, or one seven-thousandth of a pound.
Malleability.—This is considered a modification of ductility. Any metal which can be
beaten out, as with a hammer, or flattened into sheets with rollers, is considered
malleable. Gold possesses this property to the highest degree. It has been beaten into
leaves one three-hundred-thousandth of an inch thick.
Hardness.—This is the resistance which bodies offer to being scratched by others. As an
example, the diamond has the capacity to scratch all, but cannot be scratched by any
other.
Alloys.—Alloys, that is a combination of two or more metals, are harder than the pure
metals, and for this reason jewelry, and coins, are usually alloyed.
The resistance of a body to compression does not depend upon its hardness. Strike a
diamond with a hammer and it flies to pieces, but wood does not. One is brittle and the
other is tough.
The machinist can utilize this property by understanding that velocity enables a soft
p. 82
material to cut a harder one. Thus, a wrought iron disc rotating rapidly, will cut such hard
substances as agate or quartz.
Resistance.—All metals offer more or less resistance to the flow of an electric current.
Silver offers the least resistance, and German silver the greatest. Temperature also affects
the flow. It passes more easily over a cold than a warm conductor.
Persistence.—All metals on receiving heat, will retain it for a certain length of time, and
will finally cool down to the temperature of the surrounding atmosphere. Some, like
aluminum, retain it for a long time; others, as iron, will give it off quickly.
Conductivity.—All metals will conduct heat and cold, as well as electricity. If one end of
a metal bar is heated, the heat creeps along to the other end until it has the same
temperature throughout. This is called equalization.
If a heated bar is placed in contact with another, the effect is to increase the temperature
of the cold bar and lower that of the warm bar. This is called reciprocity.
Molecular Forces.—Molecular attraction is a force which acts in such a way as to bring
p. 83
all the particles of a body together. It acts in three ways, dependent on the particular
conditions which exist.
First: Cohesion. This exists between molecules which are of the same kind, as for
instance, iron. Cohesion of the particles is very strong in solids, much weaker in liquids,
Page 82
and scarcely exists at all between the particles in gases.
Second: Adhesion is that property which exists between the surfaces of bodies in contact.
If two flat surfaces are pressed together, as for instance, two perfectly smooth and flat
pieces of lead, they will adhere. If, for instance, oil should be put on the surfaces, before
putting them together, they would adhere so firmly that it would be difficult to pull them
apart.
Third: Affinity. This is another peculiarity about materials. Thus, while cohesion binds
together the molecules of water, it is chemical affinity which unites two elements, like
hydrogen and oxygen, of which water is composed.
Porosity.—All matter has little hollows or spaces between the molecules. You know
what this is in the case of a sponge, or pumice stone. Certain metals have the pores so
small that it is difficult to see them except with a very powerful glass. Under great
p. 84
pressure water can be forced through the pores of metals, as has been done in the case of
gold. Water also is porous, but the spaces between the molecules are very small.
Compressibility.—It follows from the foregoing statement, that if there are little
interstices between the molecules, the various bodies can be compressed together. This
can be done in varying degrees with all solids, but liquids, generally, have little
compressibility. Gases are readily reduced in volume by compression.
Elasticity.—This is a property by virtue of which a body resumes its original form when
compressed. India rubber, ivory and glass are examples of elasticity; whereas, lead and
clay do not possess this property. Air is the most elastic of all substances.
Inertia.—This is a property of matter by virtue of which it cannot of itself change its
state of motion or of rest.
Newton's first law of motion is, in substance, that matter at rest will eternally remain at
rest, and matter in motion will forever continue in motion, unless acted on by some
external force.
A rider is carried over the head of a horse when the latter suddenly stops. This illustrates
the inertia of movement. A stone at rest will always remain in that condition unless
moved by some force. That shows the inertia of rest.
p. 85
Momentum.—This is the term to designate the quantity of motion in a body. This quantity
varies and is dependent on the mass, together with the velocity. A fly wheel is a good
example. It continues to move after the impelling force ceases; and a metal wheel has
greater momentum than a wooden wheel at the same speed, owing to its greater mass.
If, however, the wooden wheel is speeded up sufficiently it may have the same
momentum as the metal one.
Second: Adhesion is that property which exists between the surfaces of bodies in contact.
If two flat surfaces are pressed together, as for instance, two perfectly smooth and flat
pieces of lead, they will adhere. If, for instance, oil should be put on the surfaces, before
putting them together, they would adhere so firmly that it would be difficult to pull them
apart.
Third: Affinity. This is another peculiarity about materials. Thus, while cohesion binds
together the molecules of water, it is chemical affinity which unites two elements, like
hydrogen and oxygen, of which water is composed.
Porosity.—All matter has little hollows or spaces between the molecules. You know
what this is in the case of a sponge, or pumice stone. Certain metals have the pores so
small that it is difficult to see them except with a very powerful glass. Under great
p. 84
pressure water can be forced through the pores of metals, as has been done in the case of
gold. Water also is porous, but the spaces between the molecules are very small.
Compressibility.—It follows from the foregoing statement, that if there are little
interstices between the molecules, the various bodies can be compressed together. This
can be done in varying degrees with all solids, but liquids, generally, have little
compressibility. Gases are readily reduced in volume by compression.
Elasticity.—This is a property by virtue of which a body resumes its original form when
compressed. India rubber, ivory and glass are examples of elasticity; whereas, lead and
clay do not possess this property. Air is the most elastic of all substances.
Inertia.—This is a property of matter by virtue of which it cannot of itself change its
state of motion or of rest.
Newton's first law of motion is, in substance, that matter at rest will eternally remain at
rest, and matter in motion will forever continue in motion, unless acted on by some
external force.
A rider is carried over the head of a horse when the latter suddenly stops. This illustrates
the inertia of movement. A stone at rest will always remain in that condition unless
moved by some force. That shows the inertia of rest.
p. 85
Momentum.—This is the term to designate the quantity of motion in a body. This quantity
varies and is dependent on the mass, together with the velocity. A fly wheel is a good
example. It continues to move after the impelling force ceases; and a metal wheel has
greater momentum than a wooden wheel at the same speed, owing to its greater mass.
If, however, the wooden wheel is speeded up sufficiently it may have the same
momentum as the metal one.
Page 83
Weight.—All substances have what is called weight. This means that everything is
attracted toward the earth by the force of gravity. Gravity, however, is different from
weight. All substances attract each other; not only in the direction of the center of the
earth, but laterally, as well.
Weight, therefore, has reference to the pull of an object toward the earth; and gravity to
that influence which all matter has for each other independently of the direction.
Centripetal Force.—This attraction of the earth, which gives articles the property of
weight, is termed centripetal force—that is, the drawing in of a body.
Centrifugal Force.—The direct opposite of centripetal, is centrifugal force, which tends
p. 86
to throw outwardly. Dirt flying from a rapidly moving wheel illustrates this.
Capillary Attraction.—There is a peculiar property in liquids, which deserves attention,
and should be understood, and that is the name given to the tendency of liquids to rise in
fine tubes.
It is stated that water will always find its level. While this is true, we have an instance
where, owing to the presence of a solid, made in a peculiar form, causes the liquid,
within, to rise up far beyond the level of the water.
This may be illustrated by three tubes of different internal diameters. The liquid rises up
higher in the second than in the first, and still higher in the third than in the second. The
smaller the tube the greater the height of the liquid.
This is called capillary attraction, the word capillary meaning a hair. The phenomena is
best observed when seen in tubes which are as fine as hairs. The liquid has an affinity for
the metal, and creeps up the inside, and the distance it will thus move depends on the size
of the tube.
The Sap of Trees.—The sap of trees goes upwardly, not because the tree is alive, but due
to this property in the contact of liquids with a solid. It is exactly on the same principle
p. 87
that if the end of a piece of blotting paper is immersed in water, the latter will creep up
and spread over the entire surface of the sheet.
In like manner, oil moves upwardly in a wick, and will keep on doing so, until the lighted
wick is extinguished, when the flow ceases. When it is again lighted the oil again flows,
as before.
If it were not for this principle of capillary attraction, it would be difficult to form a
bubble of air in a spirit level. You can readily see how the liquid at each end of the air
bubble rounds it off, as though it tried to surround it.
Sound.—Sound is caused by vibration, and it would be impossible to convey it without
an elastic medium of some kind.
attracted toward the earth by the force of gravity. Gravity, however, is different from
weight. All substances attract each other; not only in the direction of the center of the
earth, but laterally, as well.
Weight, therefore, has reference to the pull of an object toward the earth; and gravity to
that influence which all matter has for each other independently of the direction.
Centripetal Force.—This attraction of the earth, which gives articles the property of
weight, is termed centripetal force—that is, the drawing in of a body.
Centrifugal Force.—The direct opposite of centripetal, is centrifugal force, which tends
p. 86
to throw outwardly. Dirt flying from a rapidly moving wheel illustrates this.
Capillary Attraction.—There is a peculiar property in liquids, which deserves attention,
and should be understood, and that is the name given to the tendency of liquids to rise in
fine tubes.
It is stated that water will always find its level. While this is true, we have an instance
where, owing to the presence of a solid, made in a peculiar form, causes the liquid,
within, to rise up far beyond the level of the water.
This may be illustrated by three tubes of different internal diameters. The liquid rises up
higher in the second than in the first, and still higher in the third than in the second. The
smaller the tube the greater the height of the liquid.
This is called capillary attraction, the word capillary meaning a hair. The phenomena is
best observed when seen in tubes which are as fine as hairs. The liquid has an affinity for
the metal, and creeps up the inside, and the distance it will thus move depends on the size
of the tube.
The Sap of Trees.—The sap of trees goes upwardly, not because the tree is alive, but due
to this property in the contact of liquids with a solid. It is exactly on the same principle
p. 87
that if the end of a piece of blotting paper is immersed in water, the latter will creep up
and spread over the entire surface of the sheet.
In like manner, oil moves upwardly in a wick, and will keep on doing so, until the lighted
wick is extinguished, when the flow ceases. When it is again lighted the oil again flows,
as before.
If it were not for this principle of capillary attraction, it would be difficult to form a
bubble of air in a spirit level. You can readily see how the liquid at each end of the air
bubble rounds it off, as though it tried to surround it.
Sound.—Sound is caused by vibration, and it would be impossible to convey it without
an elastic medium of some kind.
Page 84
Acoustics is a branch of physics which treats of sounds. It is distinguished from music
which has reference to the particular kinds.
Sounds are distinguished from noises. The latter are discordant and abrupt vibrations,
whereas the former are regular and continuous.
Sound Mediums.—- Gases, vapors, liquids and solids transmit vibrations, but liquids and
solids propagate with greater velocity than gases.
Vibration.—A vibration is the moving to and fro of the molecules in a body, and the
greater their movement the more intense is the sound. The intensity of the sound is
p. 88
affected by the density of the atmosphere, and the movement of the winds also changes
its power of transmission.
Sound is also made more intense if a sonorous body is near its source. This is taken
advantage of in musical instruments, where a sounding-board is used, as in the case of
the piano, and in the violin, which has a thin shell as a body for holding the strings.
Another curious thing is shown in the speaking tube, where the sound waves are
confined, so that they are carried along in one line, and as they are not interfered with
will transmit the vibrations to great distances.
Velocity of Sound.—The temperature of the air has also an effect on the rate of
transmission, but for general purposes a temperature of 62 degrees has been taken as the
standard. The movement is shown to be about 50 miles in 4 minutes, or at the rate of
1,120 feet per second.
In water, however, the speed is four times greater; and in iron nearly fifteen times greater.
Soft earth is a poor conductor, while rock and solid earth convey very readily. Placing the
ear on a railway track will give the vibrations of a moving train miles before it can be
heard through the air.
Sound Reflections.—Sound waves move outwardly from the object in the form of wave-
p. 89
like rings, but those concentric rings, as they are called, may be interrupted at various
points by obstacles. When that is the case the sound is buffeted back, producing what is
called echoes.
Resonance.—Materials have a quality that produces a very useful result, called
resonance, and it is one of the things that gives added effect to a speaker's voice in a hall,
where there is a constant succession of echoes. A wall distant from the speaker about 55
feet, produces an almost instantaneous reflection of the sound, and at double that
measurement the effect is still stronger. When the distance is too short for the reflecting
sound to be heard, we have resonance. It enriches the sound of the voice, and gives a
finer quality to musical instruments.
Echoes.—When sounds are heard after the originals are emitted they tend to confusion,
and the quality of resonance is lost. There are places where echoes are repeated many
which has reference to the particular kinds.
Sounds are distinguished from noises. The latter are discordant and abrupt vibrations,
whereas the former are regular and continuous.
Sound Mediums.—- Gases, vapors, liquids and solids transmit vibrations, but liquids and
solids propagate with greater velocity than gases.
Vibration.—A vibration is the moving to and fro of the molecules in a body, and the
greater their movement the more intense is the sound. The intensity of the sound is
p. 88
affected by the density of the atmosphere, and the movement of the winds also changes
its power of transmission.
Sound is also made more intense if a sonorous body is near its source. This is taken
advantage of in musical instruments, where a sounding-board is used, as in the case of
the piano, and in the violin, which has a thin shell as a body for holding the strings.
Another curious thing is shown in the speaking tube, where the sound waves are
confined, so that they are carried along in one line, and as they are not interfered with
will transmit the vibrations to great distances.
Velocity of Sound.—The temperature of the air has also an effect on the rate of
transmission, but for general purposes a temperature of 62 degrees has been taken as the
standard. The movement is shown to be about 50 miles in 4 minutes, or at the rate of
1,120 feet per second.
In water, however, the speed is four times greater; and in iron nearly fifteen times greater.
Soft earth is a poor conductor, while rock and solid earth convey very readily. Placing the
ear on a railway track will give the vibrations of a moving train miles before it can be
heard through the air.
Sound Reflections.—Sound waves move outwardly from the object in the form of wave-
p. 89
like rings, but those concentric rings, as they are called, may be interrupted at various
points by obstacles. When that is the case the sound is buffeted back, producing what is
called echoes.
Resonance.—Materials have a quality that produces a very useful result, called
resonance, and it is one of the things that gives added effect to a speaker's voice in a hall,
where there is a constant succession of echoes. A wall distant from the speaker about 55
feet, produces an almost instantaneous reflection of the sound, and at double that
measurement the effect is still stronger. When the distance is too short for the reflecting
sound to be heard, we have resonance. It enriches the sound of the voice, and gives a
finer quality to musical instruments.
Echoes.—When sounds are heard after the originals are emitted they tend to confusion,
and the quality of resonance is lost. There are places where echoes are repeated many
Page 85
times. In the chateau of Simonetta, Italy, a sound will be repeated thirty times.
Speaking Trumpet.—This instrument is an example of the use of reflection. It is merely a
bell-shaped, or flaring body, the large end of which is directed to the audience. The voice
talking into the small end is directed forwardly, and is reflected from the sides, and its
resonance also enables the vibrations to carry farther than without the use of thep. 90solid
part of the instrument.
The ear trumpet is an illustration of a sound-collecting device, the waves being brought
together by reflection.
The Stethoscope.—This is an instrument used by physicians, and it is so delicate that the
movements of the organs of the body can be heard with great distinctness. It merely
collects the vibrations, and transmits them to the ears by the small tubes which are
connected with the collecting bell.
The Vitascope.—- Numerous instruments have been devised to determine the rate of
vibration of different materials and structures, the most important being the vitascope,
which has a revolvable cylinder, blackened with soot, and this being rotated at a certain
speed, the stylus, which is attached to the vibrating body, in contact with the cylinder,
will show the number per second, as well as the particular character of each oscillation.
The Phonautograph.—This instrument is used to register the vibration of wind
instruments, as well as the human voice, and the particular forms of the vibrations are
traced on a cylinder, the tracing stylus being attached to a thin vibrating membrane which
is affected by the voice or instrument.
The Phonograph.—This instrument is the outgrowth of the stylus forms of the apparatus
p. 91
described, but in this case the stylus, or needle, is fixed to a metallic diaphragm, and its
point makes an impression on suitable material placed on the outside of a revolvable
cylinder or disc.
Light.-Light is the agent which excites the sensation of vision in the eye. Various theories
have been advanced by scientists to account for the phenomenon, and the two most noted
views are the corpuscular, promulgated by Sir Isaac Newton, and the undulatory,
enunciated by Huygens and Euler.
The corpuscular theory conceives that light is a substance of exceedingly light particles
which are shot forth with immense velocity. The undulatory theory, now generally
accepted, maintains that light is carried by vibrations in ether. Ether is a subtle elastic
medium which fills all space.
Luminous bodies are those like the sun, which emit light. Rays may diverge, that is,
spread out; converge, or point toward each other; or they may be parallel with each other.
Velocity of Light.—Light moves at the rate of about 186,000 miles a second. As the sun
is about 94,000,000 miles from the earth, it takes 8 1/2 minutes for the light of the sun to
Speaking Trumpet.—This instrument is an example of the use of reflection. It is merely a
bell-shaped, or flaring body, the large end of which is directed to the audience. The voice
talking into the small end is directed forwardly, and is reflected from the sides, and its
resonance also enables the vibrations to carry farther than without the use of thep. 90solid
part of the instrument.
The ear trumpet is an illustration of a sound-collecting device, the waves being brought
together by reflection.
The Stethoscope.—This is an instrument used by physicians, and it is so delicate that the
movements of the organs of the body can be heard with great distinctness. It merely
collects the vibrations, and transmits them to the ears by the small tubes which are
connected with the collecting bell.
The Vitascope.—- Numerous instruments have been devised to determine the rate of
vibration of different materials and structures, the most important being the vitascope,
which has a revolvable cylinder, blackened with soot, and this being rotated at a certain
speed, the stylus, which is attached to the vibrating body, in contact with the cylinder,
will show the number per second, as well as the particular character of each oscillation.
The Phonautograph.—This instrument is used to register the vibration of wind
instruments, as well as the human voice, and the particular forms of the vibrations are
traced on a cylinder, the tracing stylus being attached to a thin vibrating membrane which
is affected by the voice or instrument.
The Phonograph.—This instrument is the outgrowth of the stylus forms of the apparatus
p. 91
described, but in this case the stylus, or needle, is fixed to a metallic diaphragm, and its
point makes an impression on suitable material placed on the outside of a revolvable
cylinder or disc.
Light.-Light is the agent which excites the sensation of vision in the eye. Various theories
have been advanced by scientists to account for the phenomenon, and the two most noted
views are the corpuscular, promulgated by Sir Isaac Newton, and the undulatory,
enunciated by Huygens and Euler.
The corpuscular theory conceives that light is a substance of exceedingly light particles
which are shot forth with immense velocity. The undulatory theory, now generally
accepted, maintains that light is carried by vibrations in ether. Ether is a subtle elastic
medium which fills all space.
Luminous bodies are those like the sun, which emit light. Rays may diverge, that is,
spread out; converge, or point toward each other; or they may be parallel with each other.
Velocity of Light.—Light moves at the rate of about 186,000 miles a second. As the sun
is about 94,000,000 miles from the earth, it takes 8 1/2 minutes for the light of the sun to
Page 86
reach us.
Reflection.—One of the most important things connected with light is that of reflection.
p. 92
It is that quality which is utilized in telescopes, microscopes, mirrors, heliograph
signaling and other like apparatus and uses. The underlying principle is, that a ray is
reflected, or thrown back from a mirror at the same angle as that which produces the
light.
When the rays of the sun, which are, of course, parallel, strike a concave mirror, the
reflecting rays are converged; and when the rays strike a convex mirror they diverge. In
this way the principle is employed in reflecting telescopes.
Refraction.—This is the peculiar action of light in passing through substances. If a ray
passes through water at an angle to the surface the ray will bend downwardly in passing
through, and then again pass on in a straight line. This will be noticed if a pencil is stood
in a glass of water at an angle, when it will appear bent.
Refraction is that which enables light to be divided up, or analyzed. In this way white
light from the sun is shown to be composed of seven principal colors.
Colors.—If the light is passed through a prism, which is a triangularly shaped piece of
glass, the rays on emerging will diverge from each other, and when they fall on a wall or
screen the colors red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo and violet are shown
p. 93
The reason for this is that the ray in passing through the prism has the different colors in
it refract at different angles, the violet bending more than the red.
The Spectroscope.—The ability to make what is thus called a spectrum, brought forth
one of the most wonderful instruments ever devised by man. If any metal, or material, is
fused, or put in such a condition that a ray of light can be obtained from it, and this light
is passed through a prism, it will be found that each substance has its own peculiar
divisions and arrangements of colors.
In this way substances are determined by what is called spectrum analysis, and it is by
means of this instrument that the composition of the sun, and the planets and fixed stars
are determined.
The Rainbow.—The rainbow is one of the effects of refraction, as the light, striking the
little globular particles of water suspended in the air, produces a breaking up of the white
light into its component colors, and the sky serves as a background for viewing the
analysis thus made.
Heat.—It is now conclusively proven, that heat, like light, magnetism and electricity, is
merely a mode of motion.
The mechanical theory of heat may be shown by rubbing together several bodies. Heat
expands all substances, except ice, and in expanding develops an enormous force. p. 94
Reflection.—One of the most important things connected with light is that of reflection.
p. 92
It is that quality which is utilized in telescopes, microscopes, mirrors, heliograph
signaling and other like apparatus and uses. The underlying principle is, that a ray is
reflected, or thrown back from a mirror at the same angle as that which produces the
light.
When the rays of the sun, which are, of course, parallel, strike a concave mirror, the
reflecting rays are converged; and when the rays strike a convex mirror they diverge. In
this way the principle is employed in reflecting telescopes.
Refraction.—This is the peculiar action of light in passing through substances. If a ray
passes through water at an angle to the surface the ray will bend downwardly in passing
through, and then again pass on in a straight line. This will be noticed if a pencil is stood
in a glass of water at an angle, when it will appear bent.
Refraction is that which enables light to be divided up, or analyzed. In this way white
light from the sun is shown to be composed of seven principal colors.
Colors.—If the light is passed through a prism, which is a triangularly shaped piece of
glass, the rays on emerging will diverge from each other, and when they fall on a wall or
screen the colors red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo and violet are shown
p. 93
The reason for this is that the ray in passing through the prism has the different colors in
it refract at different angles, the violet bending more than the red.
The Spectroscope.—The ability to make what is thus called a spectrum, brought forth
one of the most wonderful instruments ever devised by man. If any metal, or material, is
fused, or put in such a condition that a ray of light can be obtained from it, and this light
is passed through a prism, it will be found that each substance has its own peculiar
divisions and arrangements of colors.
In this way substances are determined by what is called spectrum analysis, and it is by
means of this instrument that the composition of the sun, and the planets and fixed stars
are determined.
The Rainbow.—The rainbow is one of the effects of refraction, as the light, striking the
little globular particles of water suspended in the air, produces a breaking up of the white
light into its component colors, and the sky serves as a background for viewing the
analysis thus made.
Heat.—It is now conclusively proven, that heat, like light, magnetism and electricity, is
merely a mode of motion.
The mechanical theory of heat may be shown by rubbing together several bodies. Heat
expands all substances, except ice, and in expanding develops an enormous force. p. 94
Page 87
Expansion.—In like manner liquids expand with heat. The power of mercury in
expanding may be understood when it is stated that a pressure of 10,000 pounds would
be required to prevent the expansion of mercury, when heated simply 10 degrees.
Gases also expand. While water, and the different solids, all have their particular units of
expansion, it is not so with gases, as all have the same coefficient
expanding may be understood when it is stated that a pressure of 10,000 pounds would
be required to prevent the expansion of mercury, when heated simply 10 degrees.
Gases also expand. While water, and the different solids, all have their particular units of
expansion, it is not so with gases, as all have the same coefficient
Page 88
Page 89
p. 95
Page 90
CHAPTER VIIIToC
HOW DRAUGHTING BECOMES A VALUABLE AID
The ability to read drawings is a necessary part of the boy's education. To know how to
use the tools, is still more important. In conveying an idea about a piece of mechanism, a
sketch is given. Now, the sketch may be readable in itself, requiring no explanation, or it
may be of such a nature that it will necessitate some written description.
Fig. 95. Plain CircleToList
Lines in Drawing.—- In drawing, lines have a definite meaning. A plain circular line, like
Fig. 95, when drawn in that way, conveys three meanings: It may represent a rim, or a
bent piece of wire; it may illustrate a disk; or, it may convey the idea of a ball.
Suppose we develop them to express the three forms accurately. Fig. 96, by merely
p. 96
adding an interior line, shows that it is a rim. There can be no further doubt about that
expression.
Fig. 97 shows a single line, but it will now be noticed that the line is thickened at the
lower right-hand side, and from this you can readily infer that it is a disk.
Shading.—Fig. 98, by having a few shaded lines on the right and lower side, makes it
have the appearance of a globe or a convex surface.
Figs. 96-98.
Ring - Raised Surface - SphereToList
Shading or thickening the lines also gives another expression to the same circular line.
HOW DRAUGHTING BECOMES A VALUABLE AID
The ability to read drawings is a necessary part of the boy's education. To know how to
use the tools, is still more important. In conveying an idea about a piece of mechanism, a
sketch is given. Now, the sketch may be readable in itself, requiring no explanation, or it
may be of such a nature that it will necessitate some written description.
Fig. 95. Plain CircleToList
Lines in Drawing.—- In drawing, lines have a definite meaning. A plain circular line, like
Fig. 95, when drawn in that way, conveys three meanings: It may represent a rim, or a
bent piece of wire; it may illustrate a disk; or, it may convey the idea of a ball.
Suppose we develop them to express the three forms accurately. Fig. 96, by merely
p. 96
adding an interior line, shows that it is a rim. There can be no further doubt about that
expression.
Fig. 97 shows a single line, but it will now be noticed that the line is thickened at the
lower right-hand side, and from this you can readily infer that it is a disk.
Shading.—Fig. 98, by having a few shaded lines on the right and lower side, makes it
have the appearance of a globe or a convex surface.
Figs. 96-98.
Ring - Raised Surface - SphereToList
Shading or thickening the lines also gives another expression to the same circular line.
Page 91
In Fig. 99, if the upper and left-hand side of the circle is heavily shaded, it shows that the
area within the circle is depressed, instead of being raised.
Direction of Shade.—On the other hand, if the shading lines, as in Fig. 100, are at the
upper left-hand side, then the mind at once grasps the idea of a concave surface.
p. 97
The first thing, therefore, to keep in mind, is this fact: That in all mechanical drawing, the
light is supposed to shine down from the upper left-hand corner and that, as a result, the
lower vertical line, as well as the extreme right-hand vertical line, casts the shadows, and
should, therefore, be made heavier than the upper horizontal, and the left-hand vertical
lines.
Figs. 99-100.
Depressed Surface - Concave ToList
There are exceptions to this rule, which will be readily understood by following out the
illustrations in the order given below.
Perspectives.—The utility of the heavy lines will be more apparent when drawing square,
rectangular, or triangular objects.
Let us take Fig. 101, which appears to be the perspective of a cube. Notice that all lines
are of the same thickness. When the sketch was first brought to me I thought it was a
p. 98
cube; but the explanation which followed, showed that the man who made the sketch had
an entirely different meaning.
He had intended to convey to my mind the idea of three pieces, A, B, C, of metal, of
equal size, joined together so as to form a triangularly shaped pocket as shown in Fig.
101. The addition of the inner lines, like D, quickly dispelled the suggestion of the cube.
area within the circle is depressed, instead of being raised.
Direction of Shade.—On the other hand, if the shading lines, as in Fig. 100, are at the
upper left-hand side, then the mind at once grasps the idea of a concave surface.
p. 97
The first thing, therefore, to keep in mind, is this fact: That in all mechanical drawing, the
light is supposed to shine down from the upper left-hand corner and that, as a result, the
lower vertical line, as well as the extreme right-hand vertical line, casts the shadows, and
should, therefore, be made heavier than the upper horizontal, and the left-hand vertical
lines.
Figs. 99-100.
Depressed Surface - Concave ToList
There are exceptions to this rule, which will be readily understood by following out the
illustrations in the order given below.
Perspectives.—The utility of the heavy lines will be more apparent when drawing square,
rectangular, or triangular objects.
Let us take Fig. 101, which appears to be the perspective of a cube. Notice that all lines
are of the same thickness. When the sketch was first brought to me I thought it was a
p. 98
cube; but the explanation which followed, showed that the man who made the sketch had
an entirely different meaning.
He had intended to convey to my mind the idea of three pieces, A, B, C, of metal, of
equal size, joined together so as to form a triangularly shaped pocket as shown in Fig.
101. The addition of the inner lines, like D, quickly dispelled the suggestion of the cube.
Page 92
Figs. 101-104. Forms of Cubical
OutlinesToList
"But," he remarked, "I want to use the thinnest metal, like sheets of tin; and you show
them thick by adding the inner lines."
p. 99
Such being the case, if we did not want to show thickness as its structural form, we had
to do it by making the lines themselves and the shading give that structural idea. This was
done by using the single lines, as in Fig. 103, and by a slight shading of the pieces A, B,
C.
Fig. 105. Fig. 106.
Shading Edges ToList
The Most Pronounced Lines.—If it had been a cube, or a solid block, the corners nearest
the eye would have been most pronounced, as in Fig. 104, and the side next to the
observer would have been darkest.
This question of light and shadow is what expresses the surface formation of every
drawing. Simple strokes form outlines of the object, but their thickness, and the shading,
p. 100
show the character enclosed by the lines. Direction of Light.—Now, as stated, the
casting of the shadow downward from the upper left-hand corner makes the last line over
which it passes the thickest, and in Figs. 105 and 106 they are not the extreme lines at the
bottom and at the right side, because of the close parallel lines.
OutlinesToList
"But," he remarked, "I want to use the thinnest metal, like sheets of tin; and you show
them thick by adding the inner lines."
p. 99
Such being the case, if we did not want to show thickness as its structural form, we had
to do it by making the lines themselves and the shading give that structural idea. This was
done by using the single lines, as in Fig. 103, and by a slight shading of the pieces A, B,
C.
Fig. 105. Fig. 106.
Shading Edges ToList
The Most Pronounced Lines.—If it had been a cube, or a solid block, the corners nearest
the eye would have been most pronounced, as in Fig. 104, and the side next to the
observer would have been darkest.
This question of light and shadow is what expresses the surface formation of every
drawing. Simple strokes form outlines of the object, but their thickness, and the shading,
p. 100
show the character enclosed by the lines. Direction of Light.—Now, as stated, the
casting of the shadow downward from the upper left-hand corner makes the last line over
which it passes the thickest, and in Figs. 105 and 106 they are not the extreme lines at the
bottom and at the right side, because of the close parallel lines.
Page 93
In Figs. 109 and 110 the blades superposed on the other are very thin, and the result is the
lines at the right side and bottom are made much heavier.
Fig. 107. Fig. 108.
Illustrating Heavy Lines ToList
This is more fully shown in Figs. 107 and 108. Notice the marked difference between the
two figures, both of which show the same set of pulleys, and the last figure, by merely
having the lower and the right-hand lines of each pulley heavy, changes the character of
the representation, and tells much more clearly what the draughtsman sought to convey.
p. 101
Scale Drawings.—All drawings are made to a scale where the article is large and cannot
be indicated the exact size, using parts of an inch to represent inches; and parts of a foot
to represent feet.
In order to reduce a drawing where a foot is the unit, it is always best to use one-and-a-
half inches, or twelve-eighths of an inch, as the basis. In this way each eighth of an inch
represents an inch. If the drawing should be made larger, then use three inches, and in
that way each inch would be one-quarter of an inch.
Fig. 109. Fig. 110.
Illustrating Heavy Lines ToList
The drawing should then have marked, in some conspicuous place, the scale, like the
following: "Scale, 1 1/2" = 1'"; or, "Scale 3" = 1'."
p. 102
Degree, and What it Means.—A degree is not a measurement. The word is used to
designate an interval, a position, or an angle. Every circle has 360 degrees, and when a
certain degree is mentioned, it means a certain angle from what is called a base line.
lines at the right side and bottom are made much heavier.
Fig. 107. Fig. 108.
Illustrating Heavy Lines ToList
This is more fully shown in Figs. 107 and 108. Notice the marked difference between the
two figures, both of which show the same set of pulleys, and the last figure, by merely
having the lower and the right-hand lines of each pulley heavy, changes the character of
the representation, and tells much more clearly what the draughtsman sought to convey.
p. 101
Scale Drawings.—All drawings are made to a scale where the article is large and cannot
be indicated the exact size, using parts of an inch to represent inches; and parts of a foot
to represent feet.
In order to reduce a drawing where a foot is the unit, it is always best to use one-and-a-
half inches, or twelve-eighths of an inch, as the basis. In this way each eighth of an inch
represents an inch. If the drawing should be made larger, then use three inches, and in
that way each inch would be one-quarter of an inch.
Fig. 109. Fig. 110.
Illustrating Heavy Lines ToList
The drawing should then have marked, in some conspicuous place, the scale, like the
following: "Scale, 1 1/2" = 1'"; or, "Scale 3" = 1'."
p. 102
Degree, and What it Means.—A degree is not a measurement. The word is used to
designate an interval, a position, or an angle. Every circle has 360 degrees, and when a
certain degree is mentioned, it means a certain angle from what is called a base line.
Page 94
Fig. 111. Illustrating Degrees ToList
Look at Fig. 111. This has a vertical line A, and a horizontal line B. The circle is thus
divided into four parts, and where these lines A, B, cross the circle are the cardinal points.
Each of the four parts is called a quadrant, and each quadrant has 90 degrees.
Any line, like C, which is halfway between A and B, is 45 degrees. Halfway between A
p. 103
and C, or between B and C, like the line D, is 22 1/2 degrees.
Memorizing Angles.—It is well to try and remember these lines by fixing the angles in
the memory. A good plan is to divide any of the quadrants into thirds, as shown by the
points E, F, and then remember that E is 30 degrees from the horizontal line B, and that F
is 60 degrees. Or, you might say that F is 30 degrees from the vertical line A, and E 60
degrees from A. Either would be correct.
Fig. 112. Section Lining ToList
Section Lining.—In representing many parts of a machine, or article, it is necessary to
show the parts cut off, which must be illustrated by what is called "section lining."
p. 104
Adjacent parts should have the section lines running at right angles to each other, and
always at 45 degrees.
Look at the outside and then the inside views of Fig. 112, and you will see how the
contiguous parts have the angles at right angles, and clearly illustrate how every part of
the wrench is made. Skill in depicting an article, for the purpose of constructing it from
the drawing, will make the actual work on the bench and lathe an easy one.
Look at Fig. 111. This has a vertical line A, and a horizontal line B. The circle is thus
divided into four parts, and where these lines A, B, cross the circle are the cardinal points.
Each of the four parts is called a quadrant, and each quadrant has 90 degrees.
Any line, like C, which is halfway between A and B, is 45 degrees. Halfway between A
p. 103
and C, or between B and C, like the line D, is 22 1/2 degrees.
Memorizing Angles.—It is well to try and remember these lines by fixing the angles in
the memory. A good plan is to divide any of the quadrants into thirds, as shown by the
points E, F, and then remember that E is 30 degrees from the horizontal line B, and that F
is 60 degrees. Or, you might say that F is 30 degrees from the vertical line A, and E 60
degrees from A. Either would be correct.
Fig. 112. Section Lining ToList
Section Lining.—In representing many parts of a machine, or article, it is necessary to
show the parts cut off, which must be illustrated by what is called "section lining."
p. 104
Adjacent parts should have the section lines running at right angles to each other, and
always at 45 degrees.
Look at the outside and then the inside views of Fig. 112, and you will see how the
contiguous parts have the angles at right angles, and clearly illustrate how every part of
the wrench is made. Skill in depicting an article, for the purpose of constructing it from
the drawing, will make the actual work on the bench and lathe an easy one.
Page 95
Fig. 113. Drawing an Ellipse ToList
Making Ellipses and Irregular Curves.—This is the hardest thing to do with drawing
p. 105
tools. A properly constructed elliptical figure is difficult, principally, because two
different sized curves are required, and the pen runs from one curve into the other. If the
two curves meet at the wrong place, you may be sure you will have a distorted ellipse.
Follow the directions given in connection with Fig. 113, and it will give you a good idea
of merging the two lines.
First. Draw a horizontal line, A, which is in the direction of the major axis of the ellipse
—that is, the longest distance across. The narrow part of the ellipse is called the minor
axis.
Second. Draw a perpendicular line, B, which we will call the center of the ellipse, where
it crosses the line A. This point must not be confounded with the focus. In a circle the
focus is the exact center of the ring, but there is no such thing in an ellipse. Instead, there
are two focal points, called the foci, as you will see presently.
Third. Step off two points or marking places, as we shall term them, equidistant from the
line B, and marked C, C. These marks will then represent the diameter of the ellipse
across its major axis.
Fourth. We must now get the diameter of the minor axis, along the line B. This distance
will depend on the perspective you have of the figure. If you look at a disk at an angle of
about 30 degrees it will be half of the distance across the major axis
p. 106
So you may understand this examine Fig. 114. The first sketch shows the eye looking
directly at the disk 1. In the second sketch the disk is at 30 degrees, and now the lines 2 2,
from the eye, indicate that it is just half the width that it was when the lines 3 3 were
projected. The marks D D, therefore, indicate the distance across the minor axis in Fig.
113.
Making Ellipses and Irregular Curves.—This is the hardest thing to do with drawing
p. 105
tools. A properly constructed elliptical figure is difficult, principally, because two
different sized curves are required, and the pen runs from one curve into the other. If the
two curves meet at the wrong place, you may be sure you will have a distorted ellipse.
Follow the directions given in connection with Fig. 113, and it will give you a good idea
of merging the two lines.
First. Draw a horizontal line, A, which is in the direction of the major axis of the ellipse
—that is, the longest distance across. The narrow part of the ellipse is called the minor
axis.
Second. Draw a perpendicular line, B, which we will call the center of the ellipse, where
it crosses the line A. This point must not be confounded with the focus. In a circle the
focus is the exact center of the ring, but there is no such thing in an ellipse. Instead, there
are two focal points, called the foci, as you will see presently.
Third. Step off two points or marking places, as we shall term them, equidistant from the
line B, and marked C, C. These marks will then represent the diameter of the ellipse
across its major axis.
Fourth. We must now get the diameter of the minor axis, along the line B. This distance
will depend on the perspective you have of the figure. If you look at a disk at an angle of
about 30 degrees it will be half of the distance across the major axis
p. 106
So you may understand this examine Fig. 114. The first sketch shows the eye looking
directly at the disk 1. In the second sketch the disk is at 30 degrees, and now the lines 2 2,
from the eye, indicate that it is just half the width that it was when the lines 3 3 were
projected. The marks D D, therefore, indicate the distance across the minor axis in Fig.
113.
Page 96
Fig. 114. Perspection in Angles ToList
Fifth. We must now find the focal points of the ellipse. If the line A on each side of the
cross line B is divided into four parts, the outer marks E may be used for the foci, and
will be the places where the point of the compass, or bow pen, is to be placed.
Sixth. Describe a circle F, so it passes through the mark C, and move the point of the
compass to the center of the ellipse, at the star, and describe a circle line G, from the
mark C to the line B. This will give a centering point H. Then draw a line I from H to E,
and extend it through the circle F.
Seventh. If the point of the compass is now put at H, and the pencil or pen on thep.circle
107
line F, the curve J can be drawn, so the latter curve and the curve F will thus merge
perfectly at the line I.
The Focal Points.—The focal points can be selected at any arbitrary point, between C
and the line B, and the point H may be moved closer to or farther away from the line A,
and you will succeed in making the ellipse correct, if you observe one thing, namely: The
line I, which must always run from H to E, and intersects the circle F, is the starting or
the ending point for the small curve F or the large circle J.
Figs. 115-117. Perspectives of Cubes ToList
Isometric and Perspective.—A figure may be drawn so as to show an isometric or a
perspective view. Thus, a cube can be drawn so as to make an isometric figure, as in Fig.
115, where the three sides are equal to each other.
Isometric means a method of drawing any object in such a manner that the height, length
p. 108
and breadth may be shown in the proportion they really bear to each other. Fig. 115 has
the sides not only equal to each other, in appearance to the eye, but they have the same
outlines and angles.
Contrast this figure with Figs. 116 and 117. In Fig. 116 two of the sides are equal in
angles and outline; and in Fig. 117 each side has a different outline, and different angles.
Nevertheless, all the cubes are, in reality, of the same dimension.
Fifth. We must now find the focal points of the ellipse. If the line A on each side of the
cross line B is divided into four parts, the outer marks E may be used for the foci, and
will be the places where the point of the compass, or bow pen, is to be placed.
Sixth. Describe a circle F, so it passes through the mark C, and move the point of the
compass to the center of the ellipse, at the star, and describe a circle line G, from the
mark C to the line B. This will give a centering point H. Then draw a line I from H to E,
and extend it through the circle F.
Seventh. If the point of the compass is now put at H, and the pencil or pen on thep.circle
107
line F, the curve J can be drawn, so the latter curve and the curve F will thus merge
perfectly at the line I.
The Focal Points.—The focal points can be selected at any arbitrary point, between C
and the line B, and the point H may be moved closer to or farther away from the line A,
and you will succeed in making the ellipse correct, if you observe one thing, namely: The
line I, which must always run from H to E, and intersects the circle F, is the starting or
the ending point for the small curve F or the large circle J.
Figs. 115-117. Perspectives of Cubes ToList
Isometric and Perspective.—A figure may be drawn so as to show an isometric or a
perspective view. Thus, a cube can be drawn so as to make an isometric figure, as in Fig.
115, where the three sides are equal to each other.
Isometric means a method of drawing any object in such a manner that the height, length
p. 108
and breadth may be shown in the proportion they really bear to each other. Fig. 115 has
the sides not only equal to each other, in appearance to the eye, but they have the same
outlines and angles.
Contrast this figure with Figs. 116 and 117. In Fig. 116 two of the sides are equal in
angles and outline; and in Fig. 117 each side has a different outline, and different angles.
Nevertheless, all the cubes are, in reality, of the same dimension.
Page 97
The Protractor.—This is a most useful tool for the draughtsman. It enables the user to
readily find any angle. Fig. 118 shows an approved form of the tool for this purpose.
Fig. 118. Protractor.
Section Lining Metals ToList
p. 109
Suggestions in Drawing.—As in the use of all other tools, so with the drawing
instrument, it must be kept in proper order. If the points are too fine they will cut the
paper; if too blunt the lines will be ragged. In whetting the points hold the pen at an angle
of 12 degrees. Don't make too long an angle or slope, and every time you sharpen hold it
at the same angle, so that it is ground back, and not at the point only.
Fig. 119. Using the Protractor. ToList
Holding the Pen.—The drawing pen should be held as nearly vertical as possible. Use
the cleaning rag frequently. If the ink does not flow freely, after you have made a few
strokes, as is frequently the case, gently press together the points. The least grit between
the tines will cause an irregular flow
p. 110
Inks.—As prepared liquid inks are now universally used, a few suggestions might be well
concerning them. After half the bottle has been used, add a half teaspoonful of water,
shake it well, and then strain it through a fine cotton cloth. This will remove all grit and
lint that is sure to get into the bottle however carefully it may be corked.
readily find any angle. Fig. 118 shows an approved form of the tool for this purpose.
Fig. 118. Protractor.
Section Lining Metals ToList
p. 109
Suggestions in Drawing.—As in the use of all other tools, so with the drawing
instrument, it must be kept in proper order. If the points are too fine they will cut the
paper; if too blunt the lines will be ragged. In whetting the points hold the pen at an angle
of 12 degrees. Don't make too long an angle or slope, and every time you sharpen hold it
at the same angle, so that it is ground back, and not at the point only.
Fig. 119. Using the Protractor. ToList
Holding the Pen.—The drawing pen should be held as nearly vertical as possible. Use
the cleaning rag frequently. If the ink does not flow freely, after you have made a few
strokes, as is frequently the case, gently press together the points. The least grit between
the tines will cause an irregular flow
p. 110
Inks.—As prepared liquid inks are now universally used, a few suggestions might be well
concerning them. After half the bottle has been used, add a half teaspoonful of water,
shake it well, and then strain it through a fine cotton cloth. This will remove all grit and
lint that is sure to get into the bottle however carefully it may be corked.
Page 98
Fig. 120. Section Lining Metals ToList
Tracing Cloth.—It is preferable to use the dull side of the tracing cloth for the reasons
that, as the cloth is rolled with the glossy side inside, the figure when drawn on the other
side will be uppermost, and will thus lie flat; and on the other hand, the ink will take
better on the dull side.
If the ink does not flow freely, use chalk, fine pumice stone, or talc, and rub it in well
with a clean cloth, and then wipe off well before beginning to trace
p. 111
Detail Paper.—The detail paper, on which the drawing is first made in pencil, should
show the figure accurately, particularly the points where the bow pen are to be used, as
well as the measurement points for the straight lines.
How to Proceed.—Make the circles, curves, and irregular lines first, and then follow
with the straight lines. Where the point of the circle pen must be used for a large number
of lines, as, for instance, in shading, the smallest circles should be made first, and the
largest circles last, because at every turn the centering hole becomes larger, and there is
liability to make the circles more or less irregular. Such irregularity will not be so
noticeable in the large curves as in the smaller ones.
Indicating Material by the Section Lines.—In section lining different materials can be
indicated by the character of the lines, shown in Fig. 120.
Tracing Cloth.—It is preferable to use the dull side of the tracing cloth for the reasons
that, as the cloth is rolled with the glossy side inside, the figure when drawn on the other
side will be uppermost, and will thus lie flat; and on the other hand, the ink will take
better on the dull side.
If the ink does not flow freely, use chalk, fine pumice stone, or talc, and rub it in well
with a clean cloth, and then wipe off well before beginning to trace
p. 111
Detail Paper.—The detail paper, on which the drawing is first made in pencil, should
show the figure accurately, particularly the points where the bow pen are to be used, as
well as the measurement points for the straight lines.
How to Proceed.—Make the circles, curves, and irregular lines first, and then follow
with the straight lines. Where the point of the circle pen must be used for a large number
of lines, as, for instance, in shading, the smallest circles should be made first, and the
largest circles last, because at every turn the centering hole becomes larger, and there is
liability to make the circles more or less irregular. Such irregularity will not be so
noticeable in the large curves as in the smaller ones.
Indicating Material by the Section Lines.—In section lining different materials can be
indicated by the character of the lines, shown in Fig. 120.
Page 99
Page 100
p. 112
Page 101
CHAPTER IXToC
TREATMENT AND USE OF METALS
Annealing.—A very important part of the novice's education is a knowledge pertaining
to the annealing of metals. Unlike the artisan in wood, who works the materials as he
finds them, the machinist can, and, in fact, with many of the substances, must prepare
them so they can be handled or cut by the tools.
Annealing is one of the steps necessary with all cutting tools, and it is an absolute
requirement with many metals for ordinary use, as well as for many other articles like
glass. This is particularly true in the use of copper.
Toughness and Elasticity.—It means the putting of metals in such a condition that they
will not only be less brittle, but also tougher and more elastic. Many substances, like
glass, must be annealed before they can be put in condition for use, as this material when
first turned out is so brittle that the slightest touch will shatter it, so that it must be
toughened.
Malleable or wrought iron, if subjected to pressure, becomes brittle, and it is necessary to
p. 113
anneal it. Otherwise, if used, for instance, for boiler plates, from the rolled sheets, it
would stand but little pressure.
The most immediate use the boy will have is the treatment of steel. He must learn the
necessity of this process, and that of tempering, in all his cutting tools, and in the making
of machinery where some parts are required to be constructed of very hard metal.
The Process.—To anneal steel it must be heated to a bright cherry red and then gradually
cooled down. For this purpose a bed of fine charcoal, or iron filings and lime, is prepared,
in which the article is embedded, and permitted to remain until it is cold.
There are many ways of doing the work, particularly in the use of substances which will
the most readily give up their carbon to the tool. Yellow prussiate of potash is an
excellent medium, and this is sprinkled over the cherry-heated article to be annealed. The
process may be repeated several times.
Tempering.—This is the reverse of annealing as understood in the art. The word itself
does not mean to "harden," but to put into some intermediate state. For instance,
"tempered clay" means a clay which has been softened so it can be readily worked.
On the other hand, a tempered steel tool is put into a condition where it is hardened, but
p. 114
this hardness is also accompanied by another quality, namely, toughness. For this reason,
TREATMENT AND USE OF METALS
Annealing.—A very important part of the novice's education is a knowledge pertaining
to the annealing of metals. Unlike the artisan in wood, who works the materials as he
finds them, the machinist can, and, in fact, with many of the substances, must prepare
them so they can be handled or cut by the tools.
Annealing is one of the steps necessary with all cutting tools, and it is an absolute
requirement with many metals for ordinary use, as well as for many other articles like
glass. This is particularly true in the use of copper.
Toughness and Elasticity.—It means the putting of metals in such a condition that they
will not only be less brittle, but also tougher and more elastic. Many substances, like
glass, must be annealed before they can be put in condition for use, as this material when
first turned out is so brittle that the slightest touch will shatter it, so that it must be
toughened.
Malleable or wrought iron, if subjected to pressure, becomes brittle, and it is necessary to
p. 113
anneal it. Otherwise, if used, for instance, for boiler plates, from the rolled sheets, it
would stand but little pressure.
The most immediate use the boy will have is the treatment of steel. He must learn the
necessity of this process, and that of tempering, in all his cutting tools, and in the making
of machinery where some parts are required to be constructed of very hard metal.
The Process.—To anneal steel it must be heated to a bright cherry red and then gradually
cooled down. For this purpose a bed of fine charcoal, or iron filings and lime, is prepared,
in which the article is embedded, and permitted to remain until it is cold.
There are many ways of doing the work, particularly in the use of substances which will
the most readily give up their carbon to the tool. Yellow prussiate of potash is an
excellent medium, and this is sprinkled over the cherry-heated article to be annealed. The
process may be repeated several times.
Tempering.—This is the reverse of annealing as understood in the art. The word itself
does not mean to "harden," but to put into some intermediate state. For instance,
"tempered clay" means a clay which has been softened so it can be readily worked.
On the other hand, a tempered steel tool is put into a condition where it is hardened, but
p. 114
this hardness is also accompanied by another quality, namely, toughness. For this reason,
Page 102
the word temper, and not hardness, is referred to. A lathe tool, if merely hardened, would
be useless for that purpose.
Tempering Contrasted with Annealing.—It will be observed that in annealing three
things are necessary: First, heating to a certain temperature; second, cooling slowly;
third, the particular manner of cooling it.
In tempering, on the other hand, three things are also necessary:
First: The heating temperature should be a dull red, which is less than the annealing heat.
Second: Instead of cooling slowly the article tempered is dipped into a liquid which
suddenly chills it.
Third: The materials used vary, but if the article is plunged into an unguent made of
mercury and bacon fat, it will impart a high degree of toughness and elasticity.
Materials Used.—Various oils, fats and rosins are also used, and some acids in water are
also valuable for this purpose. Care should be taken to have sufficient amount of liquid in
the bath so as not to evaporate it or heat it up too much when it receives the heated body.
Different parts of certain articles require varying degrees of hardness, like the tangs of
p. 115
files. The cutting body of the file must be extremely hard, and rather brittle than tough. If
the tang should be of the same hardness it would readily break.
Gradual Tempering.—To prevent this, some substance like soap suds may be used to
cool down the tang, so that toughness without hardness is imparted.
The tempering, or hardening, like the annealing process, may be repeated several times in
succession, and at each successive heating the article is put at a higher temperature.
If any part of a body, as, for instance, a hammerhead, should require hardening, it may be
plunged into the liquid for a short distance only, and this will harden the pole or peon
while leaving the other part of the head soft, or annealed.
Glycerine is a good tempering substance, and to this may be added a small amount of
sulphate of potash.
Fluxing.—The word flux means to fuse or to melt, or to put into a liquid state. The office
of a flux is to facilitate the fusion of metals. But fluxes do two things. They not only aid
the conversion of the metal into a fluid state, but also serve as a means for facilitating the
unity of several metals which make up the alloy, and aid in uniting the parts of metals to
be joined in the welding of parts
p. 116
Uniting Metals.—Metals are united in three ways, where heat is used:
First: By heating two or more of them to such a high temperature that they melt and form
a compound, or an alloy, as it is called.
be useless for that purpose.
Tempering Contrasted with Annealing.—It will be observed that in annealing three
things are necessary: First, heating to a certain temperature; second, cooling slowly;
third, the particular manner of cooling it.
In tempering, on the other hand, three things are also necessary:
First: The heating temperature should be a dull red, which is less than the annealing heat.
Second: Instead of cooling slowly the article tempered is dipped into a liquid which
suddenly chills it.
Third: The materials used vary, but if the article is plunged into an unguent made of
mercury and bacon fat, it will impart a high degree of toughness and elasticity.
Materials Used.—Various oils, fats and rosins are also used, and some acids in water are
also valuable for this purpose. Care should be taken to have sufficient amount of liquid in
the bath so as not to evaporate it or heat it up too much when it receives the heated body.
Different parts of certain articles require varying degrees of hardness, like the tangs of
p. 115
files. The cutting body of the file must be extremely hard, and rather brittle than tough. If
the tang should be of the same hardness it would readily break.
Gradual Tempering.—To prevent this, some substance like soap suds may be used to
cool down the tang, so that toughness without hardness is imparted.
The tempering, or hardening, like the annealing process, may be repeated several times in
succession, and at each successive heating the article is put at a higher temperature.
If any part of a body, as, for instance, a hammerhead, should require hardening, it may be
plunged into the liquid for a short distance only, and this will harden the pole or peon
while leaving the other part of the head soft, or annealed.
Glycerine is a good tempering substance, and to this may be added a small amount of
sulphate of potash.
Fluxing.—The word flux means to fuse or to melt, or to put into a liquid state. The office
of a flux is to facilitate the fusion of metals. But fluxes do two things. They not only aid
the conversion of the metal into a fluid state, but also serve as a means for facilitating the
unity of several metals which make up the alloy, and aid in uniting the parts of metals to
be joined in the welding of parts
p. 116
Uniting Metals.—Metals are united in three ways, where heat is used:
First: By heating two or more of them to such a high temperature that they melt and form
a compound, or an alloy, as it is called.
Page 103
Second: By heating up the points to be joined, and then lapping the pieces and
hammering the parts. This is called forge work or welding.
Third: By not heating the adjacent parts and using an easily fusible metal, which is heated
up and run between the two, by means of a soldering iron.
The foreign material used in the first is called a flux; in the second it is termed a welding
compound; and in the third it is known as a soldering acid, or soldering fluid.
The boy is not so much interested in the first process, from the standpoint of actual work,
but it is necessary that he should have some understanding of it.
It may be said, as to fluxes, generally, that they are intended to promote the fusion of the
liquefying metals, and the elements used are the alkalis, such as borax, tartar, limestone,
or fluor spar.
These substances act as reducing or oxidizing agents. The most important are carbonate
of soda, potash, and cyanide of potassium. Limestone is used as the flux in iron-smelting
p. 117
Welding Compounds.—Elsewhere formulas are given of the compounds most desirable
to use. It is obvious that the application of these substances on the heated surfaces, is not
only to facilitate the heating, but to prepare the articles in such a manner that they will
more readily adhere to each other.
Oxidation.—Oxidation is the thing to guard against in welding. The moment a piece of
metal, heated to whiteness, is exposed, the air coats it with a film which is called an
oxide. To remove this the welding compound is applied.
The next office of the substance thus applied, is to serve as a medium for keeping the
welding parts in a liquid condition as long as possible, and thus facilitate the unity of the
joined elements.
When the hammer beats the heated metals an additional increment of heat is imparted to
the weld, due to the forcing together of the molecules of the iron, so that these two
agencies, namely, the compound and the mechanical friction, act together to unite the
particles of the metal.
Soldering.—Here another principle is involved, namely, the use of an intermediate
material between two parts which are to be united. The surfaces to be brought together
must be thoroughly cleaned, using such agents as will prevent the formation of oxides.
The parts to be united may be of the same, or of different materials, and it is p.in118this
particular that the workman must be able to make a choice of the solder most available,
and whether hard or soft.
Soft Solder.—A soft solder is usually employed where lead, tin, or alloys of lead, tin
and bismuth are to be soldered. These solders are all fusible at a low temperature, and
they do not, as a result, have great strength.
hammering the parts. This is called forge work or welding.
Third: By not heating the adjacent parts and using an easily fusible metal, which is heated
up and run between the two, by means of a soldering iron.
The foreign material used in the first is called a flux; in the second it is termed a welding
compound; and in the third it is known as a soldering acid, or soldering fluid.
The boy is not so much interested in the first process, from the standpoint of actual work,
but it is necessary that he should have some understanding of it.
It may be said, as to fluxes, generally, that they are intended to promote the fusion of the
liquefying metals, and the elements used are the alkalis, such as borax, tartar, limestone,
or fluor spar.
These substances act as reducing or oxidizing agents. The most important are carbonate
of soda, potash, and cyanide of potassium. Limestone is used as the flux in iron-smelting
p. 117
Welding Compounds.—Elsewhere formulas are given of the compounds most desirable
to use. It is obvious that the application of these substances on the heated surfaces, is not
only to facilitate the heating, but to prepare the articles in such a manner that they will
more readily adhere to each other.
Oxidation.—Oxidation is the thing to guard against in welding. The moment a piece of
metal, heated to whiteness, is exposed, the air coats it with a film which is called an
oxide. To remove this the welding compound is applied.
The next office of the substance thus applied, is to serve as a medium for keeping the
welding parts in a liquid condition as long as possible, and thus facilitate the unity of the
joined elements.
When the hammer beats the heated metals an additional increment of heat is imparted to
the weld, due to the forcing together of the molecules of the iron, so that these two
agencies, namely, the compound and the mechanical friction, act together to unite the
particles of the metal.
Soldering.—Here another principle is involved, namely, the use of an intermediate
material between two parts which are to be united. The surfaces to be brought together
must be thoroughly cleaned, using such agents as will prevent the formation of oxides.
The parts to be united may be of the same, or of different materials, and it is p.in118this
particular that the workman must be able to make a choice of the solder most available,
and whether hard or soft.
Soft Solder.—A soft solder is usually employed where lead, tin, or alloys of lead, tin
and bismuth are to be soldered. These solders are all fusible at a low temperature, and
they do not, as a result, have great strength.
Page 104
Bismuth is a metal which lowers the fusing point of any alloy of which it forms a part,
while lead makes the solder less fusible.
Hard Solder.—These are so distinguished because they require a temperature above the
low red to fuse them. The metals which are alloyed for this purpose are copper, silver,
brass, zinc and tin. Various alloys are thus made which require a high temperature to flux
properly, and these are the ones to use in joining steel to steel, the parts to be united
requiring an intense furnace heat.
Spelter.—The alloy used for this purpose is termed "spelter," and brass, zinc and tin are
its usual components. The hard solders are used for uniting brass, bronze, copper, and
iron.
Whether soft or hard solder is used, it is obvious that it must melt at a lower temperature
than the parts which are to be joined together.
p. 119
There is one peculiarity with respect to alloys: They melt at a lower temperature than
either of the metals forming the alloys.
Soldering Acid.—Before beginning the work of soldering, the parts must be cleaned by
filing or sandpapering, and coated with an acid which neutralizes the oxygen of the air.
This is usually muriatic acid, of which use, say, one quart and into this drop small pieces
of zinc. This will effervesce during the time the acid is dissolving the zinc. When the
boiling motion ceases, the liquid may be strained, or the dark pieces removed.
The next step is to dissolve two ounces of sal ammoniac in a third of a pint of water, and
in another vessel dissolve an ounce of chloride of tin.
Then mix the three solutions, and this can be placed in a bottle, or earthen jar or vessel,
and it will keep indefinitely.
The Soldering Iron.—A large iron is always better than a small one, particularly for the
reason that it will retain its heat better. This should always be kept tinned, which can be
done by heating and plunging it into the soldering solution, and the solder will then
adhere to the iron and cover the point, so that when the actual soldering takes place the
solder will not creep away from the tool.
By a little care and attention to these details, the work of uniting metals will be a
p. 120
pleasure. It is so often the case, however, that the apparatus for doing this work is
neglected in a shop; the acid is allowed to become dirty and full or foreign matter, and
the different parts separated
while lead makes the solder less fusible.
Hard Solder.—These are so distinguished because they require a temperature above the
low red to fuse them. The metals which are alloyed for this purpose are copper, silver,
brass, zinc and tin. Various alloys are thus made which require a high temperature to flux
properly, and these are the ones to use in joining steel to steel, the parts to be united
requiring an intense furnace heat.
Spelter.—The alloy used for this purpose is termed "spelter," and brass, zinc and tin are
its usual components. The hard solders are used for uniting brass, bronze, copper, and
iron.
Whether soft or hard solder is used, it is obvious that it must melt at a lower temperature
than the parts which are to be joined together.
p. 119
There is one peculiarity with respect to alloys: They melt at a lower temperature than
either of the metals forming the alloys.
Soldering Acid.—Before beginning the work of soldering, the parts must be cleaned by
filing or sandpapering, and coated with an acid which neutralizes the oxygen of the air.
This is usually muriatic acid, of which use, say, one quart and into this drop small pieces
of zinc. This will effervesce during the time the acid is dissolving the zinc. When the
boiling motion ceases, the liquid may be strained, or the dark pieces removed.
The next step is to dissolve two ounces of sal ammoniac in a third of a pint of water, and
in another vessel dissolve an ounce of chloride of tin.
Then mix the three solutions, and this can be placed in a bottle, or earthen jar or vessel,
and it will keep indefinitely.
The Soldering Iron.—A large iron is always better than a small one, particularly for the
reason that it will retain its heat better. This should always be kept tinned, which can be
done by heating and plunging it into the soldering solution, and the solder will then
adhere to the iron and cover the point, so that when the actual soldering takes place the
solder will not creep away from the tool.
By a little care and attention to these details, the work of uniting metals will be a
p. 120
pleasure. It is so often the case, however, that the apparatus for doing this work is
neglected in a shop; the acid is allowed to become dirty and full or foreign matter, and
the different parts separated
Page 105
Page 106
p. 121
Page 107
CHAPTER XToC
ON GEARING AND HOW ORDERED
The technical name for gears, the manner of measuring them, their pitch and like terms,
are most confusing to the novice. As an aid to the understanding on this subject, the
wheels are illustrated, showing the application of these terms.
Spur and Pinion.—When a gear is ordered a specification is necessary. The manufacturer
will know what you mean if you use the proper terms, and you should learn the
distinctions between spur and pinion, and why a bevel differs from a miter gear.
If the gears on two parallel shafts mesh with each other, they both may be of the same
diameter, or one may be larger than the other. In the latter case, the small one is the
pinion, and the larger one the spur wheel.
Some manufacturers use the word "gear" for "pinion," so that, in ordering, they call them
gear and pinion, in speaking of the large and small wheels.
Measuring a Gear.—The first thing to specify would be the diameter. Now a spur gear,
as well as a pinion, has three diameters; one measure across the outer extremities p.of
122
the
teeth; one measure across the wheel from the base of the teeth; and the distance across
the wheel at a point midway between the base and end of the teeth.
These three measurements are called, respectively, "outside diameter," "inside diameter,"
and "pitch diameter." When the word diameter is used, as applied to a gear wheel, it is
always understood to mean the "pitch diameter."
Fig. 121. Spur Gears ToList
ON GEARING AND HOW ORDERED
The technical name for gears, the manner of measuring them, their pitch and like terms,
are most confusing to the novice. As an aid to the understanding on this subject, the
wheels are illustrated, showing the application of these terms.
Spur and Pinion.—When a gear is ordered a specification is necessary. The manufacturer
will know what you mean if you use the proper terms, and you should learn the
distinctions between spur and pinion, and why a bevel differs from a miter gear.
If the gears on two parallel shafts mesh with each other, they both may be of the same
diameter, or one may be larger than the other. In the latter case, the small one is the
pinion, and the larger one the spur wheel.
Some manufacturers use the word "gear" for "pinion," so that, in ordering, they call them
gear and pinion, in speaking of the large and small wheels.
Measuring a Gear.—The first thing to specify would be the diameter. Now a spur gear,
as well as a pinion, has three diameters; one measure across the outer extremities p.of
122
the
teeth; one measure across the wheel from the base of the teeth; and the distance across
the wheel at a point midway between the base and end of the teeth.
These three measurements are called, respectively, "outside diameter," "inside diameter,"
and "pitch diameter." When the word diameter is used, as applied to a gear wheel, it is
always understood to mean the "pitch diameter."
Fig. 121. Spur Gears ToList
Page 108
Pitch.—This term is the most difficult to understand. When two gears of equal size mesh
p. 123
together, the pitch line, or the pitch circle, as it is also called, is exactly midway between
the centers of the two wheels.
Fig. 122. Miter Gear Pitch ToList
Now the number of teeth in a gear is calculated on the pitch line, and this is called:
Diametral Pitch.—To illustrate: If a gear has 40 teeth, and the pitch diameter of the
wheel is 4 inches, there are 10 teeth to each inch of the pitch diameter, and the gear is
then 10 diametral pitch.
Circular Pitch.—Now the term "circular pitch" grows out of the necessity of getting the
measurement of the distance from the center of one tooth to the center of the next,p.and
124
it
is measured along the pitch line.
Supposing you wanted to know the number of teeth in a gear where the pitch diameter
and the diametral pitch are given. You would proceed as follows: Let the diameter of the
pitch circle be 10 inches, and the diameter of the diametral pitch be 4 inches. Multiplying
these together the product is 40, thus giving the number of teeth.
Fig. 123. Bevel Gears. ToList
p. 123
together, the pitch line, or the pitch circle, as it is also called, is exactly midway between
the centers of the two wheels.
Fig. 122. Miter Gear Pitch ToList
Now the number of teeth in a gear is calculated on the pitch line, and this is called:
Diametral Pitch.—To illustrate: If a gear has 40 teeth, and the pitch diameter of the
wheel is 4 inches, there are 10 teeth to each inch of the pitch diameter, and the gear is
then 10 diametral pitch.
Circular Pitch.—Now the term "circular pitch" grows out of the necessity of getting the
measurement of the distance from the center of one tooth to the center of the next,p.and
124
it
is measured along the pitch line.
Supposing you wanted to know the number of teeth in a gear where the pitch diameter
and the diametral pitch are given. You would proceed as follows: Let the diameter of the
pitch circle be 10 inches, and the diameter of the diametral pitch be 4 inches. Multiplying
these together the product is 40, thus giving the number of teeth.
Fig. 123. Bevel Gears. ToList
Page 109
It will thus be seen that if you have an idea of the diametral pitch and circular pitch, you
can pretty fairly judge of the size that the teeth will be, and thus enable you to determine
about what kind of teeth you should order
How to Order a Gear.—In proceeding to order, therefore, you may give the pitch,p.or125
the
diameter of the pitch circle, in which latter case the manufacturer of the gear will
understand how to determine the number of the teeth. In case the intermeshing gears are
of different diameters, state the number of teeth in the gear and also in the pinion, or
indicate what the relative speed shall be.
Fig. 124. Miter Gears. ToList
This should be followed by the diameter of the hole in the gear and also in the pinion; the
backing of both gear and pinion; the width of the face; the diameter of the gear hub;
diameter of the pinion hub; and, finally, whether the gears are to be fastened to the shafts
by key-ways or set-screws.
p. 126
Fig. 122 shows a sample pair of miter gears, with the measurements to indicate how to
make the drawings. Fig. 123 shows the bevel gears.
Bevel and Miter Gears.—When two intermeshing gears are on shafts which are at right
angles to each other, they may be equal diametrically, or of different sizes. If both are of
the same diameter, they are called bevel gears; if of different diameters, miter gears.
Fig. 125. Sprocket Wheel. ToList
can pretty fairly judge of the size that the teeth will be, and thus enable you to determine
about what kind of teeth you should order
How to Order a Gear.—In proceeding to order, therefore, you may give the pitch,p.or125
the
diameter of the pitch circle, in which latter case the manufacturer of the gear will
understand how to determine the number of the teeth. In case the intermeshing gears are
of different diameters, state the number of teeth in the gear and also in the pinion, or
indicate what the relative speed shall be.
Fig. 124. Miter Gears. ToList
This should be followed by the diameter of the hole in the gear and also in the pinion; the
backing of both gear and pinion; the width of the face; the diameter of the gear hub;
diameter of the pinion hub; and, finally, whether the gears are to be fastened to the shafts
by key-ways or set-screws.
p. 126
Fig. 122 shows a sample pair of miter gears, with the measurements to indicate how to
make the drawings. Fig. 123 shows the bevel gears.
Bevel and Miter Gears.—When two intermeshing gears are on shafts which are at right
angles to each other, they may be equal diametrically, or of different sizes. If both are of
the same diameter, they are called bevel gears; if of different diameters, miter gears.
Fig. 125. Sprocket Wheel. ToList
Page 110
It is, in ordering gears of this character, that the novice finds it most difficult to know just
what to do. In this case it is necessary to get the proper relation of speed between the two
gears, and, for convenience, we shall, in the drawing, make the gears in the relation of 2
to 1.
p. 127
Drawing Gears.—Draw two lines at right angles, Fig. 124, as 1 and 2, marking off the
sizes of the two wheels at the points 3, 4. Then draw a vertical line (A) midway between
the marks of the line 2, and this will be the center of the main pinion.
Also draw a horizontal line (B) midway between the marks on the vertical line (1), and
this will represent the center of the small gear. These two cross lines (A, B) constitute the
intersecting axes of the two wheels, and a line (5), drawn from the mark (3 to 4), and
another line (6), from the axes to the intersecting points of the lines (1, 2), will give the
pitch line angles of the two wheels.
Sprocket Wheels.—For sprocket wheels the pitch line passes centrally through the
rollers (A) of the chain, as shown in Fig. 125, and the pitch of the chain is that distance
between the centers of two adjacent rollers. In this case the cut of the teeth is determined
by the chain
what to do. In this case it is necessary to get the proper relation of speed between the two
gears, and, for convenience, we shall, in the drawing, make the gears in the relation of 2
to 1.
p. 127
Drawing Gears.—Draw two lines at right angles, Fig. 124, as 1 and 2, marking off the
sizes of the two wheels at the points 3, 4. Then draw a vertical line (A) midway between
the marks of the line 2, and this will be the center of the main pinion.
Also draw a horizontal line (B) midway between the marks on the vertical line (1), and
this will represent the center of the small gear. These two cross lines (A, B) constitute the
intersecting axes of the two wheels, and a line (5), drawn from the mark (3 to 4), and
another line (6), from the axes to the intersecting points of the lines (1, 2), will give the
pitch line angles of the two wheels.
Sprocket Wheels.—For sprocket wheels the pitch line passes centrally through the
rollers (A) of the chain, as shown in Fig. 125, and the pitch of the chain is that distance
between the centers of two adjacent rollers. In this case the cut of the teeth is determined
by the chain
Page 111
Page 112
p. 128
Page 113
CHAPTER XIToC
MECHANICAL POWERS
The Lever.—The lever is the most wonderful mechanical element in the world. The
expression, lever, is not employed in the sense of a stick or a bar which is used against a
fulcrum to lift or push something with, but as the type of numerous devices which
employ the same principle.
Some of these devices are, the wedge, the screw, the pulley and the inclined plane. In
some form or other, one or more of these are used in every piece of mechanism in the
world.
Because the lever enables the user to raise or move an object hundreds of times heavier
than is possible without it, has led thousands of people to misunderstand its meaning,
because it has the appearance, to the ignorant, of being able to manufacture power.
Wrong Inferences from Use of Lever.—This lack of knowledge of first principles, has
bred and is now breeding, so-called perpetual motion inventors (?) all over the civilized
world. It is surprising how many men, to say nothing of boys, actually believe that power
can be made without the expenditure of something which equalizes it
The boy should not be led astray in this particular, and I shall try to make the matterp. 129
plain
by using the simple lever to illustrate the fact that whenever power is exerted some form
of energy is expended.
In Fig. 126 is a lever (A), resting on a fulcrum (B), the fulcrum being so placed that the
lever is four times longer on one side than on the other. A weight (C) of 4 pounds is
placed on the short end, and a 1-pound weight (D), called the power, on the short end. It
will thus be seen that the lever is balanced by the two weights, or that the weight and the
power are equal.
Fig. 126. Simple Lever ToList
The Lever Principle.—Now, without stopping to inquire, the boy will say: "Certainly, I
can understand that. As the lever is four times longer on one side of the fulcrum than on
the other side, it requires only one-fourth of the weight to balance the four pounds. But
suppose I push down the lever, at the point where the weight (D) is, then, for every p.pound
130
MECHANICAL POWERS
The Lever.—The lever is the most wonderful mechanical element in the world. The
expression, lever, is not employed in the sense of a stick or a bar which is used against a
fulcrum to lift or push something with, but as the type of numerous devices which
employ the same principle.
Some of these devices are, the wedge, the screw, the pulley and the inclined plane. In
some form or other, one or more of these are used in every piece of mechanism in the
world.
Because the lever enables the user to raise or move an object hundreds of times heavier
than is possible without it, has led thousands of people to misunderstand its meaning,
because it has the appearance, to the ignorant, of being able to manufacture power.
Wrong Inferences from Use of Lever.—This lack of knowledge of first principles, has
bred and is now breeding, so-called perpetual motion inventors (?) all over the civilized
world. It is surprising how many men, to say nothing of boys, actually believe that power
can be made without the expenditure of something which equalizes it
The boy should not be led astray in this particular, and I shall try to make the matterp. 129
plain
by using the simple lever to illustrate the fact that whenever power is exerted some form
of energy is expended.
In Fig. 126 is a lever (A), resting on a fulcrum (B), the fulcrum being so placed that the
lever is four times longer on one side than on the other. A weight (C) of 4 pounds is
placed on the short end, and a 1-pound weight (D), called the power, on the short end. It
will thus be seen that the lever is balanced by the two weights, or that the weight and the
power are equal.
Fig. 126. Simple Lever ToList
The Lever Principle.—Now, without stopping to inquire, the boy will say: "Certainly, I
can understand that. As the lever is four times longer on one side of the fulcrum than on
the other side, it requires only one-fourth of the weight to balance the four pounds. But
suppose I push down the lever, at the point where the weight (D) is, then, for every p.pound
130
Page 114
I push down I can raise four pounds at C. In that case do I not produce four times the
power?"
I answer, yes. But while I produce that power I am losing something which is equal to the
power gained. What is that?
Fig. 127. Lever Action ToList
First: Look at Fig. 127; the distance traveled. The long end of the lever is at its highest
point, which is A; and the short end of the lever is at its lowest point C. When the long
end of the lever is pushed down, so it is at B, it moves four times farther than the short
end moves upwardly, as the distance from C to D is just one-fourth that from A to B. The
energy expended in moving four times the distance balances the power gained.
Power vs. Distance Traveled.—From this the following law is deduced: That whatever
is gained in power is lost in the distance traveled
Second: Using the same figure, supposing it was necessary to raise the short end p.of131
the
lever, from C to D, in one second of time. In that case the hand pressing down the long
end of the lever, would go from A to B in one second of time; or it would go four times as
far as the short end, in the same time.
Power vs. Loss in Time.—This means another law: That what is gained in power is lost in
time.
Distinguish clearly between these two motions. In the first case the long end of the lever
is moved down from A to B in four seconds, and it had to travel four times the distance
that the short end moves in going from C to D.
In the second case the long end is moved down, from A to B, in one second of time, and
it had to go that distance in one-fourth of the time, so that four times as much energy was
expended in the same time to raise the short end from C to D.
Wrongly Directed Energy.—More men have gone astray on the simple question of the
power of the lever than on any other subject in mechanics. The writer has known
instances where men knew the principles involved in the lever, who would still insist on
trying to work out mechanical devices in which pulleys and gearing were involved,
p. 132
without seeming to understand that those mechanical devices are absolutely the same in
principle.
power?"
I answer, yes. But while I produce that power I am losing something which is equal to the
power gained. What is that?
Fig. 127. Lever Action ToList
First: Look at Fig. 127; the distance traveled. The long end of the lever is at its highest
point, which is A; and the short end of the lever is at its lowest point C. When the long
end of the lever is pushed down, so it is at B, it moves four times farther than the short
end moves upwardly, as the distance from C to D is just one-fourth that from A to B. The
energy expended in moving four times the distance balances the power gained.
Power vs. Distance Traveled.—From this the following law is deduced: That whatever
is gained in power is lost in the distance traveled
Second: Using the same figure, supposing it was necessary to raise the short end p.of131
the
lever, from C to D, in one second of time. In that case the hand pressing down the long
end of the lever, would go from A to B in one second of time; or it would go four times as
far as the short end, in the same time.
Power vs. Loss in Time.—This means another law: That what is gained in power is lost in
time.
Distinguish clearly between these two motions. In the first case the long end of the lever
is moved down from A to B in four seconds, and it had to travel four times the distance
that the short end moves in going from C to D.
In the second case the long end is moved down, from A to B, in one second of time, and
it had to go that distance in one-fourth of the time, so that four times as much energy was
expended in the same time to raise the short end from C to D.
Wrongly Directed Energy.—More men have gone astray on the simple question of the
power of the lever than on any other subject in mechanics. The writer has known
instances where men knew the principles involved in the lever, who would still insist on
trying to work out mechanical devices in which pulleys and gearing were involved,
p. 132
without seeming to understand that those mechanical devices are absolutely the same in
principle.
Page 115
This will be made plain by a few illustrations. In Fig. 128, A is a pulley four times larger,
diametrically, than B, and C is the pivot on which they turn. The pulleys are, of course,
secured to each other. In this case we have the two weights, one of four pounds on the
belt, which is on the small pulley (B), and a one-pound weight on the belt from the large
pulley (A).
Fig. 128. The Pulley ToList
The Lever and the Pulley.—If we should substitute a lever (D) for the pulleys, the
similarity to the lever (Fig. 127) would be apparent at once. The pivot (C) in this case
would act the same as the pivot (C) in the lever illustration.
p. 133
In the same manner, and for like reasons, the wedge, the screw and the incline plane, are
different structural applications of the principles set forth in the lever.
Whenever two gears are connected together, the lever principle is used, whether they are
the same in size, diametrically, or not. If they are the same size then no change in power
results; but instead, thereof, a change takes place in the direction of the motion.
Fig. 129. Fig. 130.
Change of Direction ToList
When one end of the lever (A) goes down, the other end goes up, as shown in Fig. 129;
and in Fig. 130, when the shaft (C) of one wheel turns in one direction, the shaft of the
other wheel turns in the opposite direction.
It is plain that a gear, like a lever, may change direction as well as increase or decrease
power. It is the thorough knowledge of these facts, and their application, which enables
man to make the wonderful machinery we see on every hand.
p. 134
Sources of Power.—Power is derived from a variety of sources, but what are called the
prime movers are derived from heat, through the various fuels, from water, from the
diametrically, than B, and C is the pivot on which they turn. The pulleys are, of course,
secured to each other. In this case we have the two weights, one of four pounds on the
belt, which is on the small pulley (B), and a one-pound weight on the belt from the large
pulley (A).
Fig. 128. The Pulley ToList
The Lever and the Pulley.—If we should substitute a lever (D) for the pulleys, the
similarity to the lever (Fig. 127) would be apparent at once. The pivot (C) in this case
would act the same as the pivot (C) in the lever illustration.
p. 133
In the same manner, and for like reasons, the wedge, the screw and the incline plane, are
different structural applications of the principles set forth in the lever.
Whenever two gears are connected together, the lever principle is used, whether they are
the same in size, diametrically, or not. If they are the same size then no change in power
results; but instead, thereof, a change takes place in the direction of the motion.
Fig. 129. Fig. 130.
Change of Direction ToList
When one end of the lever (A) goes down, the other end goes up, as shown in Fig. 129;
and in Fig. 130, when the shaft (C) of one wheel turns in one direction, the shaft of the
other wheel turns in the opposite direction.
It is plain that a gear, like a lever, may change direction as well as increase or decrease
power. It is the thorough knowledge of these facts, and their application, which enables
man to make the wonderful machinery we see on every hand.
p. 134
Sources of Power.—Power is derived from a variety of sources, but what are called the
prime movers are derived from heat, through the various fuels, from water, from the
Page 116
winds and from the tides and waves of the ocean. In the case of water the power depends
on the head, or height, of the surface of the water above the discharging orifice.
Water Power.—A column of water an inch square and 28 inches high gives a pressure at
the base of one pound; and the pressure at the lower end is equal in all directions. If a
tank of water 28 inches high has a single orifice in its bottom 1" x 1" in size, the pressure
of water through that opening will be only one pound, and it will be one pound through
every other orifice in the bottom of the same size.
Calculating Fuel Energy.—Power from fuels depends upon the expansion of the
materials consumed, or upon the fact that heat expands some element, like water, which
in turn produces the power. One cubic inch of water, when converted into steam, has a
volume equal to one cubic foot, or about 1,700 times increase in bulk.
Advantage is taken of this in steam engine construction. If a cylinder has a piston in it
with an area of 100 square inches, and a pipe one inch square supplies steam at 50
pounds pressure, the piston will have 50 pounds pressure on every square inch of its
surface, equal to 5,000 pounds
p. 135
The Pressure or Head.—In addition to that there will also be 50 pounds pressure on each
square inch of the head, as well as on the sides of the cylinder.
Fig. 131 shows a cylinder (A), a piston (B) and a steam inlet port (C), in which is
indicated how the steam pressure acts equally in all directions. As, however, the piston is
the only movable part, the force of the steam is directed to that part, and the motion is
then transmitted to the crank, and to the shaft of the engine.
Fig. 131. Steam Fig. 132. Water
Pressure Pressure ToList
This same thing applies to water which, as stated, is dependent on its head. Fig. 132p. 136
repre
sents a cylinder (D) with a vertically movable piston (E) and a standpipe (F). Assuming
that the pipe (F) is of sufficient height to give a pressure of 50 pounds to the square inch,
then the piston (E) and the sides and head of the cylinder (D) would have 50 pounds
pressure on every square inch of surface.
on the head, or height, of the surface of the water above the discharging orifice.
Water Power.—A column of water an inch square and 28 inches high gives a pressure at
the base of one pound; and the pressure at the lower end is equal in all directions. If a
tank of water 28 inches high has a single orifice in its bottom 1" x 1" in size, the pressure
of water through that opening will be only one pound, and it will be one pound through
every other orifice in the bottom of the same size.
Calculating Fuel Energy.—Power from fuels depends upon the expansion of the
materials consumed, or upon the fact that heat expands some element, like water, which
in turn produces the power. One cubic inch of water, when converted into steam, has a
volume equal to one cubic foot, or about 1,700 times increase in bulk.
Advantage is taken of this in steam engine construction. If a cylinder has a piston in it
with an area of 100 square inches, and a pipe one inch square supplies steam at 50
pounds pressure, the piston will have 50 pounds pressure on every square inch of its
surface, equal to 5,000 pounds
p. 135
The Pressure or Head.—In addition to that there will also be 50 pounds pressure on each
square inch of the head, as well as on the sides of the cylinder.
Fig. 131 shows a cylinder (A), a piston (B) and a steam inlet port (C), in which is
indicated how the steam pressure acts equally in all directions. As, however, the piston is
the only movable part, the force of the steam is directed to that part, and the motion is
then transmitted to the crank, and to the shaft of the engine.
Fig. 131. Steam Fig. 132. Water
Pressure Pressure ToList
This same thing applies to water which, as stated, is dependent on its head. Fig. 132p. 136
repre
sents a cylinder (D) with a vertically movable piston (E) and a standpipe (F). Assuming
that the pipe (F) is of sufficient height to give a pressure of 50 pounds to the square inch,
then the piston (E) and the sides and head of the cylinder (D) would have 50 pounds
pressure on every square inch of surface.
Page 117
Fuels.—In the use of fuels, such as the volatile hydrocarbons, the direct expansive power
of the fuel gases developed, is used to move the piston back and forth. Engines so driven
are called Internal Combustion Motors.
Power from Winds.—Another source of power is from the wind acting against wheels
which have blades or vanes disposed at such angles that there is a direct conversion of a
rectilinear force into circular motion.
In this case power is derived from the force of the moving air and the calculation of
energy developed is made by considering the pressure on each square foot of surface. The
following table shows the force exerted at different speeds against a flat surface one foot
p. 137
square, held so that the wind strikes it squarely:
SPEED OF WIND PRESSURE SPEED OF WIND PRESSURE
5 Miles per hour 2 oz. 35 miles per hour 6 lb. 2 oz.
10 “ “ 88 “ 40 “ “ 8 “
15 “ “ 1 lb. 2 “ 45 “ “ 10 “ 2 “
20 “ “ 2 “ “ 50 “ “ 12 “ 2 “
25 “ “ 3 “ 2 “ 55 “ “ 15 “ 2 “
30 “ “ 4 “ 8 “ 60 “ “ 18 “
Varying Degrees of Pressure.—It is curious to notice how the increase in speed changes
the pressure against the blade. Thus, a wind blowing 20 miles an hour shows 2 pounds
pressure; whereas a wind twice that velocity, or 40 miles an hour, shows a pressure of 8
pounds, which is four times greater than at 20 miles.
It differs, therefore, from the law with respect to water pressure, which is constant in
relation to the height or the head—that is, for every 28 inches height of water a pound
pressure is added.
Power from Waves and Tides.—Many attempts have been made to harness the waves
and the tide and some of them have been successful. This effort has been directed to the
work of converting the oscillations of the waves into a rotary motion, and also to take
advantage of the to-and-fro movement of the tidal flow. There is a great field in this
direction for the ingenious boy.
p. 138
A Profitable Field.—In no direction of human enterprise is there such a wide and
profitable field for work, as in the generation of power. It is constantly growing in
prominence, and calls for the exercise of the skill of the engineer and the ingenuity of the
mechanic. Efficiency and economy are the two great watchwords, and this is what the
world is striving for. Success will come to him who can contribute to it in the smallest
degree.
of the fuel gases developed, is used to move the piston back and forth. Engines so driven
are called Internal Combustion Motors.
Power from Winds.—Another source of power is from the wind acting against wheels
which have blades or vanes disposed at such angles that there is a direct conversion of a
rectilinear force into circular motion.
In this case power is derived from the force of the moving air and the calculation of
energy developed is made by considering the pressure on each square foot of surface. The
following table shows the force exerted at different speeds against a flat surface one foot
p. 137
square, held so that the wind strikes it squarely:
SPEED OF WIND PRESSURE SPEED OF WIND PRESSURE
5 Miles per hour 2 oz. 35 miles per hour 6 lb. 2 oz.
10 “ “ 88 “ 40 “ “ 8 “
15 “ “ 1 lb. 2 “ 45 “ “ 10 “ 2 “
20 “ “ 2 “ “ 50 “ “ 12 “ 2 “
25 “ “ 3 “ 2 “ 55 “ “ 15 “ 2 “
30 “ “ 4 “ 8 “ 60 “ “ 18 “
Varying Degrees of Pressure.—It is curious to notice how the increase in speed changes
the pressure against the blade. Thus, a wind blowing 20 miles an hour shows 2 pounds
pressure; whereas a wind twice that velocity, or 40 miles an hour, shows a pressure of 8
pounds, which is four times greater than at 20 miles.
It differs, therefore, from the law with respect to water pressure, which is constant in
relation to the height or the head—that is, for every 28 inches height of water a pound
pressure is added.
Power from Waves and Tides.—Many attempts have been made to harness the waves
and the tide and some of them have been successful. This effort has been directed to the
work of converting the oscillations of the waves into a rotary motion, and also to take
advantage of the to-and-fro movement of the tidal flow. There is a great field in this
direction for the ingenious boy.
p. 138
A Profitable Field.—In no direction of human enterprise is there such a wide and
profitable field for work, as in the generation of power. It is constantly growing in
prominence, and calls for the exercise of the skill of the engineer and the ingenuity of the
mechanic. Efficiency and economy are the two great watchwords, and this is what the
world is striving for. Success will come to him who can contribute to it in the smallest
degree.
Page 118
Capital is not looking for men who can cheapen the production of an article 50 per cent.,
but 1 per cent. The commercial world does not expect an article to be 100 per cent, better.
Five per cent. would be an inducement for business
but 1 per cent. The commercial world does not expect an article to be 100 per cent, better.
Five per cent. would be an inducement for business
Page 119
Page 120
p. 139
Page 121
CHAPTER XIIToC
ON MEASURES
Horse-power.—When work is performed it is designated as horse-power, usually
indicated by the letters H. P.; but the unit of work is called a foot pound.
If one pound should be lifted 550 feet in one second, or 550 pounds one foot in the same
time, it would be designated as one horse-power. For that reason it is called a foot pound.
Instead of using the figure to indicate the power exerted during one minute of time, the
time is taken for a minute, in all calculations, so that 550 multiplied by the number of
seconds, 60, in a minute, equals 33,000 foot pounds.
Foot Pounds.—The calculation of horse-power is in a large measure arbitrary. It was
determined in this way: Experiments show that the heat expended in vaporizing 34
pounds of water per hour, develops a force equal to 33,000 foot pounds; and since it takes
about 4 pounds of coal per hour to vaporize that amount of water, the heat developed by
that quantity of coal develops the same force as that exercised by an average horse
exerting his strength at ordinary work
p. 140
All power is expressed in foot pounds. Suppose a cannon ball of sufficient weight and
speed strikes an object. If the impact should indicate 33,000 pounds it would not mean
that the force employed was one horse-power, but that many foot pounds.
If there should be 60 impacts of 550 pounds each within a minute, it might be said that it
would be equal to 1 horse-power, but the correct way to express it would be foot pounds.
So in every calculation, where power is to be calculated, first find out how many foot
pounds are developed, and then use the unit of measure, 33,000, as the divisor to get the
horse-power, if you wish to express it in that way.
It must be understood, therefore, that horse-power is a simple unit of work, whereas a
foot pound is a compound unit formed of a foot paired with the weight of a pound.
Energy.—Now work and energy are two different things. Work is the overcoming of
resistance of any kind, either by causing or changing motion, or maintaining it against the
action of some other force.
Energy, on the other hand, is the power of doing work. Falling water possesses energy; so
does a stone poised on the edge of a cliff. In the case of water, it is called kinetic energy;
in the stone potential energy. A pound of pressure against the stone will cause thep.latter,
141
in falling, to develop an enormous energy; so it will be seen that this property resides, or
is within the thing itself. It will be well to remember these definitions.
ON MEASURES
Horse-power.—When work is performed it is designated as horse-power, usually
indicated by the letters H. P.; but the unit of work is called a foot pound.
If one pound should be lifted 550 feet in one second, or 550 pounds one foot in the same
time, it would be designated as one horse-power. For that reason it is called a foot pound.
Instead of using the figure to indicate the power exerted during one minute of time, the
time is taken for a minute, in all calculations, so that 550 multiplied by the number of
seconds, 60, in a minute, equals 33,000 foot pounds.
Foot Pounds.—The calculation of horse-power is in a large measure arbitrary. It was
determined in this way: Experiments show that the heat expended in vaporizing 34
pounds of water per hour, develops a force equal to 33,000 foot pounds; and since it takes
about 4 pounds of coal per hour to vaporize that amount of water, the heat developed by
that quantity of coal develops the same force as that exercised by an average horse
exerting his strength at ordinary work
p. 140
All power is expressed in foot pounds. Suppose a cannon ball of sufficient weight and
speed strikes an object. If the impact should indicate 33,000 pounds it would not mean
that the force employed was one horse-power, but that many foot pounds.
If there should be 60 impacts of 550 pounds each within a minute, it might be said that it
would be equal to 1 horse-power, but the correct way to express it would be foot pounds.
So in every calculation, where power is to be calculated, first find out how many foot
pounds are developed, and then use the unit of measure, 33,000, as the divisor to get the
horse-power, if you wish to express it in that way.
It must be understood, therefore, that horse-power is a simple unit of work, whereas a
foot pound is a compound unit formed of a foot paired with the weight of a pound.
Energy.—Now work and energy are two different things. Work is the overcoming of
resistance of any kind, either by causing or changing motion, or maintaining it against the
action of some other force.
Energy, on the other hand, is the power of doing work. Falling water possesses energy; so
does a stone poised on the edge of a cliff. In the case of water, it is called kinetic energy;
in the stone potential energy. A pound of pressure against the stone will cause thep.latter,
141
in falling, to develop an enormous energy; so it will be seen that this property resides, or
is within the thing itself. It will be well to remember these definitions.
Page 122
How to Find Out the Power Developed.—The measure of power produced by an engine,
or other source, is so interesting to boys that a sketch is given of a Prony Brake, which is
the simplest form of the Dynamometer, as these measuring machines are called.
Fig. 133. Prony Brake ToList
In the drawing (A) is the shaft, with a pulley (A´), which turns in the direction of the
arrow (B). C is a lever which may be of any length. This has a block (C´), which fits on
the pulley, and below the shaft, and surrounding it, are blocks (D) held against the pulley
by a chain (E), the ends of the chain being attached to bolts (F) which pass through the
block (C´) and lever (C)
Nuts (G) serve to draw the bolts upwardly and thus tighten the blocks against thep.shaft.
142
The free end of the lever has stops (H) above and below, so as to limit its movement.
Weights (I) are suspended from the end of the lever.
Fig. 134. Speed Indicator ToList
The Test.—The test is made as follows: The shaft is set in motion, and the nuts are
tightened until its full power at the required speed is balanced by the weight put on the
platform.
The following calculation can then be made:
For our present purpose we shall assume that the diameter of the pulley (A´) is 4 inches;
the length of the lever (C), 3 feet; the speed of the shaft (A) and the pulley, 210
revolutions per minute; and the weight 600 pounds.
Now proceed as follows:
p. 143
(1) Multiply the diameter of the pulley (A´) (4 inches) by 3.1416, and this will give the
circumference 12.5664 inches; or, 1.0472 feet.
or other source, is so interesting to boys that a sketch is given of a Prony Brake, which is
the simplest form of the Dynamometer, as these measuring machines are called.
Fig. 133. Prony Brake ToList
In the drawing (A) is the shaft, with a pulley (A´), which turns in the direction of the
arrow (B). C is a lever which may be of any length. This has a block (C´), which fits on
the pulley, and below the shaft, and surrounding it, are blocks (D) held against the pulley
by a chain (E), the ends of the chain being attached to bolts (F) which pass through the
block (C´) and lever (C)
Nuts (G) serve to draw the bolts upwardly and thus tighten the blocks against thep.shaft.
142
The free end of the lever has stops (H) above and below, so as to limit its movement.
Weights (I) are suspended from the end of the lever.
Fig. 134. Speed Indicator ToList
The Test.—The test is made as follows: The shaft is set in motion, and the nuts are
tightened until its full power at the required speed is balanced by the weight put on the
platform.
The following calculation can then be made:
For our present purpose we shall assume that the diameter of the pulley (A´) is 4 inches;
the length of the lever (C), 3 feet; the speed of the shaft (A) and the pulley, 210
revolutions per minute; and the weight 600 pounds.
Now proceed as follows:
p. 143
(1) Multiply the diameter of the pulley (A´) (4 inches) by 3.1416, and this will give the
circumference 12.5664 inches; or, 1.0472 feet.
Page 123
(2) Multiply this product (1.0472) by the revolutions per minute. 1.0472 × 210 =
219.912. This equals the speed of the periphery of the pulley.
(3) The next step is to get the length of the lever (C) from the center of the shaft (A) to
the point from which the weights are suspended, and divide this by one-half of the
diameter of the pulley (A´). 36" ÷ 2" = 18", or 1 1/2 feet. This is the leverage.
(4) Then multiply the weight in pounds by the leverage. 600 × 1 1/2 = 900.
(5) Next multiply this product (900) by the speed, 900 × 219.912 = 197,920.8, which
means foot pounds.
(6) As each horse-power has 33,000 foot pounds, the last product should be divided by
this figure, and we have 197,920.8 ÷ 33,000 = 5.99 H. P.
The Foot Measure.—How long is a foot, and what is it determined by? It is an arbitrary
measure. The human foot is the basis of the measurement. But what is the length of a
man's foot? It varied in different countries from 9 to 21 inches.
In England, in early days, it was defined as a measure of length consisting of 12 inches,
or 36 barleycorns laid end to end. But barleycorns differ in length as well as the human
p. 144
foot, so the standard adopted is without any real foundation or reason.
Weight.—To determine weight, however, a scientific standard was adopted. A gallon
contains 8.33 pounds avoirdupois weight of distilled water. This gallon is divided up in
two ways; one by weight, and the other by measurement.
Each gallon contains 231 cubic inches of distilled water. As it has four quarts, each quart
has 57 3/4 cubic inches, and as each quart is comprised of two pints, each pint has nearly
29 cubic inches.
The Gallon.—The legal gallon in the United States is equal to a cylindrical measure 7
inches in diameter and 6 inches deep.
Notwithstanding the weights and dimensions of solids and liquids are thus fixed by
following a scientific standard, the divisions into scruples, grains, pennyweights and tons,
as well as cutting them up into pints, quarts and other units, is done without any system,
and for this reason the need of a uniform method has been long considered by every
country.
The Metric System.—As early as 1528, Fernal, a French physician, suggested the metric
system. Our own government recognized the value of this plan when it established the
system of coinage.
p. 145
The principle lies in fixing a unit, such as a dollar, or a pound, or a foot, and then making
all divisions, or addition, in multiples of ten. Thus, we have one mill; ten mills to make a
dime; ten dimes to make a dollar, and so on.
219.912. This equals the speed of the periphery of the pulley.
(3) The next step is to get the length of the lever (C) from the center of the shaft (A) to
the point from which the weights are suspended, and divide this by one-half of the
diameter of the pulley (A´). 36" ÷ 2" = 18", or 1 1/2 feet. This is the leverage.
(4) Then multiply the weight in pounds by the leverage. 600 × 1 1/2 = 900.
(5) Next multiply this product (900) by the speed, 900 × 219.912 = 197,920.8, which
means foot pounds.
(6) As each horse-power has 33,000 foot pounds, the last product should be divided by
this figure, and we have 197,920.8 ÷ 33,000 = 5.99 H. P.
The Foot Measure.—How long is a foot, and what is it determined by? It is an arbitrary
measure. The human foot is the basis of the measurement. But what is the length of a
man's foot? It varied in different countries from 9 to 21 inches.
In England, in early days, it was defined as a measure of length consisting of 12 inches,
or 36 barleycorns laid end to end. But barleycorns differ in length as well as the human
p. 144
foot, so the standard adopted is without any real foundation or reason.
Weight.—To determine weight, however, a scientific standard was adopted. A gallon
contains 8.33 pounds avoirdupois weight of distilled water. This gallon is divided up in
two ways; one by weight, and the other by measurement.
Each gallon contains 231 cubic inches of distilled water. As it has four quarts, each quart
has 57 3/4 cubic inches, and as each quart is comprised of two pints, each pint has nearly
29 cubic inches.
The Gallon.—The legal gallon in the United States is equal to a cylindrical measure 7
inches in diameter and 6 inches deep.
Notwithstanding the weights and dimensions of solids and liquids are thus fixed by
following a scientific standard, the divisions into scruples, grains, pennyweights and tons,
as well as cutting them up into pints, quarts and other units, is done without any system,
and for this reason the need of a uniform method has been long considered by every
country.
The Metric System.—As early as 1528, Fernal, a French physician, suggested the metric
system. Our own government recognized the value of this plan when it established the
system of coinage.
p. 145
The principle lies in fixing a unit, such as a dollar, or a pound, or a foot, and then making
all divisions, or addition, in multiples of ten. Thus, we have one mill; ten mills to make a
dime; ten dimes to make a dollar, and so on.
Page 124
Basis of Measurement.—The question arose, what to use as the basis of measurement,
and it was proposed to use the earth itself, as the measure. For this purpose the meridian
line running around the earth at the latitude of Paris was selected.
One-quarter of this measurement around the globe was found to be 393,707,900 inches,
and this was divided into 10,000,000 parts. Each part, therefore, was a little over 39.37
inches in length, and this was called a meter, which means measure.
A decimeter is one-tenth of that, namely, 3.937 inches; and a decameter 39.37, or ten
times the meter, and so on.
For convenience the metrical table is given, showing lengths in feet and inches, in which
only three decimal points are used.
p. 146
Metrical Table, showing measurements in feet and inches:
METRICAL TABLE, SHOWING MEASUREMENTS IN FEET
AND INCHES
Length Inches Feet
Millimeter 0.039 0.003
Centimeter 0.393 0.032
Decimeter 3.937 0.328
Meter 39.370 3.280
Decameter 393.707 32.808
Hectometer 3937.079 328.089
Kilometer 39370.790 3280.899
Myriameter 393707.900 32808.992
METRIC SYSTEM, SHOWING THE EQUIVALENTS
IN OUR MEASURES
1 Myriameter = 5.4 nautical miles, or 6.21 statute
miles.
1 Kilometer = 0.621 statute mile, or nearly 5/8
mile.
1 Hectometer = 109.4 yards.
1 Decameter = 0.497 chain, 1.988 rods.
1 Meter = 39.37 inches, or nearly 3 ft. 3 3/8
inches.
1 Decimeter = 3.937 inches.
and it was proposed to use the earth itself, as the measure. For this purpose the meridian
line running around the earth at the latitude of Paris was selected.
One-quarter of this measurement around the globe was found to be 393,707,900 inches,
and this was divided into 10,000,000 parts. Each part, therefore, was a little over 39.37
inches in length, and this was called a meter, which means measure.
A decimeter is one-tenth of that, namely, 3.937 inches; and a decameter 39.37, or ten
times the meter, and so on.
For convenience the metrical table is given, showing lengths in feet and inches, in which
only three decimal points are used.
p. 146
Metrical Table, showing measurements in feet and inches:
METRICAL TABLE, SHOWING MEASUREMENTS IN FEET
AND INCHES
Length Inches Feet
Millimeter 0.039 0.003
Centimeter 0.393 0.032
Decimeter 3.937 0.328
Meter 39.370 3.280
Decameter 393.707 32.808
Hectometer 3937.079 328.089
Kilometer 39370.790 3280.899
Myriameter 393707.900 32808.992
METRIC SYSTEM, SHOWING THE EQUIVALENTS
IN OUR MEASURES
1 Myriameter = 5.4 nautical miles, or 6.21 statute
miles.
1 Kilometer = 0.621 statute mile, or nearly 5/8
mile.
1 Hectometer = 109.4 yards.
1 Decameter = 0.497 chain, 1.988 rods.
1 Meter = 39.37 inches, or nearly 3 ft. 3 3/8
inches.
1 Decimeter = 3.937 inches.
Page 125
1 Centimeter = 0.3937 inch.
1 Millimeter = 0.03937 inch.
1 Micron = 1/25400 inch.
1 Hectare = 2.471 acres.
1 Arc = 119.6 square yards.
p. 147
1 Centaire, or = 10.764 square feet.
square meter
1 Decastere = 13 cubic yards, or about 2 3/4 cords.
1 Stere, or cubic = 1.308 cubic yards, or 35.3 cubic
meter feet.
1 Decistere = 3 1/2 cubic feet.
1 Kiloliter = 1 ton, 12 gal., 2 pints, 2 gills old
wine measure.
1 Hectoliter = 22.01 Imperial gals., or 26.4 U. S.
gals.
1 Decaliter = 2 gallons, 1 pint, 2 2/5 gills,
imperial measure, or 2 gals., 2
qts., 1 pt., 1/2 gill, U. S.
1 Liter = 1 pint, 3 gills, imperial, or 1 qt., 1/2
gill U. S. measure.
1 Decileter = 0.704 gill, imperial, or 0.845 gill U.
S. measure.
1 Millier = 2,204.6 pounds avoirdupois.
1 Metric quintal = 2 hundredweight, less 3 1/2 pounds,
or 220 pounds, 7 ounces.
1 Kilogram = 2 pounds, 3 ounces, 4 3/8 drams
avoirdupois.
1 Hectogram = 3 ounces, 8 3/8 drams avoirdupois.
1 Decagram = 154.32 grains Troy.
1 Gram = 15.432 grains.
1 Decigram = 1.542 grain.
1 Centigram = 0.154 grain.
1 Milligram = 0.015 grain.
1 Millimeter = 0.03937 inch.
1 Micron = 1/25400 inch.
1 Hectare = 2.471 acres.
1 Arc = 119.6 square yards.
p. 147
1 Centaire, or = 10.764 square feet.
square meter
1 Decastere = 13 cubic yards, or about 2 3/4 cords.
1 Stere, or cubic = 1.308 cubic yards, or 35.3 cubic
meter feet.
1 Decistere = 3 1/2 cubic feet.
1 Kiloliter = 1 ton, 12 gal., 2 pints, 2 gills old
wine measure.
1 Hectoliter = 22.01 Imperial gals., or 26.4 U. S.
gals.
1 Decaliter = 2 gallons, 1 pint, 2 2/5 gills,
imperial measure, or 2 gals., 2
qts., 1 pt., 1/2 gill, U. S.
1 Liter = 1 pint, 3 gills, imperial, or 1 qt., 1/2
gill U. S. measure.
1 Decileter = 0.704 gill, imperial, or 0.845 gill U.
S. measure.
1 Millier = 2,204.6 pounds avoirdupois.
1 Metric quintal = 2 hundredweight, less 3 1/2 pounds,
or 220 pounds, 7 ounces.
1 Kilogram = 2 pounds, 3 ounces, 4 3/8 drams
avoirdupois.
1 Hectogram = 3 ounces, 8 3/8 drams avoirdupois.
1 Decagram = 154.32 grains Troy.
1 Gram = 15.432 grains.
1 Decigram = 1.542 grain.
1 Centigram = 0.154 grain.
1 Milligram = 0.015 grain.
Page 126
Page 127
p. 148
Page 128
CHAPTER XIIIToC
USEFUL INFORMATION FOR THE WORKSHOP
To find the circumference of a circle: Multiply the diameter by 3.1416.
To find the diameter of a circle: Multiply the circle by .31831.
To find the area of a circle: Multiply the square of the diameter by .7854.
To find the area of a triangle: Multiply the base by one-half the perpendicular height.
To find the surface of a ball: Multiply the square of the diameter by 3.1416.
To find the solidity of a sphere: Multiply the cube of the diameter by .5236.
To find the cubic contents of a cone: Multiply the area of the base by one-third the
altitude.
Doubling the diameter of a pipe increases its capacity four times.
To find the pressure in pounds per square inch of a column of water: Multiply the height
of the column in feet by .434.
Standard Horse-power: The evaporation of 30 pounds of water per hour from a feed
water temperature of 1,000 degrees Fahrenheit into steam at 70 pounds gauge pressure
To find the capacity of any tank in gallons: Square the diameter in inches, multiply p.by
149
the
length, and then by .0034.
In making patterns for aluminum castings provision must be made for shrinkage to a
greater extent than with any other metal or alloy.
The toughness of aluminum can be increased by adding a small per cent. of phosphorus.
All alloys of metals having mercury are called amalgams.
A sheet of zinc suspended in the water of a boiler will produce an electrolytic action and
prevent scaling to a considerable extent.
Hydrofluoric acid will not affect a pure diamond, but will dissolve all imitations.
A strong solution of alum put into glue will make it insoluble in water.
A grindstone with one side harder than the other can have its flinty side softened by
immersing that part in boiled linseed oil.
USEFUL INFORMATION FOR THE WORKSHOP
To find the circumference of a circle: Multiply the diameter by 3.1416.
To find the diameter of a circle: Multiply the circle by .31831.
To find the area of a circle: Multiply the square of the diameter by .7854.
To find the area of a triangle: Multiply the base by one-half the perpendicular height.
To find the surface of a ball: Multiply the square of the diameter by 3.1416.
To find the solidity of a sphere: Multiply the cube of the diameter by .5236.
To find the cubic contents of a cone: Multiply the area of the base by one-third the
altitude.
Doubling the diameter of a pipe increases its capacity four times.
To find the pressure in pounds per square inch of a column of water: Multiply the height
of the column in feet by .434.
Standard Horse-power: The evaporation of 30 pounds of water per hour from a feed
water temperature of 1,000 degrees Fahrenheit into steam at 70 pounds gauge pressure
To find the capacity of any tank in gallons: Square the diameter in inches, multiply p.by
149
the
length, and then by .0034.
In making patterns for aluminum castings provision must be made for shrinkage to a
greater extent than with any other metal or alloy.
The toughness of aluminum can be increased by adding a small per cent. of phosphorus.
All alloys of metals having mercury are called amalgams.
A sheet of zinc suspended in the water of a boiler will produce an electrolytic action and
prevent scaling to a considerable extent.
Hydrofluoric acid will not affect a pure diamond, but will dissolve all imitations.
A strong solution of alum put into glue will make it insoluble in water.
A grindstone with one side harder than the other can have its flinty side softened by
immersing that part in boiled linseed oil.
Page 129
One barrel contains 3 3/4 cubic feet.
One cubic yard contains 7 barrels.
To find the speed of a driven pulley of a given diameter: Multiply the diameter of the
driving pulley by its speed or number of revolutions. Divide this by the diameter of the
driven pulley. The result will be the number of revolutions of the driven pulley
p. 150
To find the diameter of a driven pulley that shall make any given number of revolutions
in the same time: Multiply the diameter of the driving pulley by its number of
revolutions, and divide the product by the number of revolutions of the driven pulley.
A piece of the well-known tar soap held against the inside of a belt while running will
prevent it from slipping, and will not injure the belt.
Boiler scale is composed of the carbonate or the sulphate of lime. To prevent the
formation it is necessary to use some substance which will precipitate these elements in
the water. The cheapest and most universally used for this purpose are soda ash and
caustic soda.
Gold bronze is merely a mixture of equal parts of oxide of tin and sulphur. To unite them
they are heated for some time in an earthen retort.
Rusted utensils may be cleaned of rust by applying either turpentine or kerosene oil, and
allowing them to stand over night, when the excess may be wiped off. Clean afterwards
with fine emery cloth.
Plaster of paris is valuable for many purposes in a machine shop, but the disadvantage in
handling it is, that it sets so quickly, and its use is, therefore, very much limited. To
p. 151
prevent quick setting mix a small amount of arrow root powder with the plaster before it
is mixed, and this will keep it soft for some time, and also increase its hardness when it
sets.
For measuring purposes a tablespoon holds 1/2 ounce; a dessertspoon 1/4 ounce; a
teaspoon 1/8 ounce; a teacupful of sugar weighs 1/2 pound; two teacupsful of butter weigh
1 pound; 1 1/3 pints of powdered sugar weigh 1 pound; one pint of distilled water weighs
1 pound.
Ordinarily, 450 drops of liquid are equal to 1 ounce; this varies with different liquids,
some being thicker in consistency than others, but for those of the consistency of water
the measure given is fairly accurate
One cubic yard contains 7 barrels.
To find the speed of a driven pulley of a given diameter: Multiply the diameter of the
driving pulley by its speed or number of revolutions. Divide this by the diameter of the
driven pulley. The result will be the number of revolutions of the driven pulley
p. 150
To find the diameter of a driven pulley that shall make any given number of revolutions
in the same time: Multiply the diameter of the driving pulley by its number of
revolutions, and divide the product by the number of revolutions of the driven pulley.
A piece of the well-known tar soap held against the inside of a belt while running will
prevent it from slipping, and will not injure the belt.
Boiler scale is composed of the carbonate or the sulphate of lime. To prevent the
formation it is necessary to use some substance which will precipitate these elements in
the water. The cheapest and most universally used for this purpose are soda ash and
caustic soda.
Gold bronze is merely a mixture of equal parts of oxide of tin and sulphur. To unite them
they are heated for some time in an earthen retort.
Rusted utensils may be cleaned of rust by applying either turpentine or kerosene oil, and
allowing them to stand over night, when the excess may be wiped off. Clean afterwards
with fine emery cloth.
Plaster of paris is valuable for many purposes in a machine shop, but the disadvantage in
handling it is, that it sets so quickly, and its use is, therefore, very much limited. To
p. 151
prevent quick setting mix a small amount of arrow root powder with the plaster before it
is mixed, and this will keep it soft for some time, and also increase its hardness when it
sets.
For measuring purposes a tablespoon holds 1/2 ounce; a dessertspoon 1/4 ounce; a
teaspoon 1/8 ounce; a teacupful of sugar weighs 1/2 pound; two teacupsful of butter weigh
1 pound; 1 1/3 pints of powdered sugar weigh 1 pound; one pint of distilled water weighs
1 pound.
Ordinarily, 450 drops of liquid are equal to 1 ounce; this varies with different liquids,
some being thicker in consistency than others, but for those of the consistency of water
the measure given is fairly accurate
Page 130
Page 131
p. 152
Page 132
CHAPTER XIVToC
THE SIMPLICITY OF GREAT INVENTIONS, AND OF
NATURE'S MANIFESTATIONS
If there is anything in the realm of mechanics which excites the wonder and admiration
of man, it is the knowledge that the greatest inventions are the simplest, and that the
inventor must take advantage of one law in nature which is universal in its application,
and that is vibration.
There is a key to every secret in nature's great storehouse. It is not a complicated one,
containing a multiplicity of wards and peculiar angles and recesses. It is the very
simplicity in most of the problems which long served as a bar to discovery in many of the
arts. So extremely simple have been some of the keys that many inventions resulted from
accidents.
Invention Precedes Science.—Occasionally inventions were brought about by
persistency and energy, and ofttimes by theorizing; but science rarely ever aids invention.
The latter usually precedes science. Thus, reasoning could not show how it might be
possible for steam to force water into a boiler against its own pressure. But the injector
does this
THE SIMPLICITY OF GREAT INVENTIONS, AND OF
NATURE'S MANIFESTATIONS
If there is anything in the realm of mechanics which excites the wonder and admiration
of man, it is the knowledge that the greatest inventions are the simplest, and that the
inventor must take advantage of one law in nature which is universal in its application,
and that is vibration.
There is a key to every secret in nature's great storehouse. It is not a complicated one,
containing a multiplicity of wards and peculiar angles and recesses. It is the very
simplicity in most of the problems which long served as a bar to discovery in many of the
arts. So extremely simple have been some of the keys that many inventions resulted from
accidents.
Invention Precedes Science.—Occasionally inventions were brought about by
persistency and energy, and ofttimes by theorizing; but science rarely ever aids invention.
The latter usually precedes science. Thus, reasoning could not show how it might be
possible for steam to force water into a boiler against its own pressure. But the injector
does this
Page 133
p. 153
If, prior to 1876, it had been suggested that a sonorous vibration could be converted into an
electrical pulsation, and transformed back again to a sonorous vibration, science would have
proclaimed it impossible; but the telephone does it. Invention shows how things are done, and
science afterwards explains the phenomena and formulates theories and laws which become
serviceable to others in the arts.
Simplicity in Inventions.—But let us see how exceedingly simple are some of the great
discoveries of man.
The Telegraph.—The telegraph is nothing but a magnet at each end of a wire, with a lever for an
armature, which opens and closes the circuit that passes through the magnets and armature, so
that an impulse on the lever, or armature, at one end, by making and breaking the circuit, also
makes and breaks the circuit at the other end.
Telephone.—The telephone has merely a disk close to but not touching the end of a magnet. The
sonorous vibration of the voice oscillates the diaphragm, and as the diaphragm is in the magnetic
field of the magnet, it varies the pressure, so called, causing the diaphragm at the other end of the
wire to vibrate in unison and give out the same sound originally imparted to the other diaphragm.
Transmitter.—The transmitter is merely a sensitized instrument. It depends solely p.on 154
the
principle of light contact points in an electric circuit, whereby the vibrations of the voice are
augmented.
Phonograph.—The phonograph is not an electrical instrument. It has a diaphragm provided
centrally with a blunt pin, or stylus. To make the record, some soft or plastic material, like wax,
or tinfoil, is caused to move along so that the point of the stylus makes impressions in it, and the
vibrations of the diaphragm cause the point to traverse a groove of greater or smaller
indentations. When this groove is again presented to the stylus the diaphragm is vibrated and
gives forth the sounds originally imparted to it when the indentations were made.
Wireless Telegraphy.—Wireless telegraphy depends for its action on what is called induction.
Through this property a current is made of a high electro-motive force, which means of a high
voltage, and this disturbs the ether with such intensity that the waves are sent out in all directions
to immense distances.
The great discovery has been to find a mechanism sensitive enough to detect the induction waves.
The instrument for this purpose is called a coherer, in which small particles cohere through the
action of the electric waves, and are caused to fall apart mechanically, during the electrical
impulses
p. 155
Printing Telegraph.—The printing telegraph requires the synchronous turning of two wheels.
This means that two wheels at opposite ends of a wire must be made to turn at exactly the same
rate of speed. Originally, this was tried by clock work, but without success commercially, for the
reason that a pendulum does not beat with the same speed at the equator, as at different latitudes,
nor at altitudes; and temperature also affects the rate. The solution was found by making the two
wheels move by means of a timing fork, which vibrates with the same speed everywhere, and
under all conditions.
Electric Motor.—The direct current electric motor depends for its action on the principle that
likes repel, and unlikes attract. The commutator so arranges the poles that at the proper points, in
If, prior to 1876, it had been suggested that a sonorous vibration could be converted into an
electrical pulsation, and transformed back again to a sonorous vibration, science would have
proclaimed it impossible; but the telephone does it. Invention shows how things are done, and
science afterwards explains the phenomena and formulates theories and laws which become
serviceable to others in the arts.
Simplicity in Inventions.—But let us see how exceedingly simple are some of the great
discoveries of man.
The Telegraph.—The telegraph is nothing but a magnet at each end of a wire, with a lever for an
armature, which opens and closes the circuit that passes through the magnets and armature, so
that an impulse on the lever, or armature, at one end, by making and breaking the circuit, also
makes and breaks the circuit at the other end.
Telephone.—The telephone has merely a disk close to but not touching the end of a magnet. The
sonorous vibration of the voice oscillates the diaphragm, and as the diaphragm is in the magnetic
field of the magnet, it varies the pressure, so called, causing the diaphragm at the other end of the
wire to vibrate in unison and give out the same sound originally imparted to the other diaphragm.
Transmitter.—The transmitter is merely a sensitized instrument. It depends solely p.on 154
the
principle of light contact points in an electric circuit, whereby the vibrations of the voice are
augmented.
Phonograph.—The phonograph is not an electrical instrument. It has a diaphragm provided
centrally with a blunt pin, or stylus. To make the record, some soft or plastic material, like wax,
or tinfoil, is caused to move along so that the point of the stylus makes impressions in it, and the
vibrations of the diaphragm cause the point to traverse a groove of greater or smaller
indentations. When this groove is again presented to the stylus the diaphragm is vibrated and
gives forth the sounds originally imparted to it when the indentations were made.
Wireless Telegraphy.—Wireless telegraphy depends for its action on what is called induction.
Through this property a current is made of a high electro-motive force, which means of a high
voltage, and this disturbs the ether with such intensity that the waves are sent out in all directions
to immense distances.
The great discovery has been to find a mechanism sensitive enough to detect the induction waves.
The instrument for this purpose is called a coherer, in which small particles cohere through the
action of the electric waves, and are caused to fall apart mechanically, during the electrical
impulses
p. 155
Printing Telegraph.—The printing telegraph requires the synchronous turning of two wheels.
This means that two wheels at opposite ends of a wire must be made to turn at exactly the same
rate of speed. Originally, this was tried by clock work, but without success commercially, for the
reason that a pendulum does not beat with the same speed at the equator, as at different latitudes,
nor at altitudes; and temperature also affects the rate. The solution was found by making the two
wheels move by means of a timing fork, which vibrates with the same speed everywhere, and
under all conditions.
Electric Motor.—The direct current electric motor depends for its action on the principle that
likes repel, and unlikes attract. The commutator so arranges the poles that at the proper points, in
Page 134
the revolution of the armature, the poles are always presented to each other in such a way that as
they approach each other, they are opposites, and thus attract, and as they recede from each other
they repel. A dynamo is exactly the same, except that the commutator reverses the operation and
makes the poles alike as they approach each other, and unlike as they recede.
Steel is simply iron, to which has been added a small per cent of carbon.
Quinine is efficient in its natural state, but it has been made infinitely more effectual p.by
156
the
breaking up or changing of the molecules with acids. Sulphate of quinine is made by the use of
sulphuric acid as a solvent.
Explosions.—Explosions depend on oxygen. While this element does not burn, a certain amount
of it must be present to support combustion. Thus, the most inflammable gas or liquid will not
burn or explode unless oxygenized. Explosives are made by using a sufficient amount, in a
concentrated form, which is added to the fuel, so that when it is ignited there is a sufficient
amount of oxygen present to support combustion, hence the rapid explosion which follows.
Vibration in Nature.—The physical meaning of vibration is best illustrated by the movement of a
pendulum. All agitation is vibration. All force manifests itself in this way.
The painful brilliancy of the sun is produced by the rapid vibrations of the rays; the twinkle of the
distant star, the waves of the ocean when ruffled by the winds; the shimmer of the moon on its
crested surface; the brain in thinking; the mouth in talking; the beating of the heart; all, alike,
obey the one grand and universal law of vibratory motion.
Qualities of Sound.—Sound is nothing but a succession of vibrations of greater or less
p. 157
magnitude. Pitch is produced by the number of vibrations; intensity by their force; and quality by
the character of the article vibrated.
Since the great telephone controversy which took place some years ago there has been a
wonderful development in the knowledge of acoustics, or sounds. It was shown that the slightest
sound would immediately set into vibration every article of furniture in a room, and very
sensitive instruments have been devised to register the force and quality.
The Photographer's Plate.—It is known that the chemical action of an object on a photographer's
plate is due to vibration; each represents a force of different intensity, hence the varying shades
produced. Owing to the different rates of vibrations caused by the different colors, the difficulty
has been to photograph them, but this has now been accomplished. Harmony, or "being in tune,"
as is the common expression, is as necessary in light, as in music.
Some chemicals will bring out or "develop," the pictures; others will not. Colors are now
photographed because invention and science have found the harmonizing chemicals.
Quadruplex Telegraphy.—One of the most remarkable of all the wonders of our age is what is
p. 158
known as duplex and quadruplex telegraphy. Every atom and impulse in electricity is oscillation.
The current which transmits a telegram is designated in the science as "vibratory."
But how is it possible to transmit two or more messages over one wire at the same time? It is by
bringing into play the harmony of sounds. One message is sent in one direction in the key of A;
another message in the other direction in B; and so any number may be sent, because the
electrical vibrations may be tuned, just like the strings of a violin.
they approach each other, they are opposites, and thus attract, and as they recede from each other
they repel. A dynamo is exactly the same, except that the commutator reverses the operation and
makes the poles alike as they approach each other, and unlike as they recede.
Steel is simply iron, to which has been added a small per cent of carbon.
Quinine is efficient in its natural state, but it has been made infinitely more effectual p.by
156
the
breaking up or changing of the molecules with acids. Sulphate of quinine is made by the use of
sulphuric acid as a solvent.
Explosions.—Explosions depend on oxygen. While this element does not burn, a certain amount
of it must be present to support combustion. Thus, the most inflammable gas or liquid will not
burn or explode unless oxygenized. Explosives are made by using a sufficient amount, in a
concentrated form, which is added to the fuel, so that when it is ignited there is a sufficient
amount of oxygen present to support combustion, hence the rapid explosion which follows.
Vibration in Nature.—The physical meaning of vibration is best illustrated by the movement of a
pendulum. All agitation is vibration. All force manifests itself in this way.
The painful brilliancy of the sun is produced by the rapid vibrations of the rays; the twinkle of the
distant star, the waves of the ocean when ruffled by the winds; the shimmer of the moon on its
crested surface; the brain in thinking; the mouth in talking; the beating of the heart; all, alike,
obey the one grand and universal law of vibratory motion.
Qualities of Sound.—Sound is nothing but a succession of vibrations of greater or less
p. 157
magnitude. Pitch is produced by the number of vibrations; intensity by their force; and quality by
the character of the article vibrated.
Since the great telephone controversy which took place some years ago there has been a
wonderful development in the knowledge of acoustics, or sounds. It was shown that the slightest
sound would immediately set into vibration every article of furniture in a room, and very
sensitive instruments have been devised to register the force and quality.
The Photographer's Plate.—It is known that the chemical action of an object on a photographer's
plate is due to vibration; each represents a force of different intensity, hence the varying shades
produced. Owing to the different rates of vibrations caused by the different colors, the difficulty
has been to photograph them, but this has now been accomplished. Harmony, or "being in tune,"
as is the common expression, is as necessary in light, as in music.
Some chemicals will bring out or "develop," the pictures; others will not. Colors are now
photographed because invention and science have found the harmonizing chemicals.
Quadruplex Telegraphy.—One of the most remarkable of all the wonders of our age is what is
p. 158
known as duplex and quadruplex telegraphy. Every atom and impulse in electricity is oscillation.
The current which transmits a telegram is designated in the science as "vibratory."
But how is it possible to transmit two or more messages over one wire at the same time? It is by
bringing into play the harmony of sounds. One message is sent in one direction in the key of A;
another message in the other direction in B; and so any number may be sent, because the
electrical vibrations may be tuned, just like the strings of a violin.
Page 135
Electric Harmony.—Every sound produces a corresponding vibration in surrounding objects.
While each vibrates, or is capable of transmitting a sound given to it by its vibratory powers, it
may not vibrate in harmony.
When a certain key of a piano is struck every key has a certain vibration, and if we could separate
it from the other sounds, it would reflect the same sound as the string struck, just the same as the
walls of a room or the air itself would convey that sound.
But as no two strings in the instrument vibrate the same number of times each second, the rapid
movement of successive sounds of the keys do not interfere with each other. If, however, there
are several pianos in a room, and all are tuned the same pitch, the striking of a key on one
p. 159
instrument will instantly set in vibration the corresponding strings in all the other instruments.
This is one reason why a piano tested in a music wareroom has always a more beautiful and
richer sound than when in a drawing-room or hall, since each string is vibrated by the other
instrument.
If a small piece of paper is balanced upon the strings of a violin, every key of the piano may be
struck, except the one in tune, without affecting the paper; but the moment the same key is struck
the vibration of the harmonizing pitch will unbalance the paper.
The musical sound of C produces 528 vibrations per second; D 616, and so on. The octave above
has double the number of vibrations of the lower note. It will thus be understood why discord in
music is not pleasant to the ear, as the vibrations are not in the proper multiples.
Odors.—So with odors. The sense of smell is merely the force set in motion by the vibration of
the elements. An instrument called the odophone demonstrates that a scale or gamut exists in
flowers; that sharp smells indicate high tones and heavy smells low tones. Over fifty odors have
thus been analyzed.
The treble clef, note E, 4th space, is orange; note D, 1st space below, violet; note F, 4th space
p. 160
above clef, ambergris. To make a proper bouquet, therefore the different odors must be
harmonized, just the same as the notes of a musical chord are selected.
A Bouquet of Vibrations.—The odophone shows that santal, geranium, orange flower and
camphor, make a bouquet in the key of C. It is easy to conceive that a beautiful bouquet means
nothing more than an agreeable vibratory sensation of the olfactory nerves.
Taste.—So with the sense of taste. The tongue is covered with minute cells surrounded by
nervous filaments which are set in motion whenever any substance is brought into contact with
the surface. Tasting is merely the movement of these filaments, of greater or less rapidity.
If an article is tasteless, it means that these filaments do not vibrate. These vibrations are of two
kinds. They may move faster or slower, or they may move in a peculiar way. A sharp acute taste
means that the vibrations are very rapid; a mild taste, slow vibrations.
When a pleasant taste is detected, it is only because the filaments are set into an agreeable
motion. The vibrations in the tongue may become so rapid that it will be painful, just as a shriek
becomes piercing to the ear, or an intense light dazzling to the eye; all proceed from the same
physical force acting on the brain
p. 161
While each vibrates, or is capable of transmitting a sound given to it by its vibratory powers, it
may not vibrate in harmony.
When a certain key of a piano is struck every key has a certain vibration, and if we could separate
it from the other sounds, it would reflect the same sound as the string struck, just the same as the
walls of a room or the air itself would convey that sound.
But as no two strings in the instrument vibrate the same number of times each second, the rapid
movement of successive sounds of the keys do not interfere with each other. If, however, there
are several pianos in a room, and all are tuned the same pitch, the striking of a key on one
p. 159
instrument will instantly set in vibration the corresponding strings in all the other instruments.
This is one reason why a piano tested in a music wareroom has always a more beautiful and
richer sound than when in a drawing-room or hall, since each string is vibrated by the other
instrument.
If a small piece of paper is balanced upon the strings of a violin, every key of the piano may be
struck, except the one in tune, without affecting the paper; but the moment the same key is struck
the vibration of the harmonizing pitch will unbalance the paper.
The musical sound of C produces 528 vibrations per second; D 616, and so on. The octave above
has double the number of vibrations of the lower note. It will thus be understood why discord in
music is not pleasant to the ear, as the vibrations are not in the proper multiples.
Odors.—So with odors. The sense of smell is merely the force set in motion by the vibration of
the elements. An instrument called the odophone demonstrates that a scale or gamut exists in
flowers; that sharp smells indicate high tones and heavy smells low tones. Over fifty odors have
thus been analyzed.
The treble clef, note E, 4th space, is orange; note D, 1st space below, violet; note F, 4th space
p. 160
above clef, ambergris. To make a proper bouquet, therefore the different odors must be
harmonized, just the same as the notes of a musical chord are selected.
A Bouquet of Vibrations.—The odophone shows that santal, geranium, orange flower and
camphor, make a bouquet in the key of C. It is easy to conceive that a beautiful bouquet means
nothing more than an agreeable vibratory sensation of the olfactory nerves.
Taste.—So with the sense of taste. The tongue is covered with minute cells surrounded by
nervous filaments which are set in motion whenever any substance is brought into contact with
the surface. Tasting is merely the movement of these filaments, of greater or less rapidity.
If an article is tasteless, it means that these filaments do not vibrate. These vibrations are of two
kinds. They may move faster or slower, or they may move in a peculiar way. A sharp acute taste
means that the vibrations are very rapid; a mild taste, slow vibrations.
When a pleasant taste is detected, it is only because the filaments are set into an agreeable
motion. The vibrations in the tongue may become so rapid that it will be painful, just as a shriek
becomes piercing to the ear, or an intense light dazzling to the eye; all proceed from the same
physical force acting on the brain
p. 161
Page 136
Color.—Color, that seemingly unexplainable force, becomes a simple thing when the principles
of vibration are applied, and this has been fully explained by the spectroscope and its operation.
When the boy once appreciates that this force, or this motion in nature is just as simple as the
great inventions which have grown out of this manifestation, he will understand that a knowledge
of these things will enable him to utilize the energy in a proper way
of vibration are applied, and this has been fully explained by the spectroscope and its operation.
When the boy once appreciates that this force, or this motion in nature is just as simple as the
great inventions which have grown out of this manifestation, he will understand that a knowledge
of these things will enable him to utilize the energy in a proper way
Page 137
Page 138
p. 162
Page 139
CHAPTER XVToC
WORKSHOP RECIPES AND FORMULAS
In a work of this kind, dealing with the various elements, the boy should have at hand recipes or
formulas for everything which comes within the province of his experiments. The following are
most carefully selected, the objects being to present those which are the more easily compounded.
Adhesives for Various Uses.—Waterproof glue. Use a good quality of glue, and dissolve it in
warm water, then add one pound of linseed oil to eight pounds of the glue. Add three ounces of
nitric acid.
Leather or Card-board Glue. After dissolving good glue in water, to which a little turpentine has
been added, mix it with a thick paste of starch, the proportion of starch to glue being about two to
every part of glue used. The mixture is used cold.
A fine Belt Glue. Dissolve 50 ounces of gelatine in water, and heat after pouring off the excess
water. Then stir in five ounces of glycerine, ten ounces of turpentine, and five ounces of linseed
oil varnish. If too thick add water to suit.
p. 163
For cementing Iron to Marble. Use 30 parts of Plaster of Paris, 10 parts of iron filings, and one
half part of sal ammoniac. These are mixed up with vinegar to make a fluid paste.
To cement Glass to Iron. Use 3 ounces of boiled linseed oil and 1 part of copal varnish, and into
this put 2 ounces of litharge and 1 ounce of white lead and thoroughly mingle so as to make a
smooth paste.
Water-proof Cement. Boiled linseed oil, 6 ounces; copal, 6 ounces; litharge, 2 ounces; and white
lead, 16 ounces. To be thoroughly incorporated.
To unite rubber or leather to hard substances. One ounce of pulverized gum shellac dissolved in
9 1/2 ounces of strong ammonia, will make an elastic cement. Must be kept tightly corked.
For uniting iron to iron. Use equal parts of boiled oil, white lead, pipe clay and black oxide of
manganese, and form it into a paste.
Transparent Cement. Unite 1 ounce of india rubber, 67 ounces of chloroform, and 40 ounces of
mastic. This is to be kept together for a week, and stirred at times, when it will be ready for use.
To Attach Cloth to Metal. Water 100 parts, sugar 10 parts, starch 20 parts, and zinc chloride 1
part. This must be first stirred and made free of lumps, and then heated until it thickens.
United States Government Gum. Dissolve 1 part of gum arabic in water and add 4 parts ofp. 164
sugar
and 1 part of starch. This is then boiled for a few minutes, and thinned down as required.
To Make Different Alloys.—Silver-aluminum. Silver one-fourth part, and aluminum three-
fourth parts.
WORKSHOP RECIPES AND FORMULAS
In a work of this kind, dealing with the various elements, the boy should have at hand recipes or
formulas for everything which comes within the province of his experiments. The following are
most carefully selected, the objects being to present those which are the more easily compounded.
Adhesives for Various Uses.—Waterproof glue. Use a good quality of glue, and dissolve it in
warm water, then add one pound of linseed oil to eight pounds of the glue. Add three ounces of
nitric acid.
Leather or Card-board Glue. After dissolving good glue in water, to which a little turpentine has
been added, mix it with a thick paste of starch, the proportion of starch to glue being about two to
every part of glue used. The mixture is used cold.
A fine Belt Glue. Dissolve 50 ounces of gelatine in water, and heat after pouring off the excess
water. Then stir in five ounces of glycerine, ten ounces of turpentine, and five ounces of linseed
oil varnish. If too thick add water to suit.
p. 163
For cementing Iron to Marble. Use 30 parts of Plaster of Paris, 10 parts of iron filings, and one
half part of sal ammoniac. These are mixed up with vinegar to make a fluid paste.
To cement Glass to Iron. Use 3 ounces of boiled linseed oil and 1 part of copal varnish, and into
this put 2 ounces of litharge and 1 ounce of white lead and thoroughly mingle so as to make a
smooth paste.
Water-proof Cement. Boiled linseed oil, 6 ounces; copal, 6 ounces; litharge, 2 ounces; and white
lead, 16 ounces. To be thoroughly incorporated.
To unite rubber or leather to hard substances. One ounce of pulverized gum shellac dissolved in
9 1/2 ounces of strong ammonia, will make an elastic cement. Must be kept tightly corked.
For uniting iron to iron. Use equal parts of boiled oil, white lead, pipe clay and black oxide of
manganese, and form it into a paste.
Transparent Cement. Unite 1 ounce of india rubber, 67 ounces of chloroform, and 40 ounces of
mastic. This is to be kept together for a week, and stirred at times, when it will be ready for use.
To Attach Cloth to Metal. Water 100 parts, sugar 10 parts, starch 20 parts, and zinc chloride 1
part. This must be first stirred and made free of lumps, and then heated until it thickens.
United States Government Gum. Dissolve 1 part of gum arabic in water and add 4 parts ofp. 164
sugar
and 1 part of starch. This is then boiled for a few minutes, and thinned down as required.
To Make Different Alloys.—Silver-aluminum. Silver one-fourth part, and aluminum three-
fourth parts.
Page 140
Bell-metal. Copper, 80 parts; tin, 20 parts. Or, copper, 72 parts; tin, 26 parts; zinc, 2 parts. Or,
copper 2; 1 of tin.
Brass. Copper, 66 parts; zinc, 32 parts; tin, 1 part; lead, 1 part.
Bronzes. Copper, 65 parts; zinc, 30 parts; tin, 5 parts. Or, copper, 85 parts; zinc, 10 parts; tin, 3
parts; lead, 2 parts.
German Silver. 52 parts of copper; 26 parts zinc; 22 parts nickel.
For Coating Mirrors. Tin, 70 parts; mercury, 30 parts.
Boiler Compounds.—To prevent scaling. Use common washing soda, or Glauber salts.
To Dissolve Celluloid.—Use 50 parts of alcohol and 5 parts of camphor for every 5 parts of
celluloid. When the celluloid is put into the solution it will dissolve it.
To Soften Celluloid. This may be done by simply heating, so it will bend, and by putting it in
steam, it can be worked like dough.
Clay Mixture for Forges.—Mix dry 20 parts of fire clay, 20 parts cast-iron turnings, one p.part
165
of
common salt, and 1/2 part sal ammoniac, and then add water while stirring, so as to form a mortar
of the proper consistency. The mixture will become very hard when heat is applied.
A Modeling Clay. This is made by mixing the clay with glycerine and afterwards adding vaseline.
If too much vaseline is added it becomes too soft.
Fluids for Cleaning Clothes, Furniture, Etc.—For Delicate Fabrics. Make strong decoction of
soap bark, and put into alcohol.
Non-inflammable Cleaner. Equal parts of acetone, ammonia and diluted alcohol.
Taking dried paint from clothing. Shake up 2 parts of ammonia water with 1 part of spirits of
turpentine.
Cleaning Furniture, etc. Unite 2.4 parts of wax; 9.4 parts of oil of turpentine; 42 parts acetic acid;
42 parts citric acid; 42 parts white soap. This must be well mingled before using.
Removing Rust from Iron or Steel. Rub the surface with oil of tartar. Or, apply turpentine or
kerosene, and after allowing to stand over night, clean with emery cloth.
For Removing Ink Stains from Silver. Use a paste made of chloride of lime and water.
To clean Silver-Plated Ware. Make a mixture of cream of tartar, 2 parts; levigated chalk, 2p. 166
parts;
and alum, 1 part. Grind up the alum and mix thoroughly.
Cleaning a Gas Stove. Make a solution of 9 parts of caustic soda and 150 parts of water, and put
the separate parts of the stove in the solution for an hour or two. The parts will come out looking
like new.
Cleaning Aluminum. A few drops of sulphuric acid in water will restore the luster to aluminum
ware.
Oil Eradicator. Soap spirits, 100 parts; ammonia solution, 25; acetic ether, 15 parts.
copper 2; 1 of tin.
Brass. Copper, 66 parts; zinc, 32 parts; tin, 1 part; lead, 1 part.
Bronzes. Copper, 65 parts; zinc, 30 parts; tin, 5 parts. Or, copper, 85 parts; zinc, 10 parts; tin, 3
parts; lead, 2 parts.
German Silver. 52 parts of copper; 26 parts zinc; 22 parts nickel.
For Coating Mirrors. Tin, 70 parts; mercury, 30 parts.
Boiler Compounds.—To prevent scaling. Use common washing soda, or Glauber salts.
To Dissolve Celluloid.—Use 50 parts of alcohol and 5 parts of camphor for every 5 parts of
celluloid. When the celluloid is put into the solution it will dissolve it.
To Soften Celluloid. This may be done by simply heating, so it will bend, and by putting it in
steam, it can be worked like dough.
Clay Mixture for Forges.—Mix dry 20 parts of fire clay, 20 parts cast-iron turnings, one p.part
165
of
common salt, and 1/2 part sal ammoniac, and then add water while stirring, so as to form a mortar
of the proper consistency. The mixture will become very hard when heat is applied.
A Modeling Clay. This is made by mixing the clay with glycerine and afterwards adding vaseline.
If too much vaseline is added it becomes too soft.
Fluids for Cleaning Clothes, Furniture, Etc.—For Delicate Fabrics. Make strong decoction of
soap bark, and put into alcohol.
Non-inflammable Cleaner. Equal parts of acetone, ammonia and diluted alcohol.
Taking dried paint from clothing. Shake up 2 parts of ammonia water with 1 part of spirits of
turpentine.
Cleaning Furniture, etc. Unite 2.4 parts of wax; 9.4 parts of oil of turpentine; 42 parts acetic acid;
42 parts citric acid; 42 parts white soap. This must be well mingled before using.
Removing Rust from Iron or Steel. Rub the surface with oil of tartar. Or, apply turpentine or
kerosene, and after allowing to stand over night, clean with emery cloth.
For Removing Ink Stains from Silver. Use a paste made of chloride of lime and water.
To clean Silver-Plated Ware. Make a mixture of cream of tartar, 2 parts; levigated chalk, 2p. 166
parts;
and alum, 1 part. Grind up the alum and mix thoroughly.
Cleaning a Gas Stove. Make a solution of 9 parts of caustic soda and 150 parts of water, and put
the separate parts of the stove in the solution for an hour or two. The parts will come out looking
like new.
Cleaning Aluminum. A few drops of sulphuric acid in water will restore the luster to aluminum
ware.
Oil Eradicator. Soap spirits, 100 parts; ammonia solution, 25; acetic ether, 15 parts.
Page 141
Disinfectants.—Camphor, 1 ounce; carbolic acid (75 per cent.), 12 ounces; aqua ammonia, 10
drachms; soft salt water, 8 drachms.
Water-Closet Deodorant. Ferric chloride, 4 parts; zinc chloride, 5 parts; aluminum chloride, 4
parts; calcium chloride, 5 parts; magnesium chloride, 3 parts; and water sufficient to make 90
parts. When all is dissolved add to each gallon 10 grains of thymol and a quarter-ounce of
rosemary that had been previously dissolved in six quarts of alcohol.
Odorless Disinfectants. Mercuric chloride, 1 part; cupric sulphate, 10 parts; zinc sulphate, 50
parts; sodium chloride, 65 parts; water to make 1,000 parts.
p. 167
Emery for Lapping Purposes. Fill a pint bottle with machine oil and emery flour, in the proportion
of 7 parts oil and 1 part emery. Allow it to stand for twenty minutes, after shaking up well, then
pour off half the contents, without disturbing the settlings, and the part so poured off contains
only the finest of the emery particles, and is the only part which should be used on the lapping
roller.
Explosives.—Common Gunpowder. Potassium nitrate, 75 parts; charcoal, 15 parts; sulphur, 10
parts.
Dynamite. 75 per cent. nitro-glycerine; 25 per cent. infusorial earth.
Giant Powder. 36 per cent. nitro-glycerine; 48 per cent. nitrate of potash; 8 per cent. of sulphur; 8
per cent. charcoal.
Fulminate. Chlorate of potassia, 6 parts; pure lampblack, 4 parts; sulphur, 1 part. A blow will
cause it to explode.
Files.—How to Keep Clean. Olive oil is the proper substance to rub over files, as this will
prevent the creases from filling up while in use, and preserve the file for a longer time, and also
enable it to do better cutting.
To Renew Old Files. Use a potash bath for boiling them in, and afterwards brush them well so as
p. 168
to get the creases clean. Then stretch a cotton cloth between two supports, and after plunging the
file into nitric acid, use the stretched cloth to wipe off the acid. The object is to remove the acid
from the ridges of the file, so the acid will only eat out or etch the deep portions between the
ridges, and not affect the edges or teeth.
Fire Proof Materials or Substances.—For Wood. For the kind where it is desired to apply with
a brush, use 100 parts sodium silicate; 50 parts of Spanish white, and 100 parts of glue. It must be
applied hot.
Another good preparation is made as follows: Sodium silicate, 350 parts; asbestos, powdered, 350
parts; and boiling water 1,000 parts.
For Coating Steel, etc. Silica, 50 parts; plastic fire clay, 10 parts; ball clay, 3 parts. To be
thoroughly mixed.
For Paper. Ammonium sulphate, 8 parts; boracic acid, 3 parts; borax, 2 parts; water, 100 parts.
This is applied in a liquid state to the paper surface.
drachms; soft salt water, 8 drachms.
Water-Closet Deodorant. Ferric chloride, 4 parts; zinc chloride, 5 parts; aluminum chloride, 4
parts; calcium chloride, 5 parts; magnesium chloride, 3 parts; and water sufficient to make 90
parts. When all is dissolved add to each gallon 10 grains of thymol and a quarter-ounce of
rosemary that had been previously dissolved in six quarts of alcohol.
Odorless Disinfectants. Mercuric chloride, 1 part; cupric sulphate, 10 parts; zinc sulphate, 50
parts; sodium chloride, 65 parts; water to make 1,000 parts.
p. 167
Emery for Lapping Purposes. Fill a pint bottle with machine oil and emery flour, in the proportion
of 7 parts oil and 1 part emery. Allow it to stand for twenty minutes, after shaking up well, then
pour off half the contents, without disturbing the settlings, and the part so poured off contains
only the finest of the emery particles, and is the only part which should be used on the lapping
roller.
Explosives.—Common Gunpowder. Potassium nitrate, 75 parts; charcoal, 15 parts; sulphur, 10
parts.
Dynamite. 75 per cent. nitro-glycerine; 25 per cent. infusorial earth.
Giant Powder. 36 per cent. nitro-glycerine; 48 per cent. nitrate of potash; 8 per cent. of sulphur; 8
per cent. charcoal.
Fulminate. Chlorate of potassia, 6 parts; pure lampblack, 4 parts; sulphur, 1 part. A blow will
cause it to explode.
Files.—How to Keep Clean. Olive oil is the proper substance to rub over files, as this will
prevent the creases from filling up while in use, and preserve the file for a longer time, and also
enable it to do better cutting.
To Renew Old Files. Use a potash bath for boiling them in, and afterwards brush them well so as
p. 168
to get the creases clean. Then stretch a cotton cloth between two supports, and after plunging the
file into nitric acid, use the stretched cloth to wipe off the acid. The object is to remove the acid
from the ridges of the file, so the acid will only eat out or etch the deep portions between the
ridges, and not affect the edges or teeth.
Fire Proof Materials or Substances.—For Wood. For the kind where it is desired to apply with
a brush, use 100 parts sodium silicate; 50 parts of Spanish white, and 100 parts of glue. It must be
applied hot.
Another good preparation is made as follows: Sodium silicate, 350 parts; asbestos, powdered, 350
parts; and boiling water 1,000 parts.
For Coating Steel, etc. Silica, 50 parts; plastic fire clay, 10 parts; ball clay, 3 parts. To be
thoroughly mixed.
For Paper. Ammonium sulphate, 8 parts; boracic acid, 3 parts; borax, 2 parts; water, 100 parts.
This is applied in a liquid state to the paper surface.
Page 142
Floor Dressings.—Oil Stain. Neats' foot oil, 1 part; cottonseed oil, 1 part; petroleum oil, 1 part.
This may be colored with anything desired, like burnt sienna, annatto, or other coloring material.
Ballroom Powder. Hard paraffine, 1 pound; powdered boric acid, 7 pounds; oil of lavender, 1
drachm; oil of neroli, 20 minims.
Foot Powders.—For Perspiring Feet. Balsam Peru, 15 minims; formic acid, 1 drachm; p.chloral
169
hydrate, 1 drachm; alcohol to make 3 ounces.
For Easing Feet. Tannaform, 1 drachm; talcum, 2 drachms; lycopodium, 30 grains.
Frost Bites. Carbolized water, 4 drachms; nitric acid, 1 drop; oil of geranium, 1 drop.
Glass.—To cut glass, hold it under water, and use a pair of shears.
To make a hole through glass, place a circle of moist earth on the glass, and form a hole in this
the diameter wanted for the hole, and in this hole pour molten lead, and the part touched by the
lead will fall out.
To Frost Glass. Cover it with a mixture of 6 ounces of magnesium sulphate, 2 ounces of dextrine,
and 20 ounces of water. This produces a fine effect.
To imitate ground glass, use a composition of sandarac, 2 1/2 ounces; mastic, 1/2 ounce; ether, 24
ounces; and benzine, 16 ounces.
Iron and Steel.—How to distinguish them. Wash the metal and put it into a solution of
bichromate of potash to which has been added a small amount of sulphuric acid. In a minute or so
take out the metal, wash and wipe it. Soft steel and cast iron will have the appearance of an ash-
p. 170
gray tint; tempered steels will be black; and puddled or refined irons will be nearly white and
have a metallic reflection.
To Harden Iron or Steel. If wrought iron, put in the charge 20 parts, by weight, of common salt, 2
parts of potassium cyanide, .3 part of potassium bichromate, .15 part of broken glass.
To harden cast iron, there should be added to the charge the following: To 60 parts of water, add
2 1/2 parts of vinegar, 3 parts of common salt, and .25 part of hydrochloric acid.
To soften castings: Heat them to a high temperature and cover them with fine coal dust and allow
to cool gradually.
Lacquers.—For Aluminum. Dissolve 100 parts of gum lac in 300 parts of ammonia and heat for
an hour moderately in a water bath. The aluminum must be well cleaned before applying. Heat
the aluminum plate afterwards.
For Brass. Make a compound as follows; Annatto, 1/4 ounce; saffro, 1/4 ounce; turmeric, 1 ounce;
seed lac, 3 ounces; and alcohol, 1 pint. Allow the mixture to stand for three days, then strain in
the vessel which contains the seed lac, and allow to stand until all is dissolved.
For Copper. Heat fine, thickly liquid amber varnish so it can be readily applied to the copper, and
this is allowed to dry. Then heat the coated object until it commences to smoke and turn brown
p. 171
Lubricants.—Heavy machinery oils. Use paraffine, 8 pounds; palm oil, 20 pounds; and
oleonaptha, 12 pounds. Dissolve the paraffine in the oleonaptha at a temperature of 160 degrees
This may be colored with anything desired, like burnt sienna, annatto, or other coloring material.
Ballroom Powder. Hard paraffine, 1 pound; powdered boric acid, 7 pounds; oil of lavender, 1
drachm; oil of neroli, 20 minims.
Foot Powders.—For Perspiring Feet. Balsam Peru, 15 minims; formic acid, 1 drachm; p.chloral
169
hydrate, 1 drachm; alcohol to make 3 ounces.
For Easing Feet. Tannaform, 1 drachm; talcum, 2 drachms; lycopodium, 30 grains.
Frost Bites. Carbolized water, 4 drachms; nitric acid, 1 drop; oil of geranium, 1 drop.
Glass.—To cut glass, hold it under water, and use a pair of shears.
To make a hole through glass, place a circle of moist earth on the glass, and form a hole in this
the diameter wanted for the hole, and in this hole pour molten lead, and the part touched by the
lead will fall out.
To Frost Glass. Cover it with a mixture of 6 ounces of magnesium sulphate, 2 ounces of dextrine,
and 20 ounces of water. This produces a fine effect.
To imitate ground glass, use a composition of sandarac, 2 1/2 ounces; mastic, 1/2 ounce; ether, 24
ounces; and benzine, 16 ounces.
Iron and Steel.—How to distinguish them. Wash the metal and put it into a solution of
bichromate of potash to which has been added a small amount of sulphuric acid. In a minute or so
take out the metal, wash and wipe it. Soft steel and cast iron will have the appearance of an ash-
p. 170
gray tint; tempered steels will be black; and puddled or refined irons will be nearly white and
have a metallic reflection.
To Harden Iron or Steel. If wrought iron, put in the charge 20 parts, by weight, of common salt, 2
parts of potassium cyanide, .3 part of potassium bichromate, .15 part of broken glass.
To harden cast iron, there should be added to the charge the following: To 60 parts of water, add
2 1/2 parts of vinegar, 3 parts of common salt, and .25 part of hydrochloric acid.
To soften castings: Heat them to a high temperature and cover them with fine coal dust and allow
to cool gradually.
Lacquers.—For Aluminum. Dissolve 100 parts of gum lac in 300 parts of ammonia and heat for
an hour moderately in a water bath. The aluminum must be well cleaned before applying. Heat
the aluminum plate afterwards.
For Brass. Make a compound as follows; Annatto, 1/4 ounce; saffro, 1/4 ounce; turmeric, 1 ounce;
seed lac, 3 ounces; and alcohol, 1 pint. Allow the mixture to stand for three days, then strain in
the vessel which contains the seed lac, and allow to stand until all is dissolved.
For Copper. Heat fine, thickly liquid amber varnish so it can be readily applied to the copper, and
this is allowed to dry. Then heat the coated object until it commences to smoke and turn brown
p. 171
Lubricants.—Heavy machinery oils. Use paraffine, 8 pounds; palm oil, 20 pounds; and
oleonaptha, 12 pounds. Dissolve the paraffine in the oleonaptha at a temperature of 160 degrees
Page 143
and then stir in the palm oil a little at a time.
For Cutting Tools. Heat six gallons of water and put in three and a half pounds of soft soap and a
half gallon of clean refuse oil. It should be well mixed.
For high-speed bearings. Use flaky graphite and kerosene oil. Apply this as soon as there is any
indication of heating in the bearings.
For lathe centers, one part of graphite and four parts of tallow thoroughly mixed and applied will
be very serviceable.
For Wooden Gears. Use tallow, 30 parts; palm oil; 20 parts; fish oil, 10 parts; and graphite, 20
parts.
Paper.—Fire Proof Paper.—Make the following solution: Ammonium sulphate, 8 parts; boracic
acid, 3 parts; water, 100 parts. Mix at a temperature of 120 degrees. Paper coated with this will
resist heat.
Filter Paper. Dip the paper into nitric acid of 1.433 specific gravity, and subsequently wash and
dry it. This makes a fine filtering body.
p. 172
Carbon Paper. A variety of substances may be used, such as fine soot or ivory black, ultramarine
or Paris blue. Mix either with fine grain soap, so it is of a uniform consistency and then apply to
the paper with a stiff brush, rubbing it in until it is evenly spread over the surface.
Tracing Paper. Take unsized paper and apply a coat of varnish made of equal parts of Canada
balsam and oil of turpentine. To increase the transparency give another coat. The sheets must be
well dried before using.
Photography.—Developers.
1. Pure water, 30 ounces; sulphite soda, 5 ounces; carbonate soda, 2 1/2 ounces.
2. Pure water, 24 ounces; oxalic acid, 15 grains; pyrogallic acid, 1 ounce.
To develop use of solution 1, 1 ounce; solution 2, 1/2 ounce; and water, 3 ounces.
Stock solutions for developing: Make solution No. 1 as follows: water, 32 ounces; tolidol, I
ounce; sodium sulphate, 1 1/2 ounces.
Solution No. 2: Water, 32 ounces; sodium sulphate.
Solution No. 3: Water, 32 ounces; sodium carbonate, from 4 to 6 ounces.
Fixing bath. Add two ounces of S. P. C. clarifier (acid bisulphate of sodium) solution to one quart
of hypo solution 1 in 5.
p. 173
Clearing solution. Saturated solution of alum, 20 ounces; and hydrochloric acid, 1 ounce. Varnish.
Brush over the negative a solution of equal parts of benzol and Japanese gold size.
Plasters.—Court Plaster. Use good quality silk, and on this spread a solution of isinglass
warmed. Dry and repeat several times, then apply several coats of balsam of Peru. Or,
For Cutting Tools. Heat six gallons of water and put in three and a half pounds of soft soap and a
half gallon of clean refuse oil. It should be well mixed.
For high-speed bearings. Use flaky graphite and kerosene oil. Apply this as soon as there is any
indication of heating in the bearings.
For lathe centers, one part of graphite and four parts of tallow thoroughly mixed and applied will
be very serviceable.
For Wooden Gears. Use tallow, 30 parts; palm oil; 20 parts; fish oil, 10 parts; and graphite, 20
parts.
Paper.—Fire Proof Paper.—Make the following solution: Ammonium sulphate, 8 parts; boracic
acid, 3 parts; water, 100 parts. Mix at a temperature of 120 degrees. Paper coated with this will
resist heat.
Filter Paper. Dip the paper into nitric acid of 1.433 specific gravity, and subsequently wash and
dry it. This makes a fine filtering body.
p. 172
Carbon Paper. A variety of substances may be used, such as fine soot or ivory black, ultramarine
or Paris blue. Mix either with fine grain soap, so it is of a uniform consistency and then apply to
the paper with a stiff brush, rubbing it in until it is evenly spread over the surface.
Tracing Paper. Take unsized paper and apply a coat of varnish made of equal parts of Canada
balsam and oil of turpentine. To increase the transparency give another coat. The sheets must be
well dried before using.
Photography.—Developers.
1. Pure water, 30 ounces; sulphite soda, 5 ounces; carbonate soda, 2 1/2 ounces.
2. Pure water, 24 ounces; oxalic acid, 15 grains; pyrogallic acid, 1 ounce.
To develop use of solution 1, 1 ounce; solution 2, 1/2 ounce; and water, 3 ounces.
Stock solutions for developing: Make solution No. 1 as follows: water, 32 ounces; tolidol, I
ounce; sodium sulphate, 1 1/2 ounces.
Solution No. 2: Water, 32 ounces; sodium sulphate.
Solution No. 3: Water, 32 ounces; sodium carbonate, from 4 to 6 ounces.
Fixing bath. Add two ounces of S. P. C. clarifier (acid bisulphate of sodium) solution to one quart
of hypo solution 1 in 5.
p. 173
Clearing solution. Saturated solution of alum, 20 ounces; and hydrochloric acid, 1 ounce. Varnish.
Brush over the negative a solution of equal parts of benzol and Japanese gold size.
Plasters.—Court Plaster. Use good quality silk, and on this spread a solution of isinglass
warmed. Dry and repeat several times, then apply several coats of balsam of Peru. Or,
Page 144
On muslin or silk properly stretched, apply a thin coating of smooth strained flour paste, and
when dry several coats of colorless gelatine are added. The gelatine is applied warm, and cooled
before the fabric is taken off.
Plating.—Bronze coating. For antiques, use vinegar, 1,000 parts; by weight, powdered
bloodstone, 125 parts; plumbago, 25 parts. Apply with brush.
For brass where a copper surface is desired, make a rouge with a little chloride of platinum and
water, and apply with a brush.
For gas fixtures. Use a bronze paint and mix with it five times its volume of spirit of turpentine,
and to this mixture add dried slaked lime, about 40 grains to the pint. Agitate well and decant the
clear liquid.
Coloring Metals.—Brilliant black for iron. Selenious acid, 6 parts; cupric sulphate, 10 parts;
water 1,000 parts; nitric acid, 5 parts.
p. 174
Blue-black. Selenious acid, 10 parts; nitric acid, 5 parts; cupric sulphate; water, 1,000 parts. The
colors will be varied dependent on the time the objects are immersed in the solution.
Brass may be colored brown by using an acid solution of nitrate of silver and bismuth; or a light
bronze by an acid solution of nitrate of silver and copper; or black by a solution of nitrate of
copper.
To copper plate aluminum, take 30 parts of sulphate of copper; 30 parts of cream of tartar; 25
parts of soda; and 1,000 parts of water. The article to be coated is merely dipped into the solution.
Polishers.—Floor Polish. Permanganate of potash in boiling water, applied to the floor hot, will
produce a stain, the color being dependent on the number of coats. The floor may them be
polished with beeswax and turpentine.
For Furniture. Make a paste of equal parts of plaster of paris, whiting, pumice stone and litharge,
mixed with Japan dryer, boiled linseed oil and turpentine. This may be colored to suit. This will
fill the cracks of the wood. Afterwards rub over the entire surface of the wood with a mixture of 1
part Japan, 2 of linseed oil, and three parts of turpentine, also colored, and after this has been
allowed to slightly harden, rub it off, and within a day or two it will have hardened sufficiently so
that the surface can be polished.
p. 175
Stove Polish. Ceresine, 12 parts; Japan wax, 10 parts; turpentine oil, 100 parts; lampblack, 12
parts; graphite, 10 parts. Melt the ceresine and wax together, and cool off partly, and then add and
stir in the graphite and lampblack which were previously mixed up with the turpentine.
Putty.—Black Putty. Whiting and antimony sulphide, and soluble glass. This can be polished
finely after hardening.
Common Putty. Whiting and linseed oil mixed up to form a dough.
Rust Preventive.—For Machinery. Dissolve an ounce of camphor in one pound of melted lard.
Mix with this enough fine black lead to give it an iron color. After it has been on for a day, rub off
with a cloth.
For tools, yellow vaseline is the best substance.
when dry several coats of colorless gelatine are added. The gelatine is applied warm, and cooled
before the fabric is taken off.
Plating.—Bronze coating. For antiques, use vinegar, 1,000 parts; by weight, powdered
bloodstone, 125 parts; plumbago, 25 parts. Apply with brush.
For brass where a copper surface is desired, make a rouge with a little chloride of platinum and
water, and apply with a brush.
For gas fixtures. Use a bronze paint and mix with it five times its volume of spirit of turpentine,
and to this mixture add dried slaked lime, about 40 grains to the pint. Agitate well and decant the
clear liquid.
Coloring Metals.—Brilliant black for iron. Selenious acid, 6 parts; cupric sulphate, 10 parts;
water 1,000 parts; nitric acid, 5 parts.
p. 174
Blue-black. Selenious acid, 10 parts; nitric acid, 5 parts; cupric sulphate; water, 1,000 parts. The
colors will be varied dependent on the time the objects are immersed in the solution.
Brass may be colored brown by using an acid solution of nitrate of silver and bismuth; or a light
bronze by an acid solution of nitrate of silver and copper; or black by a solution of nitrate of
copper.
To copper plate aluminum, take 30 parts of sulphate of copper; 30 parts of cream of tartar; 25
parts of soda; and 1,000 parts of water. The article to be coated is merely dipped into the solution.
Polishers.—Floor Polish. Permanganate of potash in boiling water, applied to the floor hot, will
produce a stain, the color being dependent on the number of coats. The floor may them be
polished with beeswax and turpentine.
For Furniture. Make a paste of equal parts of plaster of paris, whiting, pumice stone and litharge,
mixed with Japan dryer, boiled linseed oil and turpentine. This may be colored to suit. This will
fill the cracks of the wood. Afterwards rub over the entire surface of the wood with a mixture of 1
part Japan, 2 of linseed oil, and three parts of turpentine, also colored, and after this has been
allowed to slightly harden, rub it off, and within a day or two it will have hardened sufficiently so
that the surface can be polished.
p. 175
Stove Polish. Ceresine, 12 parts; Japan wax, 10 parts; turpentine oil, 100 parts; lampblack, 12
parts; graphite, 10 parts. Melt the ceresine and wax together, and cool off partly, and then add and
stir in the graphite and lampblack which were previously mixed up with the turpentine.
Putty.—Black Putty. Whiting and antimony sulphide, and soluble glass. This can be polished
finely after hardening.
Common Putty. Whiting and linseed oil mixed up to form a dough.
Rust Preventive.—For Machinery. Dissolve an ounce of camphor in one pound of melted lard.
Mix with this enough fine black lead to give it an iron color. After it has been on for a day, rub off
with a cloth.
For tools, yellow vaseline is the best substance.
Page 145
For zinc, clean the plate by immersing in water that has a small amount of sulphuric acid in it.
Then wash clean and coat with asphalt varnish.
Solders.—For aluminum. Use 5 parts of tin and 1 part of aluminum as the alloy, and solder with
the iron or a blow pipe.
Yellow hard solder. Brass, 3 1/2 parts; and zinc, 1 part.
For easily fusing, make an alloy of equal parts of brass and zinc.
For a white hard solder use brass, 12 parts; zinc, 1 part; and tin, 2 parts.
p. 176
Soldering Fluxes.—For soft soldering, use a solution of chloride of zinc and sal ammoniac.
Powdered rosin is also used.
For hard soldering, borax is used most frequently.
A mixture of equal parts of cryolite and barium chloride is very good in soldering bronze or
aluminum alloys.
Other hard solders are alloyed as follows: brass, 4 parts; and zinc, 5 parts. Also brass, 7 parts; and
zinc, 2 parts.
Steel Tempering-.-Heat the steel red hot and then plunge it into sealing wax.
For tempering small steel springs, they may be plunged into a fish oil which has a small amount
of rosin and tallow.
Varnishes.—Black Varnish. Shellac, 5 parts; borax, 2 parts; glycerine, 2 parts; aniline black, 6
parts; water, 45 parts. Dissolve the shellac in hot water and add the other ingredients at a
temperature of 200 degrees.
A good can varnish is made by dissolving 15 parts of shellac, and adding thereto 2 parts of Venice
turpentine, 8 parts of sandarac, and 75 parts of spirits.
A varnish for tin and other small metal boxes is made of 75 parts alcohol, which dissolves 15
parts of shellac, and 3 parts of turpentine.
Sealing Wax.—For modeling purposes. White wax, 20 parts; turpentine, 5 parts; sesamep. 177
oil, 2
parts; vermilion, 2 parts.
Ordinary Sealing. 4 pounds of shellac, 1 pound Venice turpentine, add 3 pounds of vermilion.
Unite by heat.
Then wash clean and coat with asphalt varnish.
Solders.—For aluminum. Use 5 parts of tin and 1 part of aluminum as the alloy, and solder with
the iron or a blow pipe.
Yellow hard solder. Brass, 3 1/2 parts; and zinc, 1 part.
For easily fusing, make an alloy of equal parts of brass and zinc.
For a white hard solder use brass, 12 parts; zinc, 1 part; and tin, 2 parts.
p. 176
Soldering Fluxes.—For soft soldering, use a solution of chloride of zinc and sal ammoniac.
Powdered rosin is also used.
For hard soldering, borax is used most frequently.
A mixture of equal parts of cryolite and barium chloride is very good in soldering bronze or
aluminum alloys.
Other hard solders are alloyed as follows: brass, 4 parts; and zinc, 5 parts. Also brass, 7 parts; and
zinc, 2 parts.
Steel Tempering-.-Heat the steel red hot and then plunge it into sealing wax.
For tempering small steel springs, they may be plunged into a fish oil which has a small amount
of rosin and tallow.
Varnishes.—Black Varnish. Shellac, 5 parts; borax, 2 parts; glycerine, 2 parts; aniline black, 6
parts; water, 45 parts. Dissolve the shellac in hot water and add the other ingredients at a
temperature of 200 degrees.
A good can varnish is made by dissolving 15 parts of shellac, and adding thereto 2 parts of Venice
turpentine, 8 parts of sandarac, and 75 parts of spirits.
A varnish for tin and other small metal boxes is made of 75 parts alcohol, which dissolves 15
parts of shellac, and 3 parts of turpentine.
Sealing Wax.—For modeling purposes. White wax, 20 parts; turpentine, 5 parts; sesamep. 177
oil, 2
parts; vermilion, 2 parts.
Ordinary Sealing. 4 pounds of shellac, 1 pound Venice turpentine, add 3 pounds of vermilion.
Unite by heat.
Page 146
Page 147
p. 178
Page 148
CHAPTER XVIToC
HANDY TABLES
TABLE OF WEIGHTS FOR ROUND AND SQUARE STEEL.
The Estimate is on the basis of Lineal Feet. 1 cu. ft. of Steel—490 lbs.
Weight in Pounds Weight in Pounds
Sizes in Sizes in
Inches Inches
Round Square Round Square
1/16 .110 .013 1 1/16 3.014 3.400
1/8 .042 .053 1 1/8 3.379 3.838
3/16 .094 .119 1 3/16 3.766 4.303
1/4 .167 .212 1 1/4 4.173 4.795
5/16 .261 .333 1 5/16 4.600 5.312
3/8 .375 .478 1 3/8 5.049 5.857
7/16 .511 .651 1 7/16 5.518 6.428
1/2 .667 .850 1 1/2 6.008 7.650
9/16 .845 1.026 1 9/16 6.520 7.650
5/8 1.043 1.328 1 5/8 7.051 8.301
11/16 1.262 1.608 1 11/16 7.604 8.978
3/4 1.502 1.913 1 3/4 8.178 10.410
13/16 1.773 2.245 1 13/16 8.773 11.170
7/8 2.044 2.603 1 7/8 9.388 11.950
15/16 2.347 2.989 1 15/16 10.020 12.760
1 2.670 3.400 2 10.680 13.600
p. 179
WEIGHT OF FLAT STEEL BARS.
Thickness
in Width
Inches
1/16 .212 .265 .32 .372 .425 .477 .53 .588 .63
HANDY TABLES
TABLE OF WEIGHTS FOR ROUND AND SQUARE STEEL.
The Estimate is on the basis of Lineal Feet. 1 cu. ft. of Steel—490 lbs.
Weight in Pounds Weight in Pounds
Sizes in Sizes in
Inches Inches
Round Square Round Square
1/16 .110 .013 1 1/16 3.014 3.400
1/8 .042 .053 1 1/8 3.379 3.838
3/16 .094 .119 1 3/16 3.766 4.303
1/4 .167 .212 1 1/4 4.173 4.795
5/16 .261 .333 1 5/16 4.600 5.312
3/8 .375 .478 1 3/8 5.049 5.857
7/16 .511 .651 1 7/16 5.518 6.428
1/2 .667 .850 1 1/2 6.008 7.650
9/16 .845 1.026 1 9/16 6.520 7.650
5/8 1.043 1.328 1 5/8 7.051 8.301
11/16 1.262 1.608 1 11/16 7.604 8.978
3/4 1.502 1.913 1 3/4 8.178 10.410
13/16 1.773 2.245 1 13/16 8.773 11.170
7/8 2.044 2.603 1 7/8 9.388 11.950
15/16 2.347 2.989 1 15/16 10.020 12.760
1 2.670 3.400 2 10.680 13.600
p. 179
WEIGHT OF FLAT STEEL BARS.
Thickness
in Width
Inches
1/16 .212 .265 .32 .372 .425 .477 .53 .588 .63
Page 149
1/8 .425 .53 .64 .745 .85 .955 1.06 1.17 1.27
3/16 .638 .797 .957 1.11 1.28 1.44 1.59 1.75 1.91
1/4 .85 1.06 1.28 1.49 1.70 1.91 2.12 2.34 2.55
5/16 1.06 1.33 1.59 1.86 2.12 2.39 2.65 2.92 3.19
3/8 1.28 1.59 1.92 2.23 2.55 2.87 3.19 3.51 3.83
7/16 1.49 1.85 2.23 2.60 2.98 3.35 3.72 4.09 4.46
1/2 1.70 2.12 2.55 2.98 3.40 3.83 4.25 4.67 5.10
9/16 1.92 2.39 2.87 3.35 3.83 4.30 4.78 5.26 5.74
5/8 2.12 2.65 3.19 3.72 4.25 4.78 5.31 5.84 6.38
11/16 2.34 2.92 3.51 4.09 4.67 5.26 5.84 6.43 7.02
3/4 2.55 3.19 3.83 4.47 5.10 5.75 6.38 7.02 7.65
13/16 2.76 3.45 4.14 4.48 5.53 6.21 6.90 7.60 8.29
7/8 2.98 3.72 4.47 5.20 5.95 6.69 7.44 8.18 8.93
15/16 3.19 3.99 4.78 5.58 6.38 7.18 7.97 8.77 9.57
1 3.40 4.25 5.10 5.95 6.80 7.65 8.50 9.35 10.20
p. 180
AVOIRDUPOIS WEIGHT.
For Merchandise of all kinds.
16 Drams (dr.) 1 Ounce (oz.)
make
16 Ounces make 1 Pound (pd.)
25 Pounds make 1 Quarter (qr.)
4 Quarters, or 100 1 Hundredweight
lbs., make (cwt.)
20 Hundredweights 1 Ton (T.)
make
2,240 Pounds make 1 Long ton (L. T.)
TROY WEIGHT.
For Gold, Silver, and Precious Metals.
24 Grains (gr.) make 1 Pennyweight
(pwt.)
20 Pennyweights make 1 Ounce (oz.)
12 Ounces make 1 Pound (pd.)
APOTHECARIES WEIGHT.
For Drugs, Medicals and Chemicals.
20 Grains (gr.) make 1 Scruple (sc.)
3/16 .638 .797 .957 1.11 1.28 1.44 1.59 1.75 1.91
1/4 .85 1.06 1.28 1.49 1.70 1.91 2.12 2.34 2.55
5/16 1.06 1.33 1.59 1.86 2.12 2.39 2.65 2.92 3.19
3/8 1.28 1.59 1.92 2.23 2.55 2.87 3.19 3.51 3.83
7/16 1.49 1.85 2.23 2.60 2.98 3.35 3.72 4.09 4.46
1/2 1.70 2.12 2.55 2.98 3.40 3.83 4.25 4.67 5.10
9/16 1.92 2.39 2.87 3.35 3.83 4.30 4.78 5.26 5.74
5/8 2.12 2.65 3.19 3.72 4.25 4.78 5.31 5.84 6.38
11/16 2.34 2.92 3.51 4.09 4.67 5.26 5.84 6.43 7.02
3/4 2.55 3.19 3.83 4.47 5.10 5.75 6.38 7.02 7.65
13/16 2.76 3.45 4.14 4.48 5.53 6.21 6.90 7.60 8.29
7/8 2.98 3.72 4.47 5.20 5.95 6.69 7.44 8.18 8.93
15/16 3.19 3.99 4.78 5.58 6.38 7.18 7.97 8.77 9.57
1 3.40 4.25 5.10 5.95 6.80 7.65 8.50 9.35 10.20
p. 180
AVOIRDUPOIS WEIGHT.
For Merchandise of all kinds.
16 Drams (dr.) 1 Ounce (oz.)
make
16 Ounces make 1 Pound (pd.)
25 Pounds make 1 Quarter (qr.)
4 Quarters, or 100 1 Hundredweight
lbs., make (cwt.)
20 Hundredweights 1 Ton (T.)
make
2,240 Pounds make 1 Long ton (L. T.)
TROY WEIGHT.
For Gold, Silver, and Precious Metals.
24 Grains (gr.) make 1 Pennyweight
(pwt.)
20 Pennyweights make 1 Ounce (oz.)
12 Ounces make 1 Pound (pd.)
APOTHECARIES WEIGHT.
For Drugs, Medicals and Chemicals.
20 Grains (gr.) make 1 Scruple (sc.)
Page 150
3 Scruples make 1 Dram (dr.)
8 Drams make 1 Pound (pd.)
12 Ounces make 1 Pound (pd.)
p. 181
LINEAR MEASURE.
For Surveyors' Use.
12 Inches make 1 Foot
3 Feet make 1 Yard
5 1/2 Yards make 1 Rod
40 Rods make 1 Furlong
8 Furlongs make 1 Mile
LONG MEASURE.
12 Inches make 1 Foot
3 Feet make 1 Yard
6 Feet make 1 Fathom
5 1/2 Yards make 1 Rod or pole
40 Poles make 1 Furlong
8 Furlongs make 1 Mile
3 Miles make 1 League
69 1/2 Leagues make 1 Degree
SQUARE MEASURE.
144 square inches make 1 square foot
9 square feet make 1 square yard
30 1/2 square yards make 1 square pole
40 square poles make 1 square rod
4 square rods make 1 acre
640 square acres make 1 acre mile
9 square feet make 1 square yard
p. 182
SOLID OR CUBIC MEASURE.
1,728 Cubic inches make 1 Cubic foot
27 Cubic feet make 1 Cubic yard
128 Cubic feet make 1 Cord of wood
24 3/4 Cubic feet make 1 Perch of
stone
8 Drams make 1 Pound (pd.)
12 Ounces make 1 Pound (pd.)
p. 181
LINEAR MEASURE.
For Surveyors' Use.
12 Inches make 1 Foot
3 Feet make 1 Yard
5 1/2 Yards make 1 Rod
40 Rods make 1 Furlong
8 Furlongs make 1 Mile
LONG MEASURE.
12 Inches make 1 Foot
3 Feet make 1 Yard
6 Feet make 1 Fathom
5 1/2 Yards make 1 Rod or pole
40 Poles make 1 Furlong
8 Furlongs make 1 Mile
3 Miles make 1 League
69 1/2 Leagues make 1 Degree
SQUARE MEASURE.
144 square inches make 1 square foot
9 square feet make 1 square yard
30 1/2 square yards make 1 square pole
40 square poles make 1 square rod
4 square rods make 1 acre
640 square acres make 1 acre mile
9 square feet make 1 square yard
p. 182
SOLID OR CUBIC MEASURE.
1,728 Cubic inches make 1 Cubic foot
27 Cubic feet make 1 Cubic yard
128 Cubic feet make 1 Cord of wood
24 3/4 Cubic feet make 1 Perch of
stone
Page 151
DRY MEASURE.
2 Pints make 1 Quart (qt.)
8 Quarts make 1 peck (pk.)
4 Pecks make 1 Bushel (bu.)
36 Bushels make 1 Chaldron (ch.)
LIQUID MEASURE.
4 Gills (g.) make 1 Pint (pt.)
4 Quarts make 1 Gallon (gal.)
31 1/2 Gallons make 1 Barrel (bbl.)
2 Bbls., or 63 gals., 1 Hogshead
make (hhd.)
PAPER MEASURE.
24 Sheets (sh.) make 1 Quire (qu.)
20 Quires make 1 Ream (r.)
10 Reams make 1 Bale (ba.) or
bundle.
p. 183
TABLE OF TEMPERATURES.
Greatest artificial
cold 220 degrees below Fahr.
“ natural “ 39 “ “ “
Mercury freezes 73.7 “ “ “
Mixture of snow
and salt 4 “ “ “
Greatest density of
water at 39.2 “ above “
Blood Heat 97.9 “ “ “
Alcohol boils 172.4 “ “ “
Water boils 212 “ “ “
Mercury boils 662 “ “ “
Sulphur boils 824 “ “ “
Silver melts 1,749 “ “ “
Cast iron melts 2,786 “ “ “
2 Pints make 1 Quart (qt.)
8 Quarts make 1 peck (pk.)
4 Pecks make 1 Bushel (bu.)
36 Bushels make 1 Chaldron (ch.)
LIQUID MEASURE.
4 Gills (g.) make 1 Pint (pt.)
4 Quarts make 1 Gallon (gal.)
31 1/2 Gallons make 1 Barrel (bbl.)
2 Bbls., or 63 gals., 1 Hogshead
make (hhd.)
PAPER MEASURE.
24 Sheets (sh.) make 1 Quire (qu.)
20 Quires make 1 Ream (r.)
10 Reams make 1 Bale (ba.) or
bundle.
p. 183
TABLE OF TEMPERATURES.
Greatest artificial
cold 220 degrees below Fahr.
“ natural “ 39 “ “ “
Mercury freezes 73.7 “ “ “
Mixture of snow
and salt 4 “ “ “
Greatest density of
water at 39.2 “ above “
Blood Heat 97.9 “ “ “
Alcohol boils 172.4 “ “ “
Water boils 212 “ “ “
Mercury boils 662 “ “ “
Sulphur boils 824 “ “ “
Silver melts 1,749 “ “ “
Cast iron melts 2,786 “ “ “
Page 152
STRENGTH OF VARIOUS METALS.
The tests are made by using a cubic inch of the metal and compressing it, and by trying to draw
apart a square inch of metal. Indicated in pounds
p. 184
Tension Compression
Aluminum 15,000 12,000
Brass, cast 24,000 30,000
Bronze, gun metal 32,000 20,000
“ manganese 60,000 120,000
“ phosphor 50,000 ......
Copper, cast 24,000 40,000
“ wire annealed 36,000 ......
“ unannealed 60,000 ......
Iron, cast 15,000 ......
“ “ annealed 60,000 80,000
“ “ unannealed 80,000 ......
“ wrought 48,000 46,000
Lead, cast 2,000 ......
Steel castings 70,000 70,000
“ plow 270,000 ......
“ structural 60,000 60,000
“ wire annealed 80,000 ......
“ crucible 180,000 ......
Tin 3,800 6,000
p. 185
FREEZING MIXTURES
Temperature Changes in
Degrees Fahrenheit
Mixtures From To
Common salt, 1 part;
snow, 3 parts 32 zero .0
Common salt, 1 part;
snow 1 part 32 - .4
Calcium chloride, 3
parts; snow 1 part 32 -27
The tests are made by using a cubic inch of the metal and compressing it, and by trying to draw
apart a square inch of metal. Indicated in pounds
p. 184
Tension Compression
Aluminum 15,000 12,000
Brass, cast 24,000 30,000
Bronze, gun metal 32,000 20,000
“ manganese 60,000 120,000
“ phosphor 50,000 ......
Copper, cast 24,000 40,000
“ wire annealed 36,000 ......
“ unannealed 60,000 ......
Iron, cast 15,000 ......
“ “ annealed 60,000 80,000
“ “ unannealed 80,000 ......
“ wrought 48,000 46,000
Lead, cast 2,000 ......
Steel castings 70,000 70,000
“ plow 270,000 ......
“ structural 60,000 60,000
“ wire annealed 80,000 ......
“ crucible 180,000 ......
Tin 3,800 6,000
p. 185
FREEZING MIXTURES
Temperature Changes in
Degrees Fahrenheit
Mixtures From To
Common salt, 1 part;
snow, 3 parts 32 zero .0
Common salt, 1 part;
snow 1 part 32 - .4
Calcium chloride, 3
parts; snow 1 part 32 -27
Page 153
Calcium chloride, 2
parts; snow 1 part 32 -44
Sal ammoniac, 5 parts;
salt-peter 5 parts;
water 16 parts 50 -10
Sal ammoniac, 1 parts;
salt-peter 1 part;
water 1 part 46 -11
Ammonium nitrate, 1
part; water 1 part 50 -3
Potassium hydrate, 4
parts; snow 3 parts 32 -35
IGNITION TEMPERATURES.
Phosphorus 120 degrees Fahrenheit
Bi-sulphide 300 “ “
of carbon
Gun-cotton 430 “ “
Nitro- 490 “ “
glycerine
Phosphorus, 500 “ “
amorphous
Rifle 550 “ “
powder
Charcoal 660 “ “
Dry pine 800 “ “
wood
Oak 900 “ “
parts; snow 1 part 32 -44
Sal ammoniac, 5 parts;
salt-peter 5 parts;
water 16 parts 50 -10
Sal ammoniac, 1 parts;
salt-peter 1 part;
water 1 part 46 -11
Ammonium nitrate, 1
part; water 1 part 50 -3
Potassium hydrate, 4
parts; snow 3 parts 32 -35
IGNITION TEMPERATURES.
Phosphorus 120 degrees Fahrenheit
Bi-sulphide 300 “ “
of carbon
Gun-cotton 430 “ “
Nitro- 490 “ “
glycerine
Phosphorus, 500 “ “
amorphous
Rifle 550 “ “
powder
Charcoal 660 “ “
Dry pine 800 “ “
wood
Oak 900 “ “
Page 154
p. 186
POWER AND HEAT EQUIVALENTS.
In studying matters pertaining to power and heat, certain terms are used, such as horsepower,
horsepower-hours, watts, watt-hours, kilowatt, kilowatt-hours, foot-pounds, joule, and B. T. U.
(British Thermal Unit).
The following tables give a comprehensive idea of the values of the different terms:
1 Horsepower- = 0.746 kilowatt-hour = 1,980,000 foot-
hour pounds of water evaporated at 212
degrees Fahrenheit, raised from 62
degrees to 212 degrees.
1 Kilowatt-hour = 1,000 watt-hours = 1.34 horse-power-
hours = 2,653,200 foot-pounds =
3,600,000 joules = 3,420 B. T. U. =
3.54 pounds of water evaporated at
212 degrees = 22.8 pounds of water
raised from 62 to 212 degrees.
1 Horsepower = 746 watts = 0.746 kilowatts.= 33,000
foot-pounds per second = 2,550 B.
T. U. per min. = 0.71 B. T. U. per
second = 2.64 pounds of water
evaporated per hour at 212 degrees.
1 Kilowatt = 1,000 watts = 1.34 horsepower =
2,653,200 foot-pounds per hour =
44,220 foot-pounds per min. = 737
foot-pounds per second = 3,420 B.
T. U. per hour = 57 B. T. U. per min.
= 0.95 B. T. U. per second = 3.54
p. 187
pounds of water evaporated per hour
at 212.
1 Watt = 1 joule per second = 0.00134 horse-
power = 0.001 kilowatt = 342 B. T.
U. per hour = 44.22 foot-pounds per
min. = 0.74 foot-pounds per second
= 0.0035 pounds of water
evaporated per hour at 212 degrees.
1 B. T. U. (British = 1,052 watt-seconds = 778 foot-pounds
Thermal Unit) = 0.252 calorie = 0.000292 kilowatt-
hours = 0.000391 horsepower-hour
= 0.00104 pounds of water
evaporated at 212 degrees.
1 Foot-pound = 1.36 joule = 0.000000377 kilowatt-
hour = 0.00129 B. T. U. =
0.0000005 horsepower-hour.
POWER AND HEAT EQUIVALENTS.
In studying matters pertaining to power and heat, certain terms are used, such as horsepower,
horsepower-hours, watts, watt-hours, kilowatt, kilowatt-hours, foot-pounds, joule, and B. T. U.
(British Thermal Unit).
The following tables give a comprehensive idea of the values of the different terms:
1 Horsepower- = 0.746 kilowatt-hour = 1,980,000 foot-
hour pounds of water evaporated at 212
degrees Fahrenheit, raised from 62
degrees to 212 degrees.
1 Kilowatt-hour = 1,000 watt-hours = 1.34 horse-power-
hours = 2,653,200 foot-pounds =
3,600,000 joules = 3,420 B. T. U. =
3.54 pounds of water evaporated at
212 degrees = 22.8 pounds of water
raised from 62 to 212 degrees.
1 Horsepower = 746 watts = 0.746 kilowatts.= 33,000
foot-pounds per second = 2,550 B.
T. U. per min. = 0.71 B. T. U. per
second = 2.64 pounds of water
evaporated per hour at 212 degrees.
1 Kilowatt = 1,000 watts = 1.34 horsepower =
2,653,200 foot-pounds per hour =
44,220 foot-pounds per min. = 737
foot-pounds per second = 3,420 B.
T. U. per hour = 57 B. T. U. per min.
= 0.95 B. T. U. per second = 3.54
p. 187
pounds of water evaporated per hour
at 212.
1 Watt = 1 joule per second = 0.00134 horse-
power = 0.001 kilowatt = 342 B. T.
U. per hour = 44.22 foot-pounds per
min. = 0.74 foot-pounds per second
= 0.0035 pounds of water
evaporated per hour at 212 degrees.
1 B. T. U. (British = 1,052 watt-seconds = 778 foot-pounds
Thermal Unit) = 0.252 calorie = 0.000292 kilowatt-
hours = 0.000391 horsepower-hour
= 0.00104 pounds of water
evaporated at 212 degrees.
1 Foot-pound = 1.36 joule = 0.000000377 kilowatt-
hour = 0.00129 B. T. U. =
0.0000005 horsepower-hour.
Page 155
1 Joule = 1 watt-second = 0.000000278 kilowatt-
hour = 0.00095 B. T. U. = 0.74 foot-
pounds.
hour = 0.00095 B. T. U. = 0.74 foot-
pounds.
Page 156
Page 157
p. 188
Page 158
CHAPTER XVIIToC
INVENTIONS AND PATENTS, AND INFORMATION ABOUT
THE RIGHTS AND DUTIES OF INVENTORS
AND WORKMEN
There is no trade or occupation which calls forth the inventive faculty to a greater degree than the
machinist's. Whether it be in the direction of making some new tool, needed in some special
work, or in devising a particular movement, or mechanical expedient, the machinist must be
prepared to meet the issues and decide on the best structural arrangement.
Opportunities also come daily to the workers in machine shops to a greater extent than other
artisans, because inventors in every line bring inventions to them to be built and experimentally
tested.
A knowledge of the rights and duties of inventors, and of the men who build the models, is very
desirable; and for your convenience we append the following information:
The inventor of a device is he who has conceived an idea and has put it into some concrete form.
A mere idea is not an invention.
The article so conceived and constructed, must be both new and useful. There must bep. 189
some
utility. It may be simply a toy, or something to amuse.
If A has an idea, and he employs and pays B to work out the device, and put it into practical
shape, A is the inventor, although B may have materially modified, or even wholly changed it. B
is simply the agent or tool to bring it to perfection, and his pay for doing the work is his
compensation.
An inventor has two years' time within which he may apply for a patent, after he has completed
his device and begun the sale of it. If he sells the article for more than two years before applying
for a patent, this will bar a grant.
Two or more inventors may apply for a patent, provided each has contributed something toward
bringing it to its perfected state. Each cannot apply separately. The patent issued will be owned
by them jointly.
Joint owners of a patent are not partners, unless they have signed partnership papers respecting
the patent. Because they are partners in some other enterprise, disconnected from the patent, that
does not constitute them partners in the patent. They are merely joint owners.
p. 190
If they have no special agreement with respect to the patent each can grant licenses to manufac
ture, independently of the others, without being compelled to account to the others, and each has
a right to sell his interest without asking permission of the others.
An inventor is one who has devised an invention. A patentee is one who owns a patent, or an
interest in one, be he the inventor or not.
INVENTIONS AND PATENTS, AND INFORMATION ABOUT
THE RIGHTS AND DUTIES OF INVENTORS
AND WORKMEN
There is no trade or occupation which calls forth the inventive faculty to a greater degree than the
machinist's. Whether it be in the direction of making some new tool, needed in some special
work, or in devising a particular movement, or mechanical expedient, the machinist must be
prepared to meet the issues and decide on the best structural arrangement.
Opportunities also come daily to the workers in machine shops to a greater extent than other
artisans, because inventors in every line bring inventions to them to be built and experimentally
tested.
A knowledge of the rights and duties of inventors, and of the men who build the models, is very
desirable; and for your convenience we append the following information:
The inventor of a device is he who has conceived an idea and has put it into some concrete form.
A mere idea is not an invention.
The article so conceived and constructed, must be both new and useful. There must bep. 189
some
utility. It may be simply a toy, or something to amuse.
If A has an idea, and he employs and pays B to work out the device, and put it into practical
shape, A is the inventor, although B may have materially modified, or even wholly changed it. B
is simply the agent or tool to bring it to perfection, and his pay for doing the work is his
compensation.
An inventor has two years' time within which he may apply for a patent, after he has completed
his device and begun the sale of it. If he sells the article for more than two years before applying
for a patent, this will bar a grant.
Two or more inventors may apply for a patent, provided each has contributed something toward
bringing it to its perfected state. Each cannot apply separately. The patent issued will be owned
by them jointly.
Joint owners of a patent are not partners, unless they have signed partnership papers respecting
the patent. Because they are partners in some other enterprise, disconnected from the patent, that
does not constitute them partners in the patent. They are merely joint owners.
p. 190
If they have no special agreement with respect to the patent each can grant licenses to manufac
ture, independently of the others, without being compelled to account to the others, and each has
a right to sell his interest without asking permission of the others.
An inventor is one who has devised an invention. A patentee is one who owns a patent, or an
interest in one, be he the inventor or not.
Page 159
The United States government does not grant Caveats. The only protection offered is by way of
patent.
A patent runs for a period of seventeen years, and may be renewed by act of Congress only, for a
further term of seven years.
An interference is a proceeding in the Patent Office to determine who is the first inventor of a
device. The following is a brief statement of the course followed:
When two or more applicants have applications pending, which, in the opinion of the Examiner,
appear to be similar, the Office may declare an interference.
If an applicant has an application pending, and the Examiner rejects it on reference to a patent
already issued, the applicant may demand an interference, and the Office will then grant a hearing
to determine which of the two is entitled to the patent.
The first step, after the declaration of interference, is to request that each applicantp. 191
file a
preliminary statement, under oath, in which he must set forth the following:
First: The date of conception of the invention.
Second: Date of the first reduction to writing, or the preparation of drawings.
Third: Date of making of the first model or device.
Fourth: When a complete machine was first produced.
These statements are filed in the Patent Office, and opened on the same day, and times are then
set for the respective parties to take testimony.
If one of the parties was the first to conceive and reduce to practice, as well as the first to file his
application, he will be adjudged to be the first inventor, without necessitating the taking of
testimony.
If, on the other hand, one was the first to conceive, and the other the first to file, then testimony
will be required to determine the question of invention.
The granting of a patent is not conclusive that the patentee was, in reality, the first inventor. The
law is that the patent must issue to the first inventor, and if it can be proven that another party was
p. 192
the first, a new patent will issue to the one who thus establishes his right. The Commissioner of
Patents has no right to take away the patent first issued. Only the Courts are competent to do this.
A patent is granted for the right to make, to use and to vend.
An owner of a patent cannot sell the right only to make, or to sell, or to use. Such a document
would be a simple license, only, for that particular purpose.
A patent may be sold giving a divided, or an undivided right.
A divided right is where a State, or any other particular territorial right is granted. An undivided
right is a quarter, or a half, or some other portion in the patent itself.
If an inventor assigns his invention, and states in the granting clause that he conveys "all his right
and title in and to the invention," or words to that effect, he conveys all his rights throughout the
patent.
A patent runs for a period of seventeen years, and may be renewed by act of Congress only, for a
further term of seven years.
An interference is a proceeding in the Patent Office to determine who is the first inventor of a
device. The following is a brief statement of the course followed:
When two or more applicants have applications pending, which, in the opinion of the Examiner,
appear to be similar, the Office may declare an interference.
If an applicant has an application pending, and the Examiner rejects it on reference to a patent
already issued, the applicant may demand an interference, and the Office will then grant a hearing
to determine which of the two is entitled to the patent.
The first step, after the declaration of interference, is to request that each applicantp. 191
file a
preliminary statement, under oath, in which he must set forth the following:
First: The date of conception of the invention.
Second: Date of the first reduction to writing, or the preparation of drawings.
Third: Date of making of the first model or device.
Fourth: When a complete machine was first produced.
These statements are filed in the Patent Office, and opened on the same day, and times are then
set for the respective parties to take testimony.
If one of the parties was the first to conceive and reduce to practice, as well as the first to file his
application, he will be adjudged to be the first inventor, without necessitating the taking of
testimony.
If, on the other hand, one was the first to conceive, and the other the first to file, then testimony
will be required to determine the question of invention.
The granting of a patent is not conclusive that the patentee was, in reality, the first inventor. The
law is that the patent must issue to the first inventor, and if it can be proven that another party was
p. 192
the first, a new patent will issue to the one who thus establishes his right. The Commissioner of
Patents has no right to take away the patent first issued. Only the Courts are competent to do this.
A patent is granted for the right to make, to use and to vend.
An owner of a patent cannot sell the right only to make, or to sell, or to use. Such a document
would be a simple license, only, for that particular purpose.
A patent may be sold giving a divided, or an undivided right.
A divided right is where a State, or any other particular territorial right is granted. An undivided
right is a quarter, or a half, or some other portion in the patent itself.
If an inventor assigns his invention, and states in the granting clause that he conveys "all his right
and title in and to the invention," or words to that effect, he conveys all his rights throughout the
Page 160
world.
If the conveyance says, "all rights and title in and throughout the United States," he thereby
reserves all other countries.
If a patent is issued, and the number and date of the patent are given, the assignment conveys the
patent for the United States only, unless foreign countries are specifically mentioned.
To convey an invention or patent, some definite number or filing date must be givenp.in
193
the
document, with sufficient clearness and certainty to show the intent of the assignor.
An invention does not depend on quantity, but on quality. It is that which produces a new and a
useful result.
In the United States patents are granted for the purpose of promoting the useful arts and sciences.
In England, and in many other foreign countries, patents are granted, not on account of any merit
on the part of the inventor, but as a favor of the crown, or sovereign.
Originally patents were granted by the crown for the exclusive privilege in dealing in any
commodity, and for this right a royal fee was exacted. From this fact the term royalty originated.
An international agreement is now in force among nearly all countries, which respects the filing
of an application in any country, for a period of one year in the other countries.
In making an application for a patent, a petition is required, a specification showing its object,
use, and particular construction, followed by a claim, or claims, and accompanied by a drawing,
if the invention will permit of it, (which must be made in black, with India ink), and an oath.
p. 194
The oath requires the following assertions: That the applicant is the first and original inventor of
the device, and that he does not know and does not believe the same was ever known or used
before his invention or more than two years before his application.
He must also further allege that the invention was not patented or described in any printed
publication here or abroad, and not manufactured more than two years prior to the application,
and that he has not made an application, nor authorized any one to do so more than two years
prior to his application.
The first Government fee is $15, payable at the time of filing, and the second and final fee is $20,
payable at the time the patent is ordered to issue.
The filing of an application for patent is a secret act, and the Patent Office will not give any
information to others concerning it, prior to the issue of the patent
If the conveyance says, "all rights and title in and throughout the United States," he thereby
reserves all other countries.
If a patent is issued, and the number and date of the patent are given, the assignment conveys the
patent for the United States only, unless foreign countries are specifically mentioned.
To convey an invention or patent, some definite number or filing date must be givenp.in
193
the
document, with sufficient clearness and certainty to show the intent of the assignor.
An invention does not depend on quantity, but on quality. It is that which produces a new and a
useful result.
In the United States patents are granted for the purpose of promoting the useful arts and sciences.
In England, and in many other foreign countries, patents are granted, not on account of any merit
on the part of the inventor, but as a favor of the crown, or sovereign.
Originally patents were granted by the crown for the exclusive privilege in dealing in any
commodity, and for this right a royal fee was exacted. From this fact the term royalty originated.
An international agreement is now in force among nearly all countries, which respects the filing
of an application in any country, for a period of one year in the other countries.
In making an application for a patent, a petition is required, a specification showing its object,
use, and particular construction, followed by a claim, or claims, and accompanied by a drawing,
if the invention will permit of it, (which must be made in black, with India ink), and an oath.
p. 194
The oath requires the following assertions: That the applicant is the first and original inventor of
the device, and that he does not know and does not believe the same was ever known or used
before his invention or more than two years before his application.
He must also further allege that the invention was not patented or described in any printed
publication here or abroad, and not manufactured more than two years prior to the application,
and that he has not made an application, nor authorized any one to do so more than two years
prior to his application.
The first Government fee is $15, payable at the time of filing, and the second and final fee is $20,
payable at the time the patent is ordered to issue.
The filing of an application for patent is a secret act, and the Patent Office will not give any
information to others concerning it, prior to the issue of the patent
Page 161
Page 162
p. 195
GLOSSARY OF WORDS
USED IN TEXT OF THIS VOLUMEToC
Abrupt. Suddenly; coming without warning.
Abrasive. A material which wears away.
Actuate. Influenced, as by sudden motive; incited to action.
Accumulate. To bring together; to amass; to collect.
Acoustics. The branch of physics which treats of sound.
Adhesion. To hold together; a molecular force by means of which particles stick together.
Affinity. Any natural drawing together; the property or force in chemicals to move toward
each other.
Aggravate. To incite; to make worse or more burdensome.
Alloy. A combination of two or more metals.
Altitude. Height; a vertical distance above any point.
Alkali. Any substance which will neutralize an acid, as lime, magnesia, and the like.
Amalgam. Any compound of metal which has mercury as one of the elements.
Amiss. Wrong, fault, misdeed.
Annealing. A process of gradually heating and cooling metals, whereby hardness and
toughness are brought about.
Angle plate. A metal structure which has two bodies, or limbs, at right angles to each other.
Analysis. The separating of substances into their elementary forms.
Anchor bolt. A structure intended to be placed in a hole in a wall, and held there by a brew
which expands a part of the structure. p. 196
Apprentice. One who is learning a trade or occupation.
Artificial. That which resembles the original; made in imitation of.
Arbor. A shaft, spindle, mandrel, or axle.
Armature. A metallic body within the magnetic field of a magnet.
Arbitrary. Stubborn determination. Doing a thing without regard to consequences.
Artisan. One skilled in any mechanical art.
Attributable. That which belongs to or is associated with.
Automatically. Operating by its own structure, or without outside aid.
Augmented. Added to; to increase.
Auxiliary. To aid; giving or furnishing aid.
Avoirdupois. The system of weights, of which the unit is sixteen ounces.
Back-saw. A saw which has a rib at its upper margin.
Barleycorn. A grain of barley.
Bastard. A coarse-grained file.
B. T. U. British Thermal Unit.
Back-gear. That gear on a lathe for changing the feed.
Bevel. Not in a right line; slanting; oblique.
Bibb. A form of water faucet.
Bit, or bitt. A form of tool for cutting purposes on a lathe, planer, shaper, or drilling machine.
Borax. A white crystalline compound, of a sweetish taste. Chemically it is sodium
biborate.
Buffs. Usually a wheel covered with leather or cloth, and having emery dust on it, for
fine polishing purposes.
Buffeted. Thrown back.
Bronze. An alloy of copper and tin.
Calcium. Lime.
Cant. A form of lever. p. 197
Carbonate. A salt of carbonic acid.
Caustic. Capable of corroding or eating away.
Capillary. That quality of a liquid which causes it to move upwardly or along a solid with
which it is in contact.
Caliper. An instrument for spanning inside and outside dimensions.
Centripetal. The force which tends to draw inwardly, or to the center.
GLOSSARY OF WORDS
USED IN TEXT OF THIS VOLUMEToC
Abrupt. Suddenly; coming without warning.
Abrasive. A material which wears away.
Actuate. Influenced, as by sudden motive; incited to action.
Accumulate. To bring together; to amass; to collect.
Acoustics. The branch of physics which treats of sound.
Adhesion. To hold together; a molecular force by means of which particles stick together.
Affinity. Any natural drawing together; the property or force in chemicals to move toward
each other.
Aggravate. To incite; to make worse or more burdensome.
Alloy. A combination of two or more metals.
Altitude. Height; a vertical distance above any point.
Alkali. Any substance which will neutralize an acid, as lime, magnesia, and the like.
Amalgam. Any compound of metal which has mercury as one of the elements.
Amiss. Wrong, fault, misdeed.
Annealing. A process of gradually heating and cooling metals, whereby hardness and
toughness are brought about.
Angle plate. A metal structure which has two bodies, or limbs, at right angles to each other.
Analysis. The separating of substances into their elementary forms.
Anchor bolt. A structure intended to be placed in a hole in a wall, and held there by a brew
which expands a part of the structure. p. 196
Apprentice. One who is learning a trade or occupation.
Artificial. That which resembles the original; made in imitation of.
Arbor. A shaft, spindle, mandrel, or axle.
Armature. A metallic body within the magnetic field of a magnet.
Arbitrary. Stubborn determination. Doing a thing without regard to consequences.
Artisan. One skilled in any mechanical art.
Attributable. That which belongs to or is associated with.
Automatically. Operating by its own structure, or without outside aid.
Augmented. Added to; to increase.
Auxiliary. To aid; giving or furnishing aid.
Avoirdupois. The system of weights, of which the unit is sixteen ounces.
Back-saw. A saw which has a rib at its upper margin.
Barleycorn. A grain of barley.
Bastard. A coarse-grained file.
B. T. U. British Thermal Unit.
Back-gear. That gear on a lathe for changing the feed.
Bevel. Not in a right line; slanting; oblique.
Bibb. A form of water faucet.
Bit, or bitt. A form of tool for cutting purposes on a lathe, planer, shaper, or drilling machine.
Borax. A white crystalline compound, of a sweetish taste. Chemically it is sodium
biborate.
Buffs. Usually a wheel covered with leather or cloth, and having emery dust on it, for
fine polishing purposes.
Buffeted. Thrown back.
Bronze. An alloy of copper and tin.
Calcium. Lime.
Cant. A form of lever. p. 197
Carbonate. A salt of carbonic acid.
Caustic. Capable of corroding or eating away.
Capillary. That quality of a liquid which causes it to move upwardly or along a solid with
which it is in contact.
Caliper. An instrument for spanning inside and outside dimensions.
Centripetal. The force which tends to draw inwardly, or to the center.
Page 163
Centrifugal. The outwardly-moving force from a body.
Centering. To form a point equidistant from a circular line.
Chloride. A compound of chlorine with one or more positive elements, such as, for
instance, salt.
Circular pitch. The measurement around a gear taken at a point midway between the base and
end of the teeth.
Circumference. The outside of a circular body.
Clef. A character placed on a staff of music to determine the pitch.
Clutch. A mechanical element for attaching one part to another.
Chuck, A disk of metal to be attached to the live spindle of a lathe, and which has on its
Independent. face a set of dogs which move radially independently of each other.
Chuck, A disk to be attached as above, provided with dogs which are connected so they
Universal. move radially in unison with each other.
Classified. Arranged in order, in such a manner that each of a kind is placed under a suitable
heading.
Clearance. To provide a space behind the cutting edge of a tool which will not touch the
work being cut.
Consistency. Harmonious; not contradictory.
Coherer. That instrument in a wireless telegraphy apparatus which detects the electrical
impulses. p. 198
Commutator. The cylindrical structure on the end of an armature, which is designed to change
the polarity of the current.
Concentrated. Brought together at one point.
Coinage. The system of making money from metals.
Compound. The unity of two or more elements.
Constant. Being insistent and consistent; also a term to be used in a problem which never
varies.
Conversion. The change from one state to another.
Cone. A body larger at one end than at another; usually applied to a form which is
cylindrical in shape but tapering, from end to end.
Compression. The bringing together of particles, or molecules.
Convolute. A spiral form of winding, like a watch spring.
Coiled. A form of winding, like a string wound around a bobbin.
Conductivity. Applied generally to the quality of material which will carry a current of
electricity; also a quality of a material to convey heat.
Cohesion. The force by which the molecules of the same kind are held together.
Concentric. A line which is equidistant at all points from a center.
Confined. Held within certain bounds.
Corpuscular. Molecular or atomic form.
Converge. To come together from all points.
Concave. A surface which is depressed or sunken.
Convex. A surface which is raised, or projects beyond the surface of the edges.
Component. One of the elements in a problem or in a compound.
Coefficient. A number indicating the degree or quality possessed by a substance. An
invariable unit.
Cube. A body having six equal sides. p. 199
Cross-section. A term used to designate that line which is at right angles to the line running
from the view point.
Cross slide. The metal plate on a lathe which holds the tool post, and which is controlled,
usually, by a screw.
Contiguous. Close to; near at hand.
Countersink. The depression around a bore.
Collet. A collar, clutch or clamping piece, which has jaws to hold a bar or rod.
Countershaft. A shaft which has thereon pulleys or gears to connect operatively with the gears
or pulleys on a machine, and change the speed.
Conducive. Tending to; promotive of a result.
Corundum. An extremely hard aluminum oxide used for polishing.
Cold chisel. A term applied to an extremely hard chisel used for cutting and chipping metal.
Combustion. The action or operation of burning.
Centering. To form a point equidistant from a circular line.
Chloride. A compound of chlorine with one or more positive elements, such as, for
instance, salt.
Circular pitch. The measurement around a gear taken at a point midway between the base and
end of the teeth.
Circumference. The outside of a circular body.
Clef. A character placed on a staff of music to determine the pitch.
Clutch. A mechanical element for attaching one part to another.
Chuck, A disk of metal to be attached to the live spindle of a lathe, and which has on its
Independent. face a set of dogs which move radially independently of each other.
Chuck, A disk to be attached as above, provided with dogs which are connected so they
Universal. move radially in unison with each other.
Classified. Arranged in order, in such a manner that each of a kind is placed under a suitable
heading.
Clearance. To provide a space behind the cutting edge of a tool which will not touch the
work being cut.
Consistency. Harmonious; not contradictory.
Coherer. That instrument in a wireless telegraphy apparatus which detects the electrical
impulses. p. 198
Commutator. The cylindrical structure on the end of an armature, which is designed to change
the polarity of the current.
Concentrated. Brought together at one point.
Coinage. The system of making money from metals.
Compound. The unity of two or more elements.
Constant. Being insistent and consistent; also a term to be used in a problem which never
varies.
Conversion. The change from one state to another.
Cone. A body larger at one end than at another; usually applied to a form which is
cylindrical in shape but tapering, from end to end.
Compression. The bringing together of particles, or molecules.
Convolute. A spiral form of winding, like a watch spring.
Coiled. A form of winding, like a string wound around a bobbin.
Conductivity. Applied generally to the quality of material which will carry a current of
electricity; also a quality of a material to convey heat.
Cohesion. The force by which the molecules of the same kind are held together.
Concentric. A line which is equidistant at all points from a center.
Confined. Held within certain bounds.
Corpuscular. Molecular or atomic form.
Converge. To come together from all points.
Concave. A surface which is depressed or sunken.
Convex. A surface which is raised, or projects beyond the surface of the edges.
Component. One of the elements in a problem or in a compound.
Coefficient. A number indicating the degree or quality possessed by a substance. An
invariable unit.
Cube. A body having six equal sides. p. 199
Cross-section. A term used to designate that line which is at right angles to the line running
from the view point.
Cross slide. The metal plate on a lathe which holds the tool post, and which is controlled,
usually, by a screw.
Contiguous. Close to; near at hand.
Countersink. The depression around a bore.
Collet. A collar, clutch or clamping piece, which has jaws to hold a bar or rod.
Countershaft. A shaft which has thereon pulleys or gears to connect operatively with the gears
or pulleys on a machine, and change the speed.
Conducive. Tending to; promotive of a result.
Corundum. An extremely hard aluminum oxide used for polishing.
Cold chisel. A term applied to an extremely hard chisel used for cutting and chipping metal.
Combustion. The action or operation of burning.
Page 164
Conjunctively. Acting together.
Comparatively. Similitude or resemblance, one with another.
Cotter. A key to prevent a wheel turning on its shaft.
Dead center. A term used to designate the inoperative point of the crank.
Depicting. Showing; setting forth.
Deodorant. A substance which will decompose odors.
Developer. A chemical which will bring out the picture in making the film or plate in
photography.
Decimeter. The length of one-tenth of a meter in the metric system.
Decameter. The length of ten meters in the metric system.
Defective. Not perfect; wrong in some particular.
Diaphragm. A plate, such as used in a telephone system, to receive and transmit vibrations. p. 200
Dissolving. To change from a solid to a liquid condition.
Division plate. A perforated plate in a gear-cutting machine, to aid in dividing the teeth of a
wheel.
Dispelled. To drive away or scatter.
Disinfectant. A material which will destroy harmful germs.
Diametral pitch. The number of teeth in a gear as calculated on the pitch line.
Dimension. Measurement; size.
Ductility. That property of metal which permits it to be drawn out, or worked.
Dividers. An instrument, like a compass, for stepping off measurements, or making circles.
Diverge. Spreading out from a common point.
Drift. A cutting tool for smoothing a hole in a piece of metal.
Duplex. Two; double.
Dynamite. An explosive composed of an absorbent, like earth, combined with nitro-
glycerine.
Dynamometer. An instrument for measuring power developed.
Eccentric. Out of center.
Echoes. The reflection of sound.
Effervesce. The action due to the unity of two opposite chemicals.
Efficiency. The term applied to the quality of effectiveness.
Ellipse. A form which is oblong, or having a shape, more or less, like the longitudinal
section of an egg.
Electrolytic. The action of a current of water passing through a liquid, and decomposing it,
and carrying elements from one electrode to the other.
Elasticity. The quality in certain substances to be drawn out of their normal shape, and by
virtue of which they will resume their original form when released. p. 201
Embedded. To be placed within a body or substance.
Emerge. To come out of.
Emphasize. To lay particular stress upon.
Emery. A hard substance, usually some of the finely divided precious stones, and used
for polishing and grinding purposes.
Enormous. A large amount; great in size.
Enunciated. Proclaimed; given out.
Equalization. To put on an even basis; to make the same comparatively.
Eradicator. To take out; to cause to disappear.
Escapement. A piece of mechanism devised for the purpose of giving a uniform rate of speed
to the movement of wheels.
Essential. The important feature; the principal thing.
Expansion. To enlarge; growing greater.
Equidistant. The same distance from a certain point.
Evolved. Brought out of; the result of certain considerations.
Facet. A face.
Facilitated. Made easy.
Flux. Any substance which will aid in uniting material under heat. The act of uniting.
Fluid. Any substance in which the particles freely interchange positions.
Flour emery. Emery which is finely ground.
Flexible. The quality of any material which will permit bending.
Float cut. The term when applied to a tool where the cut is an easy one.
Comparatively. Similitude or resemblance, one with another.
Cotter. A key to prevent a wheel turning on its shaft.
Dead center. A term used to designate the inoperative point of the crank.
Depicting. Showing; setting forth.
Deodorant. A substance which will decompose odors.
Developer. A chemical which will bring out the picture in making the film or plate in
photography.
Decimeter. The length of one-tenth of a meter in the metric system.
Decameter. The length of ten meters in the metric system.
Defective. Not perfect; wrong in some particular.
Diaphragm. A plate, such as used in a telephone system, to receive and transmit vibrations. p. 200
Dissolving. To change from a solid to a liquid condition.
Division plate. A perforated plate in a gear-cutting machine, to aid in dividing the teeth of a
wheel.
Dispelled. To drive away or scatter.
Disinfectant. A material which will destroy harmful germs.
Diametral pitch. The number of teeth in a gear as calculated on the pitch line.
Dimension. Measurement; size.
Ductility. That property of metal which permits it to be drawn out, or worked.
Dividers. An instrument, like a compass, for stepping off measurements, or making circles.
Diverge. Spreading out from a common point.
Drift. A cutting tool for smoothing a hole in a piece of metal.
Duplex. Two; double.
Dynamite. An explosive composed of an absorbent, like earth, combined with nitro-
glycerine.
Dynamometer. An instrument for measuring power developed.
Eccentric. Out of center.
Echoes. The reflection of sound.
Effervesce. The action due to the unity of two opposite chemicals.
Efficiency. The term applied to the quality of effectiveness.
Ellipse. A form which is oblong, or having a shape, more or less, like the longitudinal
section of an egg.
Electrolytic. The action of a current of water passing through a liquid, and decomposing it,
and carrying elements from one electrode to the other.
Elasticity. The quality in certain substances to be drawn out of their normal shape, and by
virtue of which they will resume their original form when released. p. 201
Embedded. To be placed within a body or substance.
Emerge. To come out of.
Emphasize. To lay particular stress upon.
Emery. A hard substance, usually some of the finely divided precious stones, and used
for polishing and grinding purposes.
Enormous. A large amount; great in size.
Enunciated. Proclaimed; given out.
Equalization. To put on an even basis; to make the same comparatively.
Eradicator. To take out; to cause to disappear.
Escapement. A piece of mechanism devised for the purpose of giving a uniform rate of speed
to the movement of wheels.
Essential. The important feature; the principal thing.
Expansion. To enlarge; growing greater.
Equidistant. The same distance from a certain point.
Evolved. Brought out of; the result of certain considerations.
Facet. A face.
Facilitated. Made easy.
Flux. Any substance which will aid in uniting material under heat. The act of uniting.
Fluid. Any substance in which the particles freely interchange positions.
Flour emery. Emery which is finely ground.
Flexible. The quality of any material which will permit bending.
Float cut. The term when applied to a tool where the cut is an easy one.
Page 165
Flexure. The springing yield in a substance.
Foot pound. A unit, usually determined by the number of pounds raised one foot in one
second of time. 550 pounds raised one foot in one second of time, means so
many foot pounds. p. 202
Formulate. To arrange; to put in order from a certain consideration of things.
Focus. The center of a circle.
Foci. One of the points of an ellipse.
Formation. The structure of a machine or of a compound.
Fractured. Broken.
Fundamental. Basis; the first form; the original structure.
Fulcrum. The resting place for a lever.
Fusion. Melting. The change of a metal from a solid to a liquid state by heat.
Fusible. That which is capable of being melted.
Fulminate. A substance that will ignite or explode by heat or friction.
Gamut. The scale of sound or light, or vibrations of any kind.
Gear. A toothed wheel of any kind.
Gelatine. A tasteless transparent substance obtained from animal tissues.
Globular. Having the form of a globe or ball.
Glazed. Having a glossary appearance.
Graphite. A metallic, iron-black variety of carbon.
Graduated. To arrange in steps; a regular order or series.
Grinder. Any mechanism which abrades or wears down a substance.
Gullet. The curved notches or grooves between projecting parts of mechanism.
Harmonizing. To make the various parts act together in unison.
H. P. The symbol for horse power.
Helico. A form resembling that of the threads of a screw.
Hexagon. Six-sided.
Heliograph. The system of signaling by using flashlights.
Horizontal. Things level with the surface of the earth; like the surface of water.
Hydrogen. The lightest of all the elements. A tasteless, colorless substance. p. 203
Import. To bear, or convey as a meaning.
Impulse. The application of an impelling force.
Impact. A collision; striking against.
Invariably. Constant; without failing.
Inertia. The quality of all materials to remain at rest, or to continue in motion, unless
acted on by some external force.
Intersect. To divide at a certain point. The crossing point of one line over another.
Interval. A space; a distance between.
Intensity. Strained or exerted to a high degree.
Interstices. The spaces between the molecules or atoms in a substance.
Intermediate. Between.
Intermeshing. The locking together of gear wheels.
Internal. That which is within.
Inability. Unable to perform or do.
Initial. The first; at the start.
Increment. One of the parts which go to make up the whole.
Inference. Drawing a conclusion from a certain state of things.
Insoluble. A substance which cannot be liquefied by a liquid.
Indentations. Recesses, or cut-out parts or places.
Induction. The movement of electricity through the air from one conductor to another.
Inflammable. That which will burn.
Inclining. At an angle; sloping.
Inconsequential. Not of much importance.
Isometric. That view of a figure which will give the relation of all the parts in their proper
proportions.
Jaw. The grasping part of a vise, or other tool.
Joule. The practical unit of electrical energy.
Key-way. A groove in a shaft and in the hub of a wheel, to receive therein a locking key. p. 204
Foot pound. A unit, usually determined by the number of pounds raised one foot in one
second of time. 550 pounds raised one foot in one second of time, means so
many foot pounds. p. 202
Formulate. To arrange; to put in order from a certain consideration of things.
Focus. The center of a circle.
Foci. One of the points of an ellipse.
Formation. The structure of a machine or of a compound.
Fractured. Broken.
Fundamental. Basis; the first form; the original structure.
Fulcrum. The resting place for a lever.
Fusion. Melting. The change of a metal from a solid to a liquid state by heat.
Fusible. That which is capable of being melted.
Fulminate. A substance that will ignite or explode by heat or friction.
Gamut. The scale of sound or light, or vibrations of any kind.
Gear. A toothed wheel of any kind.
Gelatine. A tasteless transparent substance obtained from animal tissues.
Globular. Having the form of a globe or ball.
Glazed. Having a glossary appearance.
Graphite. A metallic, iron-black variety of carbon.
Graduated. To arrange in steps; a regular order or series.
Grinder. Any mechanism which abrades or wears down a substance.
Gullet. The curved notches or grooves between projecting parts of mechanism.
Harmonizing. To make the various parts act together in unison.
H. P. The symbol for horse power.
Helico. A form resembling that of the threads of a screw.
Hexagon. Six-sided.
Heliograph. The system of signaling by using flashlights.
Horizontal. Things level with the surface of the earth; like the surface of water.
Hydrogen. The lightest of all the elements. A tasteless, colorless substance. p. 203
Import. To bear, or convey as a meaning.
Impulse. The application of an impelling force.
Impact. A collision; striking against.
Invariably. Constant; without failing.
Inertia. The quality of all materials to remain at rest, or to continue in motion, unless
acted on by some external force.
Intersect. To divide at a certain point. The crossing point of one line over another.
Interval. A space; a distance between.
Intensity. Strained or exerted to a high degree.
Interstices. The spaces between the molecules or atoms in a substance.
Intermediate. Between.
Intermeshing. The locking together of gear wheels.
Internal. That which is within.
Inability. Unable to perform or do.
Initial. The first; at the start.
Increment. One of the parts which go to make up the whole.
Inference. Drawing a conclusion from a certain state of things.
Insoluble. A substance which cannot be liquefied by a liquid.
Indentations. Recesses, or cut-out parts or places.
Induction. The movement of electricity through the air from one conductor to another.
Inflammable. That which will burn.
Inclining. At an angle; sloping.
Inconsequential. Not of much importance.
Isometric. That view of a figure which will give the relation of all the parts in their proper
proportions.
Jaw. The grasping part of a vise, or other tool.
Joule. The practical unit of electrical energy.
Key-way. A groove in a shaft and in the hub of a wheel, to receive therein a locking key. p. 204
Page 166
Kilowatt. A unit of electrical power; one thousand watts.
Kinetic. Consisting of motion.
Lacing. The attaching of the ends of a belt to each other.
Lap. A tool, usually of copper or lead, on which flour emery is spread, with oil, and
used to grind out the interior of cylinders.
Lapping. The act of using a lap to grind out cylinders.
Lacquer. A varnish for either wood or metal.
Lazy-tongs. A form of tool, by means of which a long range of movement is attainable, and
great grasp of power.
Levigated. Reduced to a fine powder.
Litharge. A form of lead used in paints for drying purposes.
Longitudinal. Lengthwise.
Luminous. That which has the capacity to light up.
Magnet. A bar of iron or steel that has electricity in it capable of attracting certain metals.
Manipulation. Capable of being handled.
Mandrel. The revolving part of a lathe; a rod or bar which turns and carries mechanical
elements thereon.
Manually. Operated by hand.
Margin. An edge.
Malleability. Softness. The state of being formed by hammering.
Magnetism. A quality of certain metals to receive and hold a charge of electricity.
Major axis. The measurement across the longest part of an ellipse.
Minor axis. The distance across the narrowest part of an ellipse.
Meridian. The time when the sun crosses the middle of the heavens; midday.
Metric. Measure; a system which takes the unit of its measurement from the
circumference of the earth.
Micrometer. A tool for measuring small spaces or intervals.
Milling A large tool for the purpose of cutting gears and grooves or surfaces.
machine.
Miter. A meeting surface between two right-angled pieces. p. 205
Momentum. That quality of matter which is the combined energy of mass and speed.
Molecular. Any substance that is made up of any particles; the component elements in any
substance.
Modifications. Changes; improved arrangements.
Multiplicity. Many; numerous; a large quantity.
Mutilated. As applied to a gear, one in which certain teeth are removed.
Nautical. Marine; applied to shipping, and the like.
Neutralizes. Any substance, like a chemical, which, when added to another chemical, will
change them both.
Nitro-glycerine. An explosive made from glycerine and nitrogen.
Oblique. At an angle; inclined.
Obliterate. To wipe out.
Obvious. That which can be seen; easily observed.
Obtuse. A blunt angle; not noticeable.
Odophone. An instrument for determining and testing odors.
Olfactory. The nerves of the sense of smell.
Orifice. An opening; a hole.
Oscillation. A movement to and fro, like a pendulum.
Oxygen. The most universal gas, colorless and tasteless; is called the acid-maker of the
universe and unites with all known substances, producing an acid, an alkali, or a
neutral compound.
Oxidizing. To impart to any substance the elements of oxygen.
Oxide. Any substance which has oxygen added to it.
Pallet. A part of a tooth or finger which acts on the teeth of a wheel.
Parallel. Lines or sides at equal distance from each other from end to end. p. 206
Paraffine. A light-colored substance, produced from refined petroleum.
Perimeter. The outer margin of a wheel; the bounding line of any figure of two dimensions.
Periphery. The outer side of a wheel.
Peen. The nailing end of a hammer.
Kinetic. Consisting of motion.
Lacing. The attaching of the ends of a belt to each other.
Lap. A tool, usually of copper or lead, on which flour emery is spread, with oil, and
used to grind out the interior of cylinders.
Lapping. The act of using a lap to grind out cylinders.
Lacquer. A varnish for either wood or metal.
Lazy-tongs. A form of tool, by means of which a long range of movement is attainable, and
great grasp of power.
Levigated. Reduced to a fine powder.
Litharge. A form of lead used in paints for drying purposes.
Longitudinal. Lengthwise.
Luminous. That which has the capacity to light up.
Magnet. A bar of iron or steel that has electricity in it capable of attracting certain metals.
Manipulation. Capable of being handled.
Mandrel. The revolving part of a lathe; a rod or bar which turns and carries mechanical
elements thereon.
Manually. Operated by hand.
Margin. An edge.
Malleability. Softness. The state of being formed by hammering.
Magnetism. A quality of certain metals to receive and hold a charge of electricity.
Major axis. The measurement across the longest part of an ellipse.
Minor axis. The distance across the narrowest part of an ellipse.
Meridian. The time when the sun crosses the middle of the heavens; midday.
Metric. Measure; a system which takes the unit of its measurement from the
circumference of the earth.
Micrometer. A tool for measuring small spaces or intervals.
Milling A large tool for the purpose of cutting gears and grooves or surfaces.
machine.
Miter. A meeting surface between two right-angled pieces. p. 205
Momentum. That quality of matter which is the combined energy of mass and speed.
Molecular. Any substance that is made up of any particles; the component elements in any
substance.
Modifications. Changes; improved arrangements.
Multiplicity. Many; numerous; a large quantity.
Mutilated. As applied to a gear, one in which certain teeth are removed.
Nautical. Marine; applied to shipping, and the like.
Neutralizes. Any substance, like a chemical, which, when added to another chemical, will
change them both.
Nitro-glycerine. An explosive made from glycerine and nitrogen.
Oblique. At an angle; inclined.
Obliterate. To wipe out.
Obvious. That which can be seen; easily observed.
Obtuse. A blunt angle; not noticeable.
Odophone. An instrument for determining and testing odors.
Olfactory. The nerves of the sense of smell.
Orifice. An opening; a hole.
Oscillation. A movement to and fro, like a pendulum.
Oxygen. The most universal gas, colorless and tasteless; is called the acid-maker of the
universe and unites with all known substances, producing an acid, an alkali, or a
neutral compound.
Oxidizing. To impart to any substance the elements of oxygen.
Oxide. Any substance which has oxygen added to it.
Pallet. A part of a tooth or finger which acts on the teeth of a wheel.
Parallel. Lines or sides at equal distance from each other from end to end. p. 206
Paraffine. A light-colored substance, produced from refined petroleum.
Perimeter. The outer margin of a wheel; the bounding line of any figure of two dimensions.
Periphery. The outer side of a wheel.
Peen. The nailing end of a hammer.
Page 167
Persistence. That quality of all matter to continue on in its present condition.
Perpendicular. A line drawn at right angles to another.
Perpetual. Without end.
Perspective. A view of an object which takes in all parts at one side.
Physically. Pertaining to the body.
Phonautograph. An apparatus for recording sound.
Phonograph. An apparatus for taking and sending forth sound vibration.
Phenomena. Any occurrence in nature out of the ordinary.
Pitman. The rod or bar which connects the piston and crank.
Pivot. A point or bar on which anything turns.
Pinion. A small toothed wheel.
Pitch. The number of vibrations. The term used to give the number of teeth in a wheel.
Pitch diameter. The point from which the measurements are made in determining the pitch.
Pivoted. A bar, lever, or other mechanical element, arranged to turn on or about a point.
Plastic. A substance in such a state that it may be kneaded or worked.
Planer. A large tool designed to cut or face off wood or metal.
Porosity. The quality in all substances to have interstices, or points of separation, between
the molecules.
Potential. The power.
Properties. The qualities possessed by all elements.
Projecting. The throwing forward. The sending out. p. 207
Promulgated. Put forth; enunciated.
Protractor. A mechanic's and draughtsman's tool by means of which angles may be formed.
Promote. To carry forward in a systematic way.
Precision. Work done with care; observing correct measurements.
Prony brake. A machine for determining horse power.
Punch. A small tool to be struck by a hammer in order to make an impression or
indentation.
Quadrant. One-fourth of a circle.
Quadrant plate. A plate on which are placed lines and numbers indicating degrees.
Quadruplex. A term to designate that system of telegraphy in which four messages are sent
over a single wire at the same time.
Ratchet. A wheel having teeth at certain intervals to catch the end of a pawl or finger.
Ratchet brace. A tool to hold a drill, having a reversible ratchet wheel.
Rasp cut. A cut of a file which is rough, not smooth.
Rake. The angle or inclination of the upper surface of the cutting tool of a lathe.
Reverse. To turn about; in the opposite direction.
Reciprocating. To go back and forth.
Revolve. To move in an orbit or circle, as a merry-go-round.
Reciprocity. To give back in like measure.
Reflection. The throwing back from a surface.
Resonance. The quality of vibration which adds to the original movement, and aids in
perpetuating the sound.
Refraction. The quality of light which causes it to bend in passing through different
substances.
Reducing. Bringing it down to a smaller compass.
Rectilinear. A straight line. p. 208
Retort. A furnace of refractory material to take high heat.
Reamer. A tool designed to enlarge or to smooth out holes.
Regulation. To do things in an orderly way; a system which sets forth certain requirements.
Refractory. Difficult to work, and not easily fused.
Recess. A hole, or a depression.
Rocking. A lever which rotates only part way and then moves in the opposite direction.
Rotate. A spindle which turns round. Compare revolve.
Rosin. Certain gums; particularly the sap of pine trees.
Roughing. The taking off of the first coating with a tool.
Saturated. A soluble substance which cannot be further dissolved by a liquid.
Scribe. To mark with a tool.
Perpendicular. A line drawn at right angles to another.
Perpetual. Without end.
Perspective. A view of an object which takes in all parts at one side.
Physically. Pertaining to the body.
Phonautograph. An apparatus for recording sound.
Phonograph. An apparatus for taking and sending forth sound vibration.
Phenomena. Any occurrence in nature out of the ordinary.
Pitman. The rod or bar which connects the piston and crank.
Pivot. A point or bar on which anything turns.
Pinion. A small toothed wheel.
Pitch. The number of vibrations. The term used to give the number of teeth in a wheel.
Pitch diameter. The point from which the measurements are made in determining the pitch.
Pivoted. A bar, lever, or other mechanical element, arranged to turn on or about a point.
Plastic. A substance in such a state that it may be kneaded or worked.
Planer. A large tool designed to cut or face off wood or metal.
Porosity. The quality in all substances to have interstices, or points of separation, between
the molecules.
Potential. The power.
Properties. The qualities possessed by all elements.
Projecting. The throwing forward. The sending out. p. 207
Promulgated. Put forth; enunciated.
Protractor. A mechanic's and draughtsman's tool by means of which angles may be formed.
Promote. To carry forward in a systematic way.
Precision. Work done with care; observing correct measurements.
Prony brake. A machine for determining horse power.
Punch. A small tool to be struck by a hammer in order to make an impression or
indentation.
Quadrant. One-fourth of a circle.
Quadrant plate. A plate on which are placed lines and numbers indicating degrees.
Quadruplex. A term to designate that system of telegraphy in which four messages are sent
over a single wire at the same time.
Ratchet. A wheel having teeth at certain intervals to catch the end of a pawl or finger.
Ratchet brace. A tool to hold a drill, having a reversible ratchet wheel.
Rasp cut. A cut of a file which is rough, not smooth.
Rake. The angle or inclination of the upper surface of the cutting tool of a lathe.
Reverse. To turn about; in the opposite direction.
Reciprocating. To go back and forth.
Revolve. To move in an orbit or circle, as a merry-go-round.
Reciprocity. To give back in like measure.
Reflection. The throwing back from a surface.
Resonance. The quality of vibration which adds to the original movement, and aids in
perpetuating the sound.
Refraction. The quality of light which causes it to bend in passing through different
substances.
Reducing. Bringing it down to a smaller compass.
Rectilinear. A straight line. p. 208
Retort. A furnace of refractory material to take high heat.
Reamer. A tool designed to enlarge or to smooth out holes.
Regulation. To do things in an orderly way; a system which sets forth certain requirements.
Refractory. Difficult to work, and not easily fused.
Recess. A hole, or a depression.
Rocking. A lever which rotates only part way and then moves in the opposite direction.
Rotate. A spindle which turns round. Compare revolve.
Rosin. Certain gums; particularly the sap of pine trees.
Roughing. The taking off of the first coating with a tool.
Saturated. A soluble substance which cannot be further dissolved by a liquid.
Scribe. To mark with a tool.
Page 168
Screw plate. A tool which has within it means for adjusting different cutting tools.
Section lining. The marks made diagonally across drawings to indicate that the part is cut away.
Shaper. A large tool for surfacing off material, cutting grooves, and the like.
Shrinkage. The term applied to metals when cast, as all will be smaller when cold than when
cast in the mold.
Slide rest. The part of the lathe which holds the tool post.
Sonorous. Having the quality of vibration.
Slotted. Grooved, or channeled.
Solvent. That which can be changed from a solid by liquids.
Spelter. A combination of zinc and copper. A hard solder.
Soldering. Uniting of two substances by a third, with heat.
Spindle. A small shaft.
Spur. The larger of two intermeshing gears.
Socket. A depression or hole.
Sprocket. Teeth in a wheel to receive a chain. p. 209
Spiral. A form wound like the threads of a screw.
Surface plate. A true surface made of metal, used as a means of determining evenness of the
article made.
Sulphate. Any substance which is modified by sulphuric acid.
Substitute. An element or substance used for another.
Superposed. One placed above the other.
Swage. Tool for the purpose of changing the form in a material.
Swivel. A point on which another turns.
Surfacing. Taking off the outer coating or covering.
Tap. A small drill.
Tapering. An object with the sides out of parallel.
Tangential. A line from the periphery of a circle which projects out at an angle.
Tension. The exertion of a force.
Tenacity. The property of a material to hang together.
Tempering. Putting metal in such condition that it will be not only hard but tough as well.
Technical. Pertaining to the strict forms and terms of an art.
Texture. That of which the element or substance is composed.
Threads. The ridges, spiral in form, which run around a bolt.
Theoretically. The speculative form or belief in a subject.
Tinned. The term applied to the coating on a soldering iron with a fluxed metal.
Tines. Small blades. p. 210
Torsion. The force exerted around an object, like the action of a crank on a shaft.
Tommy. A lever to be inserted in a hole in a screw head for turning a screw.
Transmitting. Sending forth; to forward.
Trammel. A tool for the purpose of drawing ellipses.
Traction. Drawing; pulling power.
Tripping. A motion applied to a finger, which holds a pivoted arm, whereby the latter may
be swung from its locked position.
Triangular. Having three sides and three angles.
Transverse. Across; at right angles to the long direction.
Undercut. A wall of a groove or recess which is sloping.
Undulatory. A wave-like motion, applied generally to light and electricity.
Unit. A base for calculating from.
Unison. Acting together; as one.
Unsized. Generally applied to the natural condition of paper or fabric which has no glue or
other fixing substance on it.
Vaporising. To change from a liquid or solid to a gas.
Variation. Changing into different conditions; unlike forms.
Verge. The edge; usually applied to the shoulder of a watch spindle, particularly to the
escapement.
Vertical. Up and down. The direction of a plumb line.
Velocity. The speed of an article through space.
Vitascope. An instrument for determining the rate of vibration of different substances.
Section lining. The marks made diagonally across drawings to indicate that the part is cut away.
Shaper. A large tool for surfacing off material, cutting grooves, and the like.
Shrinkage. The term applied to metals when cast, as all will be smaller when cold than when
cast in the mold.
Slide rest. The part of the lathe which holds the tool post.
Sonorous. Having the quality of vibration.
Slotted. Grooved, or channeled.
Solvent. That which can be changed from a solid by liquids.
Spelter. A combination of zinc and copper. A hard solder.
Soldering. Uniting of two substances by a third, with heat.
Spindle. A small shaft.
Spur. The larger of two intermeshing gears.
Socket. A depression or hole.
Sprocket. Teeth in a wheel to receive a chain. p. 209
Spiral. A form wound like the threads of a screw.
Surface plate. A true surface made of metal, used as a means of determining evenness of the
article made.
Sulphate. Any substance which is modified by sulphuric acid.
Substitute. An element or substance used for another.
Superposed. One placed above the other.
Swage. Tool for the purpose of changing the form in a material.
Swivel. A point on which another turns.
Surfacing. Taking off the outer coating or covering.
Tap. A small drill.
Tapering. An object with the sides out of parallel.
Tangential. A line from the periphery of a circle which projects out at an angle.
Tension. The exertion of a force.
Tenacity. The property of a material to hang together.
Tempering. Putting metal in such condition that it will be not only hard but tough as well.
Technical. Pertaining to the strict forms and terms of an art.
Texture. That of which the element or substance is composed.
Threads. The ridges, spiral in form, which run around a bolt.
Theoretically. The speculative form or belief in a subject.
Tinned. The term applied to the coating on a soldering iron with a fluxed metal.
Tines. Small blades. p. 210
Torsion. The force exerted around an object, like the action of a crank on a shaft.
Tommy. A lever to be inserted in a hole in a screw head for turning a screw.
Transmitting. Sending forth; to forward.
Trammel. A tool for the purpose of drawing ellipses.
Traction. Drawing; pulling power.
Tripping. A motion applied to a finger, which holds a pivoted arm, whereby the latter may
be swung from its locked position.
Triangular. Having three sides and three angles.
Transverse. Across; at right angles to the long direction.
Undercut. A wall of a groove or recess which is sloping.
Undulatory. A wave-like motion, applied generally to light and electricity.
Unit. A base for calculating from.
Unison. Acting together; as one.
Unsized. Generally applied to the natural condition of paper or fabric which has no glue or
other fixing substance on it.
Vaporising. To change from a liquid or solid to a gas.
Variation. Changing into different conditions; unlike forms.
Verge. The edge; usually applied to the shoulder of a watch spindle, particularly to the
escapement.
Vertical. Up and down. The direction of a plumb line.
Velocity. The speed of an article through space.
Vitascope. An instrument for determining the rate of vibration of different substances.
Page 169
Vibration. The movement to and fro of all elements, and by means of which we are made
sensitive of the different forces.
Vocation. The business or the calling of a person. p. 211
Warding. The act of cutting a projection or guard, such as is usually found on the insides of
locks, and the correspondent detent in the key.
Watt. In electricity the unit of the rate of working in a circuit. It is the electro-motive
force of one volt and the current intensity of one ampere.
sensitive of the different forces.
Vocation. The business or the calling of a person. p. 211
Warding. The act of cutting a projection or guard, such as is usually found on the insides of
locks, and the correspondent detent in the key.
Watt. In electricity the unit of the rate of working in a circuit. It is the electro-motive
force of one volt and the current intensity of one ampere.
Page 170
Page 171
p. 213
Page 172
INDEXToC
(Figures indicate the pages)
Ammonium Sulphate, 168, 171.
Analysis, 93.
Analyzed, 159.
A Angle cutting, 30.
Angle plate, 10.
Acetone, 165. Angles, 31, 39, 59, 72, 102, 103, 104,
Acid, 119, 120, 156, 168. 107, 152.
Acid, Acetic, 165. Aniline, 176.
Acid, Carbolic, 166. Annatto, 168, 170.
Acid, Hydrofluoric, 170. Annealing, 112, 113, 114, 115.
Acid, Muriatic, 119. Annular, 67.
Acid, Nitric, 168, 169, 171, 173. Anvils, 14, 15, 16.
Acid, Oxalic, 172. Apothecaries, 180.
Acid, Pyrogallic, 172. Application for patent, 191.
Acid, Sulphuric, 169. Arbor, 14.
Acoustics, 87, 157. Arc, 146.
Adhesives, 162. Area, 148.
Affinity, 83, 86. Armature, 153.
Agate, 82. Arrow root, 150.
Air, 84. Artisan, 112.
Alcohol, 165, 166, 169, 170, 176, 183. Asbestos, 168.
Alloy, 81, 115, 116, 118, 119, 149, 175. Asphalt, 14, 175.
Alum, 149, 166, 172. Assign, 191, 193.
Aluminum, 38, 41, 42, 60, 82, 149, 164, Assignment, 192.
166, 169, 170, 174, 175, 176, 184. Atom, 157.
Amalgams, 149. Attraction, 86.
Amber, 170. Avoirdupois, 180.
Ambergris, 159. Axis, 106, 127.
Ammonia, 166, 170. Axis, major, 105.
Ammonium Nitrate, 185. Axis, minor, 105, 106.
p. 214
B Bolt, 75.
Bolt, anchor, 7.
Ball, 75. Boracic acid, 168.
Ball and Socket, 74. Borax, 168, 176.
Balsam Peru, 168, 189, 173. Brass, 41, 43, 44, 168, 170, 174, 175,
Barium Chloride, 176. 176, 184.
Bark, soap, 165. Bronze, 150, 164, 173, 176, 184.
Barleycorn, 143. Bulk, 134.
Barrel, 149.
Base line, 102. C
B. T. U., 180, 181.
Beeswax, 174. Calcium, 166.
Bell metal, 164. Calcium Chloride, 185.
Belt, 68. Calipers, 37, 45, 49, 66.
Belt, Lacing, 68, 69. Calls, 160.
Bench, 77, 104. Camphor, 164, 166, 175.
Benzine, 169. Canada balsam, 172.
Benzol, 173. Capillary attraction, 86, 87.
Carbolic acid, 166.
(Figures indicate the pages)
Ammonium Sulphate, 168, 171.
Analysis, 93.
Analyzed, 159.
A Angle cutting, 30.
Angle plate, 10.
Acetone, 165. Angles, 31, 39, 59, 72, 102, 103, 104,
Acid, 119, 120, 156, 168. 107, 152.
Acid, Acetic, 165. Aniline, 176.
Acid, Carbolic, 166. Annatto, 168, 170.
Acid, Hydrofluoric, 170. Annealing, 112, 113, 114, 115.
Acid, Muriatic, 119. Annular, 67.
Acid, Nitric, 168, 169, 171, 173. Anvils, 14, 15, 16.
Acid, Oxalic, 172. Apothecaries, 180.
Acid, Pyrogallic, 172. Application for patent, 191.
Acid, Sulphuric, 169. Arbor, 14.
Acoustics, 87, 157. Arc, 146.
Adhesives, 162. Area, 148.
Affinity, 83, 86. Armature, 153.
Agate, 82. Arrow root, 150.
Air, 84. Artisan, 112.
Alcohol, 165, 166, 169, 170, 176, 183. Asbestos, 168.
Alloy, 81, 115, 116, 118, 119, 149, 175. Asphalt, 14, 175.
Alum, 149, 166, 172. Assign, 191, 193.
Aluminum, 38, 41, 42, 60, 82, 149, 164, Assignment, 192.
166, 169, 170, 174, 175, 176, 184. Atom, 157.
Amalgams, 149. Attraction, 86.
Amber, 170. Avoirdupois, 180.
Ambergris, 159. Axis, 106, 127.
Ammonia, 166, 170. Axis, major, 105.
Ammonium Nitrate, 185. Axis, minor, 105, 106.
p. 214
B Bolt, 75.
Bolt, anchor, 7.
Ball, 75. Boracic acid, 168.
Ball and Socket, 74. Borax, 168, 176.
Balsam Peru, 168, 189, 173. Brass, 41, 43, 44, 168, 170, 174, 175,
Barium Chloride, 176. 176, 184.
Bark, soap, 165. Bronze, 150, 164, 173, 176, 184.
Barleycorn, 143. Bulk, 134.
Barrel, 149.
Base line, 102. C
B. T. U., 180, 181.
Beeswax, 174. Calcium, 166.
Bell metal, 164. Calcium Chloride, 185.
Belt, 68. Calipers, 37, 45, 49, 66.
Belt, Lacing, 68, 69. Calls, 160.
Bench, 77, 104. Camphor, 164, 166, 175.
Benzine, 169. Canada balsam, 172.
Benzol, 173. Capillary attraction, 86, 87.
Carbolic acid, 166.
Page 173
Bevel, 69, 70, 125, 126. Carbon, 113.
Bibb, 70. Carbonate, 150.
Bismuth, 118. Carbonate of soda, 116, 172.
Bisulphate of carbon, 185. Carbon paper, 171.
Bisulphate of sodium, 172. Cardinal, 102.
Bitt, 28, 42. Carbolized, 169.
Bitts, machine, 38. Cast iron, 42, 64, 81, 169, 183.
Bitts, plain, 38. Caustic soda, 106, 150.
Bitts, round-nosed, 38. Caveat, 190.
Bitts, setting, 39. Celluloid, 164.
Bitts, square, 38. Cement, 162, 163.
Black, ivory, 171. Centaire, 146.
Blade, hack-saw, 35, 36. Center, dead, 78.
Bloodstone, 173. Center line, 41.
Blue black, 173. Centering, 111.
Boiler, 150, 152.
Boiler, compound, 161.
p. 215
Clutches, 74.
Coal, 139.
Centers, 62. Coherer, 154.
Centimeter, 146. Cohesion, 50, 83.
Centrifugal, 85. Color, 92, 157, 161.
Centripetal, 85. Combination, 136, 156.
Ceresine, 174. Commutator, 155.
Chalk, 165. Compass, 106.
Channel, 71. Compound, Welding, 117.
Charcoal, 113, 167, 185. Compression, 77, 84.
Chemical, 83, 157, 180. Compressibility, 84.
Chisels, drifting, 32. Concave, 92, 93.
Chisels, key-way, 32. Concentric, 88.
Chisels, square, 53. Conception, 191.
Chlorate of potash, 167, 169, 170. Conductivity, 82.
Chloride of lime, 165. Conductor, 82, 88.
Chloride of platinum, 173. Cone, 70.
Chloride of tin, 119. Conveyor, 91.
Chloride of zinc, 163, 176. Convex, 92, 96.
Chloral hydrate, 169. Convolute, 78.
Chloroform, 163. Copal varnish, 163.
Chromate of potash, 169, 170. Copper, 45, 60, 112, 118, 164, 170, 173,
Chuck, 54. 174, 184.
Chuck, independent, 64. Corpuscular, 91.
Chuck, universal, 64. Corundum, 27.
Circle, 96, 106, 107, 111, 148, 169. Crank, 70, 76, 78, 135.
Circuit, 153, 154. Cream of Tartar, 165, 174.
Circular pitch, 122, 124, 125. Crown wheel, 70.
Circumference, 148. Cryolite, 176.
Citric, 165. Cube, 97, 98, 107, 149.
Clamp, 77. Current, 154, 158.
Clay, 164, 185. Curve, 104.
Clearance, 30, 38, 40. Cutter, side, 30.
Clef, 159. Cutting tool, 171.
p. 216
Cyanide of Potassium, 170. Dollar, 144.
Cylinder, 39, 40, 66, 80, 90, 134, 135, Drams, 180.
136. Drawing, 95, 97, 101, 108, 109, 129,
191.
Drill, 30, 31.
Bibb, 70. Carbonate, 150.
Bismuth, 118. Carbonate of soda, 116, 172.
Bisulphate of carbon, 185. Carbon paper, 171.
Bisulphate of sodium, 172. Cardinal, 102.
Bitt, 28, 42. Carbolized, 169.
Bitts, machine, 38. Cast iron, 42, 64, 81, 169, 183.
Bitts, plain, 38. Caustic soda, 106, 150.
Bitts, round-nosed, 38. Caveat, 190.
Bitts, setting, 39. Celluloid, 164.
Bitts, square, 38. Cement, 162, 163.
Black, ivory, 171. Centaire, 146.
Blade, hack-saw, 35, 36. Center, dead, 78.
Bloodstone, 173. Center line, 41.
Blue black, 173. Centering, 111.
Boiler, 150, 152.
Boiler, compound, 161.
p. 215
Clutches, 74.
Coal, 139.
Centers, 62. Coherer, 154.
Centimeter, 146. Cohesion, 50, 83.
Centrifugal, 85. Color, 92, 157, 161.
Centripetal, 85. Combination, 136, 156.
Ceresine, 174. Commutator, 155.
Chalk, 165. Compass, 106.
Channel, 71. Compound, Welding, 117.
Charcoal, 113, 167, 185. Compression, 77, 84.
Chemical, 83, 157, 180. Compressibility, 84.
Chisels, drifting, 32. Concave, 92, 93.
Chisels, key-way, 32. Concentric, 88.
Chisels, square, 53. Conception, 191.
Chlorate of potash, 167, 169, 170. Conductivity, 82.
Chloride of lime, 165. Conductor, 82, 88.
Chloride of platinum, 173. Cone, 70.
Chloride of tin, 119. Conveyor, 91.
Chloride of zinc, 163, 176. Convex, 92, 96.
Chloral hydrate, 169. Convolute, 78.
Chloroform, 163. Copal varnish, 163.
Chromate of potash, 169, 170. Copper, 45, 60, 112, 118, 164, 170, 173,
Chuck, 54. 174, 184.
Chuck, independent, 64. Corpuscular, 91.
Chuck, universal, 64. Corundum, 27.
Circle, 96, 106, 107, 111, 148, 169. Crank, 70, 76, 78, 135.
Circuit, 153, 154. Cream of Tartar, 165, 174.
Circular pitch, 122, 124, 125. Crown wheel, 70.
Circumference, 148. Cryolite, 176.
Citric, 165. Cube, 97, 98, 107, 149.
Clamp, 77. Current, 154, 158.
Clay, 164, 185. Curve, 104.
Clearance, 30, 38, 40. Cutter, side, 30.
Clef, 159. Cutting tool, 171.
p. 216
Cyanide of Potassium, 170. Dollar, 144.
Cylinder, 39, 40, 66, 80, 90, 134, 135, Drams, 180.
136. Drawing, 95, 97, 101, 108, 109, 129,
191.
Drill, 30, 31.
Page 174
D Drilling Machine, 43.
Driver, 73.
Decameter, 146, 106, 109, 183, 187. Dry measure, 182.
Decimeter, 146. Ductility, 80, 81.
Declaration of Interference, 190. Dynamite, 167.
Degree, 40, 101, 102, 103, 104. Dynamo, 155.
Deodorant, 166.
Dessertspoon, 151. E
Detail, paper, 111.
Develop, 157. Eccentric, 78.
Developer, 172. Echo, 89.
Dextrine, 169. Effervesce, 119.
Diameter, 52, 126, 140, 143, 144, 148, Elastic, 91.
149, 150. Elasticity, 87, 112.
Diameter, inside, 122. Electrical, 82, 153, 154, 155.
Diameter, outside, 122. Electric current, 182.
Diameter, pitch, 122. Electric curves, 182.
Diametral pitch, 123, 124. Electricity, 78, 84, 93.
Diamond, 81, 149. Electrolytic, 149.
Diaphragm, 90, 153, 154. Electro-motive force, 154.
Disinfectant, 163. Ellipse, 72, 104, 105, 106, 107.
Disks, 49, 50, 67, 71, 74, 75, 82, 91, 95, Emery, 27, 36, 150, 165, 166, 167.
96, 105. Emery cloth, 55.
Disk shears, 90, 153, 154. Emery wheel, 22.
Distilled, 144, 151. Energy, 140.
Diverge, 91. Engine, 45, 78, 134.
Divided, 192. Equalization, 82.
Dividers, 45, 52, 62, 63. Escapement, 72.
Dogs, 77. Ether, 91, 169.
p. 217
Expansion, 93. Filter paper, 171.
Explosions, 156, 167. Fire clay, 164, 165.
Fish oil, 171,176.
F Fire proof, 168, 171.
Flexure, 79.
Facet, 52. Floor dressing, 168.
Fahrenheit, 148, 186. Fluid, 165.
Feed, longitudinal, 66. Fluor spar, 116.
Feed, transverse, 66. Fluxes, 115, 116, 118, 176.
Ferric chloride, 166. Focal, 106, 107.
Filament, 160. Focus, foci, 105.
File, cross, 57. Foot, 145.
File, cutter, 56. Foot lathe, 78.
File, do-able end, 57, 58. Foot pounds, 139, 140, 143, 181.
File, equalizing, 57. Force, 156, 157.
File, float cut, 57. Forge work, 116.
File, half round, 56. Forges, 164.
File, holding, 59. Formic acid, 168.
File, middle, 57. Formula, 162.
File, movement, 59, 80. Freezing mixtures, 185.
File, pinion, 56. Friction, 70, 171.
File, rasp cut, 57. Fuel, 134, 181.
File, rat-tail, 56. Fulcrum, 76, 128, 129.
File, rough, 57. Fulminate, 167.
File, round, 56. Furlong, 181.
File, saw, 56. Furniture, 164.
File, second cut, 57. Fusible, 116.
File, shearing cut, 59. Fusion, 115.
File, slitting, 57.
Driver, 73.
Decameter, 146, 106, 109, 183, 187. Dry measure, 182.
Decimeter, 146. Ductility, 80, 81.
Declaration of Interference, 190. Dynamite, 167.
Degree, 40, 101, 102, 103, 104. Dynamo, 155.
Deodorant, 166.
Dessertspoon, 151. E
Detail, paper, 111.
Develop, 157. Eccentric, 78.
Developer, 172. Echo, 89.
Dextrine, 169. Effervesce, 119.
Diameter, 52, 126, 140, 143, 144, 148, Elastic, 91.
149, 150. Elasticity, 87, 112.
Diameter, inside, 122. Electrical, 82, 153, 154, 155.
Diameter, outside, 122. Electric current, 182.
Diameter, pitch, 122. Electric curves, 182.
Diametral pitch, 123, 124. Electricity, 78, 84, 93.
Diamond, 81, 149. Electrolytic, 149.
Diaphragm, 90, 153, 154. Electro-motive force, 154.
Disinfectant, 163. Ellipse, 72, 104, 105, 106, 107.
Disks, 49, 50, 67, 71, 74, 75, 82, 91, 95, Emery, 27, 36, 150, 165, 166, 167.
96, 105. Emery cloth, 55.
Disk shears, 90, 153, 154. Emery wheel, 22.
Distilled, 144, 151. Energy, 140.
Diverge, 91. Engine, 45, 78, 134.
Divided, 192. Equalization, 82.
Dividers, 45, 52, 62, 63. Escapement, 72.
Dogs, 77. Ether, 91, 169.
p. 217
Expansion, 93. Filter paper, 171.
Explosions, 156, 167. Fire clay, 164, 165.
Fish oil, 171,176.
F Fire proof, 168, 171.
Flexure, 79.
Facet, 52. Floor dressing, 168.
Fahrenheit, 148, 186. Fluid, 165.
Feed, longitudinal, 66. Fluor spar, 116.
Feed, transverse, 66. Fluxes, 115, 116, 118, 176.
Ferric chloride, 166. Focal, 106, 107.
Filament, 160. Focus, foci, 105.
File, cross, 57. Foot, 145.
File, cutter, 56. Foot lathe, 78.
File, do-able end, 57, 58. Foot pounds, 139, 140, 143, 181.
File, equalizing, 57. Force, 156, 157.
File, float cut, 57. Forge work, 116.
File, half round, 56. Forges, 164.
File, holding, 59. Formic acid, 168.
File, middle, 57. Formula, 162.
File, movement, 59, 80. Freezing mixtures, 185.
File, pinion, 56. Friction, 70, 171.
File, rasp cut, 57. Fuel, 134, 181.
File, rat-tail, 56. Fulcrum, 76, 128, 129.
File, rough, 57. Fulminate, 167.
File, round, 56. Furlong, 181.
File, saw, 56. Furniture, 164.
File, second cut, 57. Fusible, 116.
File, shearing cut, 59. Fusion, 115.
File, slitting, 57.
Page 175
File, smooth, 57. G
File, square, 56.
File, triangular, 56. Gage, 45, 46, 47, 148.
Files, 36, 48, 50, 52, 53, 56, 59, 60, 114, Gage surface, 84, 87, 94.
167, 168. Gallon, 144.
Files, Hexagon, 51, 52. Gas stove, 166.
Filing, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 61.
p. 218
Gear, 42, 69, 70, 74, 121, 122, 123, 125, Hammer, 81, 115, 117.
126, 133, 171. Handy tables, 178.
Gear, bevel, 70. Hardness, 81, 114, 115.
Gear, friction, 70. Harmony, 154, 158, 169, 160.
Gearing, 121. Head, 135.
Gear, miter, 70, 123, 124, 125, 126. Heat, 93, 186.
Gear, mutilated, 72. Hectare, 146.
Gear, spur, 122. Hectometer, 146.
Gelatine, 162, 173. Helical, 77.
Geranium, 169. Helical, double, 77.
German silver, 82. Helix-volute, 77.
Giant powder, 167. Hexagon, 51, 52.
Glass, 84, 92, 112, 163, 169. Horizontal, 97, 102, 106.
Glauber salts, 164. Horse power, 139, 143, 146, 148, 186,
Glazing, 72. 187.
Glue, 159, 162, 168. Hours, H. P., 186, 187.
Glycerine, 115, 162, 165, 176. Hours, kilowatt, 186, 187.
Gold, size, 173. Hub, 74.
Grain, 81. Hub, key-way, 125.
Grains, 180. Hydrochloric acid, 172.
Graphite, 171, 175. Hydrofluoric acid, 149.
Gravity, 85. Hydrogen, 83.
Grinder, 27.
Grinder wheels, 36. I
Grindstones, 22, 36, 149.
Groove, 71, 76. Inches, 181.
Gum, 163. Inclined plane, 123, 128.
Gum arabic, 163. Indentation, 154.
Gum lac, 170. Indicator, speed, 140.
Guncotton, 188. Induction, 154.
Gunpowder, 167. Inertia, 84.
Injector, 152.
H Inks, 110.
Inside diameter, 122.
Hack-saw, 34, 35, 36. Instrument, 158, 159.
Hack-saw blade, 35, 36. Internal, 86, 102.
p. 219
International, 193. Lead, 60, 118, 163, 164,175.
Invention, 152, 153, 161, 188, 189, 190, Leather, 162, 163.
192, 193, 194. Level, 87.
Inventor, 157, 181, 190. Lever, 73, 75, 76, 128, 129, 130, 131,
Iron, 42, 63, 155, 162, 165, 169, 175, 132, 133, 140, 153.
184. Leverage, 143.
Iron, wrought, 42, 82, 112. Licenses, 189.
Isinglass, interference, 190. Light, 100.
Isometric, 107. Lime, 173.
Ivory, 84. Linear measure, 181.
Ivory, black, 171. Lines, 95, 99, 110.
Lines, section, 84.
Linseed, 162.
File, square, 56.
File, triangular, 56. Gage, 45, 46, 47, 148.
Files, 36, 48, 50, 52, 53, 56, 59, 60, 114, Gage surface, 84, 87, 94.
167, 168. Gallon, 144.
Files, Hexagon, 51, 52. Gas stove, 166.
Filing, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 61.
p. 218
Gear, 42, 69, 70, 74, 121, 122, 123, 125, Hammer, 81, 115, 117.
126, 133, 171. Handy tables, 178.
Gear, bevel, 70. Hardness, 81, 114, 115.
Gear, friction, 70. Harmony, 154, 158, 169, 160.
Gearing, 121. Head, 135.
Gear, miter, 70, 123, 124, 125, 126. Heat, 93, 186.
Gear, mutilated, 72. Hectare, 146.
Gear, spur, 122. Hectometer, 146.
Gelatine, 162, 173. Helical, 77.
Geranium, 169. Helical, double, 77.
German silver, 82. Helix-volute, 77.
Giant powder, 167. Hexagon, 51, 52.
Glass, 84, 92, 112, 163, 169. Horizontal, 97, 102, 106.
Glauber salts, 164. Horse power, 139, 143, 146, 148, 186,
Glazing, 72. 187.
Glue, 159, 162, 168. Hours, H. P., 186, 187.
Glycerine, 115, 162, 165, 176. Hours, kilowatt, 186, 187.
Gold, size, 173. Hub, 74.
Grain, 81. Hub, key-way, 125.
Grains, 180. Hydrochloric acid, 172.
Graphite, 171, 175. Hydrofluoric acid, 149.
Gravity, 85. Hydrogen, 83.
Grinder, 27.
Grinder wheels, 36. I
Grindstones, 22, 36, 149.
Groove, 71, 76. Inches, 181.
Gum, 163. Inclined plane, 123, 128.
Gum arabic, 163. Indentation, 154.
Gum lac, 170. Indicator, speed, 140.
Guncotton, 188. Induction, 154.
Gunpowder, 167. Inertia, 84.
Injector, 152.
H Inks, 110.
Inside diameter, 122.
Hack-saw, 34, 35, 36. Instrument, 158, 159.
Hack-saw blade, 35, 36. Internal, 86, 102.
p. 219
International, 193. Lead, 60, 118, 163, 164,175.
Invention, 152, 153, 161, 188, 189, 190, Leather, 162, 163.
192, 193, 194. Level, 87.
Inventor, 157, 181, 190. Lever, 73, 75, 76, 128, 129, 130, 131,
Iron, 42, 63, 155, 162, 165, 169, 175, 132, 133, 140, 153.
184. Leverage, 143.
Iron, wrought, 42, 82, 112. Licenses, 189.
Isinglass, interference, 190. Light, 100.
Isometric, 107. Lime, 173.
Ivory, 84. Linear measure, 181.
Ivory, black, 171. Lines, 95, 99, 110.
Lines, section, 84.
Linseed, 162.
Page 176
J Linseed oil, 149, 174,175.
Liquid measure, 182.
Japan wax, 174. Liquids, 84.
Joint, ball and socket, 74. Litharge, 163.
Joint, universal, 70. Long measure, 181.
Joule, 174. Lubricant, 171.
Luminous, 91.
K Lycopodium, 169.
Kerosene, 150, 165, 171. M
Key, 158.
Key-way, 125. Machine, 26.
Kilometer, 146. Magnesium, 166.
Kilowatt, 186, 187. Magnesium sulphate, 169.
Kilowatt hour, 186, 187. Magnet, 153.
Kinetic, 140. Magnetism, 93.
Major axis, 105.
L Malleability, 81.
Malleable, 112.
Lacquer, 170. Mandrel, 66, 76.
Lampblack, 167, 175. Manganese, 163.
Lapping, 166, 167. Marble, 162.
Lathe, 28, 39, 42, 45, 64, 65, 67, 104, Mass, 85.
171.
Lathe speed, 34.
Lathe tool, 33, 39.
Lavender, 168.
p. 220
Mastic, 169. Nitrate of potash, 167.
Measure, 139, 140, 143, 151. Nitrate of silver, 174.
Measure, liquid, 182. Nitric acid, 162, 168, 169, 171, 173.
Measure, long, 181. Nitro-glycerine, 167, 185.
Measurement, 145.
Measure, paper, 182. O
Measure, solid, 82.
Measure, square, 181. Oath, 193.
Membrane, 90. Octave, 159.
Mercuric chloride, 166. Odophone, 159.
Mercury, 94, 114, 183. Odor, 159.
Meridian, 145. Oil, 83, 87, 167, 171.
Metric, 144, 145, 146. Oil eradicator, 166.
Metrical, 145. Oleonaptha, 171.
Micron, 146. Oscillations, 90, 157.
Microscope, 91. Ounce, 180.
Millimeter, 146. Outlines, 99.
Milling machine, 26. Oxalic acid, 172.
Minor, 164. Oxidation, 117.
Minor axis, 105, 106. Oxide, 117, 163.
Miter, 146. Oxidizing, 116.
Miter gear, 123, 124, 125, 126. Oxygen, 83, 119.
Molecular, 82, 117.
Molecular forces, 82. P
Molecules, 83, 84, 146.
Momentum, 83, 85. Palm oil, 171.
Motion, 84, 156. Paper, 168, 171.
Motor, 136, 155. Paraffine, 168, 171.
Parallel, 91, 100, 121.
Paris blue, 172.
Paste, 163, 173.
Liquid measure, 182.
Japan wax, 174. Liquids, 84.
Joint, ball and socket, 74. Litharge, 163.
Joint, universal, 70. Long measure, 181.
Joule, 174. Lubricant, 171.
Luminous, 91.
K Lycopodium, 169.
Kerosene, 150, 165, 171. M
Key, 158.
Key-way, 125. Machine, 26.
Kilometer, 146. Magnesium, 166.
Kilowatt, 186, 187. Magnesium sulphate, 169.
Kilowatt hour, 186, 187. Magnet, 153.
Kinetic, 140. Magnetism, 93.
Major axis, 105.
L Malleability, 81.
Malleable, 112.
Lacquer, 170. Mandrel, 66, 76.
Lampblack, 167, 175. Manganese, 163.
Lapping, 166, 167. Marble, 162.
Lathe, 28, 39, 42, 45, 64, 65, 67, 104, Mass, 85.
171.
Lathe speed, 34.
Lathe tool, 33, 39.
Lavender, 168.
p. 220
Mastic, 169. Nitrate of potash, 167.
Measure, 139, 140, 143, 151. Nitrate of silver, 174.
Measure, liquid, 182. Nitric acid, 162, 168, 169, 171, 173.
Measure, long, 181. Nitro-glycerine, 167, 185.
Measurement, 145.
Measure, paper, 182. O
Measure, solid, 82.
Measure, square, 181. Oath, 193.
Membrane, 90. Octave, 159.
Mercuric chloride, 166. Odophone, 159.
Mercury, 94, 114, 183. Odor, 159.
Meridian, 145. Oil, 83, 87, 167, 171.
Metric, 144, 145, 146. Oil eradicator, 166.
Metrical, 145. Oleonaptha, 171.
Micron, 146. Oscillations, 90, 157.
Microscope, 91. Ounce, 180.
Millimeter, 146. Outlines, 99.
Milling machine, 26. Oxalic acid, 172.
Minor, 164. Oxidation, 117.
Minor axis, 105, 106. Oxide, 117, 163.
Miter, 146. Oxidizing, 116.
Miter gear, 123, 124, 125, 126. Oxygen, 83, 119.
Molecular, 82, 117.
Molecular forces, 82. P
Molecules, 83, 84, 146.
Momentum, 83, 85. Palm oil, 171.
Motion, 84, 156. Paper, 168, 171.
Motor, 136, 155. Paraffine, 168, 171.
Parallel, 91, 100, 121.
Paris blue, 172.
Paste, 163, 173.
Page 177
N Patents, 188, 189, 190, 192, 194.
Pawl, 73, 76.
Neat's Foot oil, 168. Pendulum, 73.
Neroli, 168. Parting tools, 28.
Nickel, 164. Perimeter, 73.
Nitrate of copper, 174.
p. 221
Pound, 145, 157, 180.
Power, 128, 129, 130, 131, 133, 134,
Periphery, 73. 140, 158, 159, 186.
Permanganate of potash, 178. Power, horse, 139, 140.
Perpendicular, 105. Precision tools, 50.
Perpetual motion, 128. Preliminary statement, 191.
Perspective, 97, 106, 107. Pressure, 134, 135, 137, 148, 152.
Petroleum, 168. Prime mover, 134.
Phenomenon, 91, 153. Printing telegraph, 155.
Phonautograph, 90. Prism, 92, 93.
Phonograph,-91, 154. Protractor, 108, 109.
Phosphorus, 149. Prussiate of potash, 113.
Photographer, 157, 172. Pulley, 68, 70, 73, 128, 133, 140, 149,
Piano, 158, 159. 150.
Pinion, 57, 74. Pulsation, 153.
Pitch, 121, 125, 156. Pumice, 83.
Pitch, circle, 122, 124, 125. Pumice stone, 110, 175.
Pitch, diameter, 123, 124. Punch, 62, 63.
Pitch, line, 123, 124, 127. Punch, centering, 62.
Pitman, 70. Punch cutter, 24.
Pivots, 70, 130. Putty, 175.
Planer, 26, 50, 51, 126.
Plaster, 173. Q
Plaster of Paris, 150, 174.
Plate, 73. Quadrant, 102, 103.
Plates, 50. Quality, 157.
Plating, 173. Quarter, 180.
Platinum, 81. Quartz, 182.
Plumbago, 173.
Poles, 155. R
Polishes, 174.
Position, 102. Racks, 73, 74.
Potash, 116, 167. Radius, 52.
Potash, prussiate, 113. Rake, 29, 30, 38, 42, 43,45.
Potassium cyanide, 170. Rainbow, 92.
Potassium nitrate, 167. Ratchet, 77.
p. 222
Ratchet brace, 77. Sense, 159.
Reciprocity, 82. Sesame oil, 176.
Reflected, 92. Shade, 96.
Reflecting, 89. Shading, 96, 110.
Reflection, 88, 91. Shaft, 68, 69, 70, 73, 74, 75.
Refraction, 92. Shaft coupling, 74.
Resin, 176. Shaper, 26, 50, 51, 53.
Resistance, 79, 82, 83. Shellac, 163.
Resonance, 89. Side cutters, 30.
Rim, 96. Sienna, 168.
Ring, 96. Signals, 87.
Rods, 180. Silicate, 168.
Rosemary, 166. Silver, 82, 118, 164, 165, 180, 183.
Royalty, 193. Snow, 185.
Pawl, 73, 76.
Neat's Foot oil, 168. Pendulum, 73.
Neroli, 168. Parting tools, 28.
Nickel, 164. Perimeter, 73.
Nitrate of copper, 174.
p. 221
Pound, 145, 157, 180.
Power, 128, 129, 130, 131, 133, 134,
Periphery, 73. 140, 158, 159, 186.
Permanganate of potash, 178. Power, horse, 139, 140.
Perpendicular, 105. Precision tools, 50.
Perpetual motion, 128. Preliminary statement, 191.
Perspective, 97, 106, 107. Pressure, 134, 135, 137, 148, 152.
Petroleum, 168. Prime mover, 134.
Phenomenon, 91, 153. Printing telegraph, 155.
Phonautograph, 90. Prism, 92, 93.
Phonograph,-91, 154. Protractor, 108, 109.
Phosphorus, 149. Prussiate of potash, 113.
Photographer, 157, 172. Pulley, 68, 70, 73, 128, 133, 140, 149,
Piano, 158, 159. 150.
Pinion, 57, 74. Pulsation, 153.
Pitch, 121, 125, 156. Pumice, 83.
Pitch, circle, 122, 124, 125. Pumice stone, 110, 175.
Pitch, diameter, 123, 124. Punch, 62, 63.
Pitch, line, 123, 124, 127. Punch, centering, 62.
Pitman, 70. Punch cutter, 24.
Pivots, 70, 130. Putty, 175.
Planer, 26, 50, 51, 126.
Plaster, 173. Q
Plaster of Paris, 150, 174.
Plate, 73. Quadrant, 102, 103.
Plates, 50. Quality, 157.
Plating, 173. Quarter, 180.
Platinum, 81. Quartz, 182.
Plumbago, 173.
Poles, 155. R
Polishes, 174.
Position, 102. Racks, 73, 74.
Potash, 116, 167. Radius, 52.
Potash, prussiate, 113. Rake, 29, 30, 38, 42, 43,45.
Potassium cyanide, 170. Rainbow, 92.
Potassium nitrate, 167. Ratchet, 77.
p. 222
Ratchet brace, 77. Sense, 159.
Reciprocity, 82. Sesame oil, 176.
Reflected, 92. Shade, 96.
Reflecting, 89. Shading, 96, 110.
Reflection, 88, 91. Shaft, 68, 69, 70, 73, 74, 75.
Refraction, 92. Shaft coupling, 74.
Resin, 176. Shaper, 26, 50, 51, 53.
Resistance, 79, 82, 83. Shellac, 163.
Resonance, 89. Side cutters, 30.
Rim, 96. Sienna, 168.
Ring, 96. Signals, 87.
Rods, 180. Silicate, 168.
Rosemary, 166. Silver, 82, 118, 164, 165, 180, 183.
Royalty, 193. Snow, 185.
Page 178
Rubber, 84, 163. Soap, 165, 172.
Rule, 53. Soap spirits, 166.
Rule, key-seat, 53, 54. Soda, sulphate, 172.
Rust preventive, 175. Sodium carbonate, 172.
Sodium silicate, 168.
S Sodium sulphate, 172.
Solder, 118, 175.
Saffro, 170. Solder, hard, 118.
Sal ammoniac, 119, 162, 165, 176, 185. Solder, soft, 118.
Salt, 165, 170, 183, 185. Soldering, 116, 117, 119, 176.
Sandarac, 169, 176. Solids, 84.
Saw, 26, 64, 76. Sonorous, 88.
Saw, wabble, 76. Sound, 87.
Scale, 100, 101. Sounding-boards, 88.
Science, 157. Spanish white, 168.
Scraper, 50, 51. Spectroscope, 90, 93, 161.
Scribe, 47, 53. Spectrum, 93.
Scruples, 180. Speed, 43.
Sealing wax, 176. Spelter, 118.
Section lining, 103, 104, 110.
p. 223
Sphere, 97.
Spiral, 78. Tempering, 113, 114, 115,176.
Sponge, 83. Tenacity, 79, 80.
Spring, 72, 79, 176. Thread, 74.
Square, 48, 61, 63. Thymol, 166.
Square combination, 24, 77, 81. Tin, 98, 118, 175, 176, 184.
Starch, 162, 163, 164. Ton, 180.
Steel, 39, 40, 42, 44, 63, 79, 113, 165, Tongs, 75.
168, 169, 170, 184. Tongs, lazy, 75.
Stethoscope, 90. Tool, 22, 28, 40, 41, 61, 64, 71, 108, 113,
Stove polish, 174, 175. 175.
Straight edge, 61. Tool boring, 43.
Stylus, 90. Tool cutting, 26, 29, 45, 64.
Sugar, 163. Tool holder, 64.
Sulphate of copper, 174. Tool hook, 28.
Sulphate of potash, 115. Tool, hooked, 44.
Sulphate of soda, 172. Tool knife, 28.
Sulphur, 167, 183. Tool, parting, 28.
Sulphuric acid, 165, 169, 175. Tool, roughing, 29.
Surfacing, 49, 50, 63. Tools, precision, 50.
Torsion, 79.
T Toughness, 114, 115.
Tracing cloth, 110.
Table of weights, 178. Tracing paper, 172.
Talcum, 169. Traction, 79.
Tallow, 176. Transmitting, 158.
Tannaform, 169. Transparent, 163.
Taps, 45. Transverse, 80.
Taste, 160. Treadle, 78.
Teeth, 72. Triangular, 97, 98.
Telegram, 158. Tripping driver, 78.
Telescope, 91, 92. Turmeric, 170.
Temperature, 82, 88, 114, 116, 118, 119. Turpentine, 162, 165, 172, 173, 174, 175.
Temperature table, 180. Turpentine, Venice, 176, 177.
p. 224
Rule, 53. Soap spirits, 166.
Rule, key-seat, 53, 54. Soda, sulphate, 172.
Rust preventive, 175. Sodium carbonate, 172.
Sodium silicate, 168.
S Sodium sulphate, 172.
Solder, 118, 175.
Saffro, 170. Solder, hard, 118.
Sal ammoniac, 119, 162, 165, 176, 185. Solder, soft, 118.
Salt, 165, 170, 183, 185. Soldering, 116, 117, 119, 176.
Sandarac, 169, 176. Solids, 84.
Saw, 26, 64, 76. Sonorous, 88.
Saw, wabble, 76. Sound, 87.
Scale, 100, 101. Sounding-boards, 88.
Science, 157. Spanish white, 168.
Scraper, 50, 51. Spectroscope, 90, 93, 161.
Scribe, 47, 53. Spectrum, 93.
Scruples, 180. Speed, 43.
Sealing wax, 176. Spelter, 118.
Section lining, 103, 104, 110.
p. 223
Sphere, 97.
Spiral, 78. Tempering, 113, 114, 115,176.
Sponge, 83. Tenacity, 79, 80.
Spring, 72, 79, 176. Thread, 74.
Square, 48, 61, 63. Thymol, 166.
Square combination, 24, 77, 81. Tin, 98, 118, 175, 176, 184.
Starch, 162, 163, 164. Ton, 180.
Steel, 39, 40, 42, 44, 63, 79, 113, 165, Tongs, 75.
168, 169, 170, 184. Tongs, lazy, 75.
Stethoscope, 90. Tool, 22, 28, 40, 41, 61, 64, 71, 108, 113,
Stove polish, 174, 175. 175.
Straight edge, 61. Tool boring, 43.
Stylus, 90. Tool cutting, 26, 29, 45, 64.
Sugar, 163. Tool holder, 64.
Sulphate of copper, 174. Tool hook, 28.
Sulphate of potash, 115. Tool, hooked, 44.
Sulphate of soda, 172. Tool knife, 28.
Sulphur, 167, 183. Tool, parting, 28.
Sulphuric acid, 165, 169, 175. Tool, roughing, 29.
Surfacing, 49, 50, 63. Tools, precision, 50.
Torsion, 79.
T Toughness, 114, 115.
Tracing cloth, 110.
Table of weights, 178. Tracing paper, 172.
Talcum, 169. Traction, 79.
Tallow, 176. Transmitting, 158.
Tannaform, 169. Transparent, 163.
Taps, 45. Transverse, 80.
Taste, 160. Treadle, 78.
Teeth, 72. Triangular, 97, 98.
Telegram, 158. Tripping driver, 78.
Telescope, 91, 92. Turmeric, 170.
Temperature, 82, 88, 114, 116, 118, 119. Turpentine, 162, 165, 172, 173, 174, 175.
Temperature table, 180. Turpentine, Venice, 176, 177.
p. 224
Page 179
U
W
Ultramarine, 171.
Undivided, 192. Water, 165, 166, 168, 172, 183, 186, 187.
Undulatory, 91. Waterproof, 162, 163.
Unguent, 114. Weight, 85.
Weight of steel, 179.
V Weight, troy, 180.
Welding, 115, 116, 117.
Valve, 70. Welding compound, 117.
Vapor, 87. Wheel, 27, 72, 73, 85, 86.
Varnish, 162, 170, 172, 175, 176. Whiting, 174.
Vaseline, 165, 175. Workshop, 162.
Velocity, 81, 87, 91. Wrench, 104.
Vermilion, 177.
Vertical, 97. Y
Vibrate, 160, 161.
Vibration, 87, 88, 90, 158. Yokes, 70, 76.
Vibratory, 91.
Vinegar, 163, 170, 173. Z
Violin, 159.
Vise, 33. Zinc, 118, 119, 164, 166, 175.
Vitascope, 90. Zinc chloride, 163.
W
Ultramarine, 171.
Undivided, 192. Water, 165, 166, 168, 172, 183, 186, 187.
Undulatory, 91. Waterproof, 162, 163.
Unguent, 114. Weight, 85.
Weight of steel, 179.
V Weight, troy, 180.
Welding, 115, 116, 117.
Valve, 70. Welding compound, 117.
Vapor, 87. Wheel, 27, 72, 73, 85, 86.
Varnish, 162, 170, 172, 175, 176. Whiting, 174.
Vaseline, 165, 175. Workshop, 162.
Velocity, 81, 87, 91. Wrench, 104.
Vermilion, 177.
Vertical, 97. Y
Vibrate, 160, 161.
Vibration, 87, 88, 90, 158. Yokes, 70, 76.
Vibratory, 91.
Vinegar, 163, 170, 173. Z
Violin, 159.
Vise, 33. Zinc, 118, 119, 164, 166, 175.
Vitascope, 90. Zinc chloride, 163.
Page 180
Page 181
THE BOYS' ELITE SERIES
12mo, cloth. Price 75c each.
Contains an attractive assortment of books for boys by standard and favorite
authors. Printed from large, clear type on a superior quality of paper, bound
in a superior quality of binders' cloth, ornamented with illustrated original
designs on covers stamped in colors from unique and appropriate dies. Each
book wrapped in attractive jacket.
1. Cudjo's Cave Cudjo's Trowbridge
2. Green Mountain Boys
3. Life of Kit Carson Edward L. Ellis
4. Tom Westlake's Golden Perry Newberry
Luck
5. Tony Keating's Surprises Mrs. G. R. Alden (Pansy)
6. Tour of the World in 80 Jules Verne
Days
12mo, cloth. Price 75c each.
Contains an attractive assortment of books for boys by standard and favorite
authors. Printed from large, clear type on a superior quality of paper, bound
in a superior quality of binders' cloth, ornamented with illustrated original
designs on covers stamped in colors from unique and appropriate dies. Each
book wrapped in attractive jacket.
1. Cudjo's Cave Cudjo's Trowbridge
2. Green Mountain Boys
3. Life of Kit Carson Edward L. Ellis
4. Tom Westlake's Golden Perry Newberry
Luck
5. Tony Keating's Surprises Mrs. G. R. Alden (Pansy)
6. Tour of the World in 80 Jules Verne
Days
Page 182
THE GIRLS' ELITE SERIES
12mo, cloth. Price 75c each.
Contains an assortment of attractive and desirable books for girls by
standard and favorite authors. The books are printed on a good quality of
paper in large clear type. Each title is complete and unabridged. Bound in
clothene, ornamented on the sides and back with attractive illustrative
designs and the title stamped on front and back.
1. Bee and the Butterfly Lucy Foster Madison
2. Dixie School Girl Gabrielle E. Jackson
3. Girls of Mount Morris Amanda Douglas
4. Hope's Messenger Gabrielle E. Jackson
5. The Little Aunt Marion Ames Taggart
6. A Modern Cinderella Amanda Douglas
For sale by all Booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of 75c
12mo, cloth. Price 75c each.
Contains an assortment of attractive and desirable books for girls by
standard and favorite authors. The books are printed on a good quality of
paper in large clear type. Each title is complete and unabridged. Bound in
clothene, ornamented on the sides and back with attractive illustrative
designs and the title stamped on front and back.
1. Bee and the Butterfly Lucy Foster Madison
2. Dixie School Girl Gabrielle E. Jackson
3. Girls of Mount Morris Amanda Douglas
4. Hope's Messenger Gabrielle E. Jackson
5. The Little Aunt Marion Ames Taggart
6. A Modern Cinderella Amanda Douglas
For sale by all Booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of 75c
Page 183
Page 184
THE "HOW-TO-DO-IT" BOOKS
Carpentry for Boys
A book which treats, in a most practical and fascinating manner all subjects
pertaining to the "King of Trades"; showing the care and use of tools;
drawing; designing, and the laying out of work; the principles involved in
the building of various kinds of structures, and the rudiments of
architecture. It contains over two hundred and fifty illustrations made
especially for this work, and includes also a complete glossary of the
technical terms used in the art. The most comprehensive volume on this
subject ever published for boys.
Electricity for Boys
The author has adopted the unique plan of setting forth the fundamental
principles in each phase of the science, and practically applying the work in
the successive stages. It shows how the knowledge has been developed, and
the reasons for the various phenomena, without using technical words so as
to bring it within the compass of every boy. It has a complete glossary of
terms, and is illustrated with two hundred original drawings.
Practical Mechanics for Boys
This book takes the beginner through a comprehensive series of practical
shop work, in which the uses of tools, and the structure and handling of
shop machinery are set forth; how they are utilized to perform the work,
and the manner in which all dimensional work is carried out. Every subject
is illustrated, and model building explained. It contains a glossary which
comprises a new system of cross references, a feature that will prove a
welcome departure in explaining subjects. Fully illustrated.
Carpentry for Boys
A book which treats, in a most practical and fascinating manner all subjects
pertaining to the "King of Trades"; showing the care and use of tools;
drawing; designing, and the laying out of work; the principles involved in
the building of various kinds of structures, and the rudiments of
architecture. It contains over two hundred and fifty illustrations made
especially for this work, and includes also a complete glossary of the
technical terms used in the art. The most comprehensive volume on this
subject ever published for boys.
Electricity for Boys
The author has adopted the unique plan of setting forth the fundamental
principles in each phase of the science, and practically applying the work in
the successive stages. It shows how the knowledge has been developed, and
the reasons for the various phenomena, without using technical words so as
to bring it within the compass of every boy. It has a complete glossary of
terms, and is illustrated with two hundred original drawings.
Practical Mechanics for Boys
This book takes the beginner through a comprehensive series of practical
shop work, in which the uses of tools, and the structure and handling of
shop machinery are set forth; how they are utilized to perform the work,
and the manner in which all dimensional work is carried out. Every subject
is illustrated, and model building explained. It contains a glossary which
comprises a new system of cross references, a feature that will prove a
welcome departure in explaining subjects. Fully illustrated.
Page 185
12mo, cloth. Price $1.00 each.
For sale by all Booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of $1.00.
For sale by all Booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of $1.00.
Page 186
Page 187
The American Boy's
Sports Series
BY MARK OVERTON
12 Mo Cloth. Illustrated. Price 60c Each.
These stories touch upon nearly every sport in which the active boy is
interested. Baseball, rowing, football, hockey, skating, ice-boating, sailing,
camping and fishing all serve to lend interest to an unusual series of books.
There are the following four titles:
1. Jack Winters' Baseball
Team; or, The
Mystery of the
Diamond.
2. Jack Winters'
Campmates; or,
Vacation Days in the
Woods.
3. Jack Winters' Gridiron
Chums; or, When the
Half-back Saved the
Day.
4. Jack Winters' Iceboat
Wonder; or, Leading
the Hockey Team to
Victory.
Sports Series
BY MARK OVERTON
12 Mo Cloth. Illustrated. Price 60c Each.
These stories touch upon nearly every sport in which the active boy is
interested. Baseball, rowing, football, hockey, skating, ice-boating, sailing,
camping and fishing all serve to lend interest to an unusual series of books.
There are the following four titles:
1. Jack Winters' Baseball
Team; or, The
Mystery of the
Diamond.
2. Jack Winters'
Campmates; or,
Vacation Days in the
Woods.
3. Jack Winters' Gridiron
Chums; or, When the
Half-back Saved the
Day.
4. Jack Winters' Iceboat
Wonder; or, Leading
the Hockey Team to
Victory.
Page 188
Page 189
Phil Bradley
Page 190
Mountain Boy's Series
BY SILAS R. BOONE
12 Mo. Cloth. Illustrated. Price 60c Each
These books describe with interesting detail the experience of a party of
boys among the mountain pines. They teach the young reader how to
protect themselves against the elements, what to do and what to avoid, and
above all to become self-reliant and manly. There are five titles:
1. Phil Bradley's Mountain
Boys; or, The Birch
Bark Lodge.
2. Phil Bradley at the
Wheel; or, The
Mountain Boys' Mad
Auto Dash.
3. Phil Bradley's Shooting
Box; or, The
Mountain Boys on
Currituck Sound.
4. Phil Bradley's Snow-shoe
Trail; or, The
Mountain Boys in
the Canadian Wilds.
5. Phil Bradley's Winning
Way.
BY SILAS R. BOONE
12 Mo. Cloth. Illustrated. Price 60c Each
These books describe with interesting detail the experience of a party of
boys among the mountain pines. They teach the young reader how to
protect themselves against the elements, what to do and what to avoid, and
above all to become self-reliant and manly. There are five titles:
1. Phil Bradley's Mountain
Boys; or, The Birch
Bark Lodge.
2. Phil Bradley at the
Wheel; or, The
Mountain Boys' Mad
Auto Dash.
3. Phil Bradley's Shooting
Box; or, The
Mountain Boys on
Currituck Sound.
4. Phil Bradley's Snow-shoe
Trail; or, The
Mountain Boys in
the Canadian Wilds.
5. Phil Bradley's Winning
Way.
Page 191
Page 192
GIRLS' LIBERTY SERIES
Contains an assortment of attractive and desirable books for girls by
standard and favorite authors. The books are printed on a good quality of
paper in large clear type. Each title is complete and unabridged. Bound in
clothene, ornamented on the sides and back with attractive illustrative
designs and the title stamped on front and back.
12mo, clothene. Price 50c each.
1. Camp Fire Girls on a Long Hike, or, Stella M. Francis
Lost in the Great Northern Woods
2. Daddy's Girl Mrs. L. T. Meade
3. Ethel Hollister's First Summer as a Irene Elliott
Camp Fire Girl Benson
4. Ethel Hollister's Second Summer Irene Elliott
Benson
5. Flat Iron for a Farthing Mrs. Ewing
6. Four Little Mischiefs Rose Mulholland
7. Girls and I Mrs. Molesworth
8. Girl from America Mrs. L. T. Meade
9. Grandmother Dear Mrs. Molesworth
10. Irvington Stories Mary Mapes Dodge
11. Little Lame Prince Mrs. Muloch
12. Little Susie Stories Mrs. H. Prentiss
13. Mrs. Over the Way Julianna Horatio
Ewing
14. Naughty Miss Bunny Rose Mulholland
15. Sweet Girl Graduate Mrs. L. T. Meade
16. School Queens Mrs. L. T. Meade
17. Sue, A Little Heroine Mrs. L. T. Meade
18. Wild Kitty Mrs. L. T. Meade
For sale by all Booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of 50c
Contains an assortment of attractive and desirable books for girls by
standard and favorite authors. The books are printed on a good quality of
paper in large clear type. Each title is complete and unabridged. Bound in
clothene, ornamented on the sides and back with attractive illustrative
designs and the title stamped on front and back.
12mo, clothene. Price 50c each.
1. Camp Fire Girls on a Long Hike, or, Stella M. Francis
Lost in the Great Northern Woods
2. Daddy's Girl Mrs. L. T. Meade
3. Ethel Hollister's First Summer as a Irene Elliott
Camp Fire Girl Benson
4. Ethel Hollister's Second Summer Irene Elliott
Benson
5. Flat Iron for a Farthing Mrs. Ewing
6. Four Little Mischiefs Rose Mulholland
7. Girls and I Mrs. Molesworth
8. Girl from America Mrs. L. T. Meade
9. Grandmother Dear Mrs. Molesworth
10. Irvington Stories Mary Mapes Dodge
11. Little Lame Prince Mrs. Muloch
12. Little Susie Stories Mrs. H. Prentiss
13. Mrs. Over the Way Julianna Horatio
Ewing
14. Naughty Miss Bunny Rose Mulholland
15. Sweet Girl Graduate Mrs. L. T. Meade
16. School Queens Mrs. L. T. Meade
17. Sue, A Little Heroine Mrs. L. T. Meade
18. Wild Kitty Mrs. L. T. Meade
For sale by all Booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of 50c
Page 193
Page 194
Page 195
THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
By ROGER T. FINLAY
12mo, cloth. Price 75c each, postpaid.
Thrilling adventures on land and sea of two boys and a man cast upon an
island in the South Seas without food or weapons; their experience in
fashioning clothing, tools and weapons, and in overcoming nature and
subduing and civilizing savage tribes; covers a wide range of subjects.
1. The Castaways 5. The Capture and Pursuit
2. Exploring the Island 6. The Conquest of the
Savages
3. The Mysteries of the 7. The Adventures on Strange
Caverns Islands
4. The Tribesmen 8. The Treasures of the
Islands
By ROGER T. FINLAY
12mo, cloth. Price 75c each, postpaid.
Thrilling adventures on land and sea of two boys and a man cast upon an
island in the South Seas without food or weapons; their experience in
fashioning clothing, tools and weapons, and in overcoming nature and
subduing and civilizing savage tribes; covers a wide range of subjects.
1. The Castaways 5. The Capture and Pursuit
2. Exploring the Island 6. The Conquest of the
Savages
3. The Mysteries of the 7. The Adventures on Strange
Caverns Islands
4. The Tribesmen 8. The Treasures of the
Islands
Page 196
THE BOY GLOBE TROTTERS
By ELBERT FISHER
12mo, cloth. Price 75c each, postpaid.
This is a series of form books relating the adventures of two boys who
made a trip around the world, working their way as they go. They meet with
various peoples having strange habits and customs, and their adventures
from a medium for the introduction of much instructive matter relative to
the character and industries of the cities and countries through which they
pass. A description is given of the native sports of boys in each of the
foreign countries through which they travel. The books are illustrated by
decorative head and end pieces for each chapter, there being 36 original
drawings in each book, all by the author, and four striking halftones.
1. From New York to the Golden Crate
2. From San Francisco to Japan
3. From Tokio to Bombay
4. From India to the War Zone
For sale by all Booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of 75c
By ELBERT FISHER
12mo, cloth. Price 75c each, postpaid.
This is a series of form books relating the adventures of two boys who
made a trip around the world, working their way as they go. They meet with
various peoples having strange habits and customs, and their adventures
from a medium for the introduction of much instructive matter relative to
the character and industries of the cities and countries through which they
pass. A description is given of the native sports of boys in each of the
foreign countries through which they travel. The books are illustrated by
decorative head and end pieces for each chapter, there being 36 original
drawings in each book, all by the author, and four striking halftones.
1. From New York to the Golden Crate
2. From San Francisco to Japan
3. From Tokio to Bombay
4. From India to the War Zone
For sale by all Booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of 75c
Page 197
Page 198
BOYS' COPYRIGHTED BOOKS
Printed from large, clear type on a superior quality of paper, embellished
with original illustrations by eminent artists, and bound in a superior quality
of book binders' cloth, ornamented with illustrated covers, stamped in
colors from unique and appropriate dies, each book wrapped in a glazed
paper wrapper printed in colors.
MOTOR BOAT BOYS SERIES
By Louis Arundel
1. The Motor Club's Cruise Down the Mississippi; or, The Dash for
Dixie.
2. The Motor Club on the St. Lawrence River; or, Adventures Among
the Thousand Islands.
3. The Motor Club on the Great Lakes; or, Exploring the Mystic Isle
of Mackinac.
4. Motor Boat Boys Among the Florida Keys; or, The Struggle for the
Leadership.
5. Motor Boat Boys Down the Coast; or, Through Storm and Stress.
6. Motor Boat Boys' River Chase.
THE BIRD BOYS SERIES
By John Luther Langworthy
1. The Bird Boys; or, The Young Sky Pilots' First Air Voyage.
2. The Bird Boys on the Wing; or, Aeroplane Chums in the Tropics.
3. The Bird Boys Among the Clouds; or, Young Aviators in a Wreck.
4. Bird Boys' Flight; or, A Hydroplane Round-up.
Printed from large, clear type on a superior quality of paper, embellished
with original illustrations by eminent artists, and bound in a superior quality
of book binders' cloth, ornamented with illustrated covers, stamped in
colors from unique and appropriate dies, each book wrapped in a glazed
paper wrapper printed in colors.
MOTOR BOAT BOYS SERIES
By Louis Arundel
1. The Motor Club's Cruise Down the Mississippi; or, The Dash for
Dixie.
2. The Motor Club on the St. Lawrence River; or, Adventures Among
the Thousand Islands.
3. The Motor Club on the Great Lakes; or, Exploring the Mystic Isle
of Mackinac.
4. Motor Boat Boys Among the Florida Keys; or, The Struggle for the
Leadership.
5. Motor Boat Boys Down the Coast; or, Through Storm and Stress.
6. Motor Boat Boys' River Chase.
THE BIRD BOYS SERIES
By John Luther Langworthy
1. The Bird Boys; or, The Young Sky Pilots' First Air Voyage.
2. The Bird Boys on the Wing; or, Aeroplane Chums in the Tropics.
3. The Bird Boys Among the Clouds; or, Young Aviators in a Wreck.
4. Bird Boys' Flight; or, A Hydroplane Round-up.
Page 199
5. Bird Boys' Aeroplane Wonder; or, Young Aviators on a Cattle
Ranch.
CANOE AND CAMPFIRE SERIES
By St. George Rathborne
1. Canoe Mates in Canada; or, Three Boys Afloat on the
Saskatchewan.
2. Young Fur Takers; or, Traps and Trails in the Wilderness.
3. The House Boat Boys; or, Drifting Down to the Sunny South.
4. Chums in Dixie; or, The Strange Cruise in the Motor Boat.
5. Camp Mates in Michigan; or, With Pack and Paddle in the Pine
Woods.
6. Rocky Mountain Boys; or, Camping in the Big Game Country.
For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of 75c
Ranch.
CANOE AND CAMPFIRE SERIES
By St. George Rathborne
1. Canoe Mates in Canada; or, Three Boys Afloat on the
Saskatchewan.
2. Young Fur Takers; or, Traps and Trails in the Wilderness.
3. The House Boat Boys; or, Drifting Down to the Sunny South.
4. Chums in Dixie; or, The Strange Cruise in the Motor Boat.
5. Camp Mates in Michigan; or, With Pack and Paddle in the Pine
Woods.
6. Rocky Mountain Boys; or, Camping in the Big Game Country.
For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of 75c
Page 200
ALWAYS ASK FOR THE DONOHUE
Complete Editions and you will get the best for the least money
Henty Series
FOR BOYS
G. A. Henty was the most prolific writer of boy's stories of the
nineteenth century. From two to five books a year came from his facile
pen. No Christmas holidays were complete without a new "Henty
Book." This new series comprises 45 titles. They are printed on an extra
quality of paper, from new plates and bound in the best quality of cloth,
stamped on back and side in inks from unique and attractive dies. 12
mo. cloth. Each book in a printed wrapper.
1 Among Malay Pirates 24 Lion of St. Mark
2 Bonnie Prince Charlie 26 Lost Heir, The
3 Boy Knight, The 25 Lion of the North
4 Bravest of the Brave 27 Maori and Settler
5 By England's Aid 28 One of the 28th
6 By Pike and Dyke 29 Orange and Green
7 By Right of Conquest 30 Out on the Pampas
8 By Sheer Pluck 31 Queen's Cup, The
9 Captain Bayley's Heir 32 Rujub, the Juggler
10 Cat of Bubastes 33 St. George for England
11 Col. Thorndyke's Secret 34 Sturdy and Strong
12 Cornet of Horse, The 35 Through the Fray
13 Dragon and the Raven 36 True to the Old Flag
14 Facing Death 37 Under Drake's Flag
15 Final Reckoning, A 38 With Clive in India
16 For Name and Fame 39 With Lee in Virginia
17 For the Temple 40 With Wolfe in Canada
18 Friends, Though Divided 41 Young Buglers, The
19 Golden Canon 42 Young Carthaginians
20 In Freedom's Cause 43 Young Colonists, The
21 In the Reign of Terror 44 Young Franc-Tireurs
22 In Times of Peril 45 Young Midshipman
23 Jack Archer
Complete Editions and you will get the best for the least money
Henty Series
FOR BOYS
G. A. Henty was the most prolific writer of boy's stories of the
nineteenth century. From two to five books a year came from his facile
pen. No Christmas holidays were complete without a new "Henty
Book." This new series comprises 45 titles. They are printed on an extra
quality of paper, from new plates and bound in the best quality of cloth,
stamped on back and side in inks from unique and attractive dies. 12
mo. cloth. Each book in a printed wrapper.
1 Among Malay Pirates 24 Lion of St. Mark
2 Bonnie Prince Charlie 26 Lost Heir, The
3 Boy Knight, The 25 Lion of the North
4 Bravest of the Brave 27 Maori and Settler
5 By England's Aid 28 One of the 28th
6 By Pike and Dyke 29 Orange and Green
7 By Right of Conquest 30 Out on the Pampas
8 By Sheer Pluck 31 Queen's Cup, The
9 Captain Bayley's Heir 32 Rujub, the Juggler
10 Cat of Bubastes 33 St. George for England
11 Col. Thorndyke's Secret 34 Sturdy and Strong
12 Cornet of Horse, The 35 Through the Fray
13 Dragon and the Raven 36 True to the Old Flag
14 Facing Death 37 Under Drake's Flag
15 Final Reckoning, A 38 With Clive in India
16 For Name and Fame 39 With Lee in Virginia
17 For the Temple 40 With Wolfe in Canada
18 Friends, Though Divided 41 Young Buglers, The
19 Golden Canon 42 Young Carthaginians
20 In Freedom's Cause 43 Young Colonists, The
21 In the Reign of Terror 44 Young Franc-Tireurs
22 In Times of Peril 45 Young Midshipman
23 Jack Archer
Page 201
All of above titles can be procured at the store where this book was
bought, or sent to any address for 75c, postage paid, by the publishers
bought, or sent to any address for 75c, postage paid, by the publishers
Page 202
ALWAYS ASK FOR THE DONOHUE
COMPLETE EDITIONS—THE BEST FOR LEAST MONEY
WOODCRAFT
for Boy Scouts and Others
By OWEN JONES and MARCUS WOODMAN With a Message to
Boy Scouts by SIR BADEN-POWELL, Founder of the Boy Scouts'
Movement.
One of the essential requirements of the Boy Scout training is a
Knowledge of Woodcraft. This necessitates a book embracing all the
subjects and treating on all the topics that a thorough knowledge of
Woodcraft implies.
This book thoroughly exhausts the subject. It imparts a comprehensive
knowledge of woods from fungus growth to the most stately monarch of
the forest; it treats of the habits and lairs of all the feathered and furry
inhabitants of the woods. Shows how to trail wild animals; how to
identify birds and beasts by their tracks, calls, etc. Tells how to forecast
the weather, and in fact; treats on every phase of nature with which a
Boy Scout or any woodman or lover of nature should be familiar. The
authorship guarantees it's authenticity and reliability. Indispensable to
"Boy Scouts" and others. Printed from large clear type on superior
paper.
Embellished With Over 100 Thumb Nail
Illustrations Taken From Life
Bound in Cloth. Stamped with unique and appropriate designs in ink!
Price, 75c Postpaid
COMPLETE EDITIONS—THE BEST FOR LEAST MONEY
WOODCRAFT
for Boy Scouts and Others
By OWEN JONES and MARCUS WOODMAN With a Message to
Boy Scouts by SIR BADEN-POWELL, Founder of the Boy Scouts'
Movement.
One of the essential requirements of the Boy Scout training is a
Knowledge of Woodcraft. This necessitates a book embracing all the
subjects and treating on all the topics that a thorough knowledge of
Woodcraft implies.
This book thoroughly exhausts the subject. It imparts a comprehensive
knowledge of woods from fungus growth to the most stately monarch of
the forest; it treats of the habits and lairs of all the feathered and furry
inhabitants of the woods. Shows how to trail wild animals; how to
identify birds and beasts by their tracks, calls, etc. Tells how to forecast
the weather, and in fact; treats on every phase of nature with which a
Boy Scout or any woodman or lover of nature should be familiar. The
authorship guarantees it's authenticity and reliability. Indispensable to
"Boy Scouts" and others. Printed from large clear type on superior
paper.
Embellished With Over 100 Thumb Nail
Illustrations Taken From Life
Bound in Cloth. Stamped with unique and appropriate designs in ink!
Price, 75c Postpaid
Page 203
M. A. DONOHUE & CO.
701-727 S. Dearborn St. CHICAGO
Transcriber's Note:
Every effort has been made to replicate this text as
faithfully as possible, including obsolete and variant
spellings and other inconsistencies. Obvious
spelling/typographical and punctuation errors have
been corrected after careful comparison with other
occurrences within the text and consultation of external
sources. Minor punctuation errors have been amended
without note.
Page 137: Incorrect pressure of 88 oz. for wind speed
of 10 mph changed to 8 oz.
Page 146: Micron incorrectly printed as 1.25400,
changed to 1/24500.
Page 178: Corrected table entry for 1-7/8, printed as
1/7-16.
Alphabetic order errors in the glossary retained.
701-727 S. Dearborn St. CHICAGO
Transcriber's Note:
Every effort has been made to replicate this text as
faithfully as possible, including obsolete and variant
spellings and other inconsistencies. Obvious
spelling/typographical and punctuation errors have
been corrected after careful comparison with other
occurrences within the text and consultation of external
sources. Minor punctuation errors have been amended
without note.
Page 137: Incorrect pressure of 88 oz. for wind speed
of 10 mph changed to 8 oz.
Page 146: Micron incorrectly printed as 1.25400,
changed to 1/24500.
Page 178: Corrected table entry for 1-7/8, printed as
1/7-16.
Alphabetic order errors in the glossary retained.
Page 204
*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK PRACTICAL
MECHANICS FOR BOYS ***
Updated editions will replace the previous one—the old editions will be
renamed.
Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright law
means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the
Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States
without permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules,
set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to copying
and distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works to protect the
PROJECT GUTENBERG™ concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a
registered trademark, and may not be used if you charge for an eBook,
except by following the terms of the trademark license, including paying
royalties for use of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge
anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is
very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation
of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project Gutenberg
eBooks may be modified and printed and given away—you may do
practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected by
U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark license,
especially commercial redistribution.
START: FULL LICENSE
MECHANICS FOR BOYS ***
Updated editions will replace the previous one—the old editions will be
renamed.
Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright law
means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the
Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States
without permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules,
set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to copying
and distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works to protect the
PROJECT GUTENBERG™ concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a
registered trademark, and may not be used if you charge for an eBook,
except by following the terms of the trademark license, including paying
royalties for use of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge
anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is
very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation
of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project Gutenberg
eBooks may be modified and printed and given away—you may do
practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected by
U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark license,
especially commercial redistribution.
START: FULL LICENSE
Page 205
THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG™ LICENSE
PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the free
distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work (or any
other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project Gutenberg”), you
agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project Gutenberg License
available with this file or online at www.gutenberg.org/license.
Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing
Project Gutenberg electronic works
1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg electronic work,
you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to and accept all the
terms of this license and intellectual property (trademark/copyright)
agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all the terms of this agreement,
you must cease using and return or destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg
electronic works in your possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy
of or access to a Project Gutenberg electronic work and you do not agree to
be bound by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the
person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be used on
or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who agree to be
bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few things that you can
do with most Project Gutenberg electronic works even without complying
with the full terms of this agreement. See paragraph 1.C below. There are a
lot of things you can do with Project Gutenberg electronic works if you
follow the terms of this agreement and help preserve free future access to
Project Gutenberg electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below.
1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the Foundation”
or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
Gutenberg electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the
collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an individual
work is unprotected by copyright law in the United States and you are
PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the free
distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work (or any
other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project Gutenberg”), you
agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project Gutenberg License
available with this file or online at www.gutenberg.org/license.
Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing
Project Gutenberg electronic works
1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg electronic work,
you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to and accept all the
terms of this license and intellectual property (trademark/copyright)
agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all the terms of this agreement,
you must cease using and return or destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg
electronic works in your possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy
of or access to a Project Gutenberg electronic work and you do not agree to
be bound by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the
person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be used on
or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who agree to be
bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few things that you can
do with most Project Gutenberg electronic works even without complying
with the full terms of this agreement. See paragraph 1.C below. There are a
lot of things you can do with Project Gutenberg electronic works if you
follow the terms of this agreement and help preserve free future access to
Project Gutenberg electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below.
1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the Foundation”
or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
Gutenberg electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the
collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an individual
work is unprotected by copyright law in the United States and you are
Page 206
located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative works
based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg are
removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project Gutenberg
mission of promoting free access to electronic works by freely sharing
Project Gutenberg works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for
keeping the Project Gutenberg name associated with the work. You can
easily comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the
same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg License when you
share it without charge with others.
1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in a
constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check the
laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement before
downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or creating
derivative works based on this work or any other Project Gutenberg work.
The Foundation makes no representations concerning the copyright status
of any work in any country other than the United States.
1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
access to, the full Project Gutenberg License must appear prominently
whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg work (any work on which the
phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the phrase “Project
Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, copied
or distributed:
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States
and most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no
restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it
under the terms of the Project Gutenberg™ License included with
this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in
the United States, you will have to check the laws of the country
where you are located before using this eBook.
copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative works
based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg are
removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project Gutenberg
mission of promoting free access to electronic works by freely sharing
Project Gutenberg works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for
keeping the Project Gutenberg name associated with the work. You can
easily comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the
same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg License when you
share it without charge with others.
1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in a
constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check the
laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement before
downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or creating
derivative works based on this work or any other Project Gutenberg work.
The Foundation makes no representations concerning the copyright status
of any work in any country other than the United States.
1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
access to, the full Project Gutenberg License must appear prominently
whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg work (any work on which the
phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the phrase “Project
Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, copied
or distributed:
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States
and most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no
restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it
under the terms of the Project Gutenberg™ License included with
this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in
the United States, you will have to check the laws of the country
where you are located before using this eBook.
Page 207
1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg electronic work is derived from
texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not contain a notice
indicating that it is posted with permission of the copyright holder), the
work can be copied and distributed to anyone in the United States without
paying any fees or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a
work with the phrase “Project Gutenberg” associated with or appearing on
the work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs
1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
Project Gutenberg trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg electronic work is posted with the
permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution must comply
with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional terms imposed
by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked to the Project
Gutenberg License for all works posted with the permission of the
copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg License
terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this work or any
other work associated with Project Gutenberg.
1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without prominently
displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with active links or
immediate access to the full terms of the Project Gutenberg License.
1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or
distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg work in a format other than “Plain
Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official version posted on the
official Project Gutenberg website (www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no
additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a copy, a means of
exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work
in its original “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other form. Any alternate format
must include the full Project Gutenberg License as specified in paragraph
1.E.1.
texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not contain a notice
indicating that it is posted with permission of the copyright holder), the
work can be copied and distributed to anyone in the United States without
paying any fees or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a
work with the phrase “Project Gutenberg” associated with or appearing on
the work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs
1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
Project Gutenberg trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg electronic work is posted with the
permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution must comply
with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional terms imposed
by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked to the Project
Gutenberg License for all works posted with the permission of the
copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg License
terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this work or any
other work associated with Project Gutenberg.
1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without prominently
displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with active links or
immediate access to the full terms of the Project Gutenberg License.
1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or
distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg work in a format other than “Plain
Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official version posted on the
official Project Gutenberg website (www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no
additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a copy, a means of
exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work
in its original “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other form. Any alternate format
must include the full Project Gutenberg License as specified in paragraph
1.E.1.
Page 208
1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, performing,
copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg works unless you comply
with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing access to
or distributing Project Gutenberg electronic works provided that:
• You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from the
use of Project Gutenberg works calculated using the method you
already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed to the
owner of the Project Gutenberg trademark, but he has agreed to donate
royalties under this paragraph to the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid within 60 days
following each date on which you prepare (or are legally required to
prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty payments should be clearly
marked as such and sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation at the address specified in Section 4, “Information about
donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.”
• You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he does
not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg™ License. You
must require such a user to return or destroy all copies of the works
possessed in a physical medium and discontinue all use of and all
access to other copies of Project Gutenberg™ works.
• You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of
receipt of the work.
• You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free distribution
of Project Gutenberg™ works.
1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg™
electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set forth in
this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of the Project
copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg works unless you comply
with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing access to
or distributing Project Gutenberg electronic works provided that:
• You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from the
use of Project Gutenberg works calculated using the method you
already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed to the
owner of the Project Gutenberg trademark, but he has agreed to donate
royalties under this paragraph to the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid within 60 days
following each date on which you prepare (or are legally required to
prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty payments should be clearly
marked as such and sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation at the address specified in Section 4, “Information about
donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.”
• You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he does
not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg™ License. You
must require such a user to return or destroy all copies of the works
possessed in a physical medium and discontinue all use of and all
access to other copies of Project Gutenberg™ works.
• You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of
receipt of the work.
• You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free distribution
of Project Gutenberg™ works.
1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg™
electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set forth in
this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of the Project
Page 209
Gutenberg™ trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3
below.
1.F.
1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread works
not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project Gutenberg™
collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg™ electronic works, and
the medium on which they may be stored, may contain “Defects,” such as,
but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or corrupt data, transcription
errors, a copyright or other intellectual property infringement, a defective or
damaged disk or other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that
damage or cannot be read by your equipment.
1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except
for the “Right of Replacement or Refund” described in paragraph 1.F.3, the
Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
Gutenberg™ trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
Gutenberg™ electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all liability to
you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal fees. YOU AGREE
THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT
EXCEPT THOSE PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE
THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY
DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE LIABLE
TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL,
PUNITIVE OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE
NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you
discover a defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you
can receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with the
defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a refund.
If you received the work electronically, the person or entity providing it to
below.
1.F.
1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread works
not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project Gutenberg™
collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg™ electronic works, and
the medium on which they may be stored, may contain “Defects,” such as,
but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or corrupt data, transcription
errors, a copyright or other intellectual property infringement, a defective or
damaged disk or other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that
damage or cannot be read by your equipment.
1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except
for the “Right of Replacement or Refund” described in paragraph 1.F.3, the
Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
Gutenberg™ trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
Gutenberg™ electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all liability to
you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal fees. YOU AGREE
THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT
EXCEPT THOSE PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE
THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY
DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE LIABLE
TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL,
PUNITIVE OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE
NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you
discover a defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you
can receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with the
defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a refund.
If you received the work electronically, the person or entity providing it to
Page 210
you may choose to give you a second opportunity to receive the work
electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy is also defective, you
may demand a refund in writing without further opportunities to fix the
problem.
1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth in
paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ‘AS-IS’, WITH NO OTHER
WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied warranties or
the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. If any disclaimer or
limitation set forth in this agreement violates the law of the state applicable
to this agreement, the agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum
disclaimer or limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity
or unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the
remaining provisions.
1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
providing copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in accordance
with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works,
harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, that
arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do or cause
to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg work, (b)
alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg
work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project
Gutenberg
Project Gutenberg is synonymous with the free distribution of electronic
works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers including
obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists because of the
electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy is also defective, you
may demand a refund in writing without further opportunities to fix the
problem.
1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth in
paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ‘AS-IS’, WITH NO OTHER
WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied warranties or
the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. If any disclaimer or
limitation set forth in this agreement violates the law of the state applicable
to this agreement, the agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum
disclaimer or limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity
or unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the
remaining provisions.
1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
providing copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in accordance
with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works,
harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, that
arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do or cause
to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg work, (b)
alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg
work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project
Gutenberg
Project Gutenberg is synonymous with the free distribution of electronic
works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers including
obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists because of the
Page 211
efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from people in all walks of
life.
Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the assistance
they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg’s goals and ensuring
that the Project Gutenberg collection will remain freely available for
generations to come. In 2001, the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation was created to provide a secure and permanent future for
Project Gutenberg and future generations. To learn more about the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations
can help, see Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at
www.gutenberg.org.
Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation
The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit 501(c)
(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the state of
Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal Revenue Service.
The Foundation’s EIN or federal tax identification number is 64-6221541.
Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation are tax
deductible to the full extent permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state’s
laws.
The Foundation’s business office is located at 41 Watchung Plaza #516,
Montclair NJ 07042, USA, +1 (862) 621-9288. Email contact links and up
to date contact information can be found at the Foundation’s website and
official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact
Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive without widespread
public support and donations to carry out its mission of increasing the
number of public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed
in machine-readable form accessible by the widest array of equipment
life.
Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the assistance
they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg’s goals and ensuring
that the Project Gutenberg collection will remain freely available for
generations to come. In 2001, the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation was created to provide a secure and permanent future for
Project Gutenberg and future generations. To learn more about the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations
can help, see Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at
www.gutenberg.org.
Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation
The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit 501(c)
(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the state of
Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal Revenue Service.
The Foundation’s EIN or federal tax identification number is 64-6221541.
Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation are tax
deductible to the full extent permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state’s
laws.
The Foundation’s business office is located at 41 Watchung Plaza #516,
Montclair NJ 07042, USA, +1 (862) 621-9288. Email contact links and up
to date contact information can be found at the Foundation’s website and
official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact
Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive without widespread
public support and donations to carry out its mission of increasing the
number of public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed
in machine-readable form accessible by the widest array of equipment
Page 212
including outdated equipment. Many small donations ($1 to $5,000) are
particularly important to maintaining tax exempt status with the IRS.
The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United States.
Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a considerable effort,
much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up with these
requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations where we have not
received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND DONATIONS or
determine the status of compliance for any particular state visit
www.gutenberg.org/donate.
While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we have
not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition against
accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who approach us
with offers to donate.
International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make any
statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from outside the
United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation methods
and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other ways including
checks, online payments and credit card donations. To donate, please visit:
www.gutenberg.org/donate.
Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg
electronic works
Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg
concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared with
anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project Gutenberg
eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed editions,
all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in the U.S. unless a
particularly important to maintaining tax exempt status with the IRS.
The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United States.
Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a considerable effort,
much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up with these
requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations where we have not
received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND DONATIONS or
determine the status of compliance for any particular state visit
www.gutenberg.org/donate.
While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we have
not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition against
accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who approach us
with offers to donate.
International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make any
statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from outside the
United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation methods
and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other ways including
checks, online payments and credit card donations. To donate, please visit:
www.gutenberg.org/donate.
Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg
electronic works
Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg
concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared with
anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project Gutenberg
eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed editions,
all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in the U.S. unless a
Page 213
copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily keep eBooks in
compliance with any particular paper edition.
Most people start at our website which has the main PG search facility:
www.gutenberg.org.
This website includes information about Project Gutenberg, including how
to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation,
how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email
newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
compliance with any particular paper edition.
Most people start at our website which has the main PG search facility:
www.gutenberg.org.
This website includes information about Project Gutenberg, including how
to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation,
how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email
newsletter to hear about new eBooks.